Preface, Contents SIMATIC ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device Manual EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Edition 04 Product Overview 1 Installation 2 Wiring 3 Commissioning 4 Diagnostics 5 General Technical Data 6 Terminal Blocks and Supplementary Terminals - Technical Data 7 ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data 8 ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks - Technical Data 9 SC Digital Electronic Modules - Technical Data 10 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data 12 SC 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module 13 Order Numbers A Type and Device Master Files B Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame C ESD D Glossary, Index Safety Guidelines ! ! ! This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger: Danger indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken. Warning indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Note draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a particular part of the documentation. Qualified Personnel The device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this manual. Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits, equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards. Correct Usage ! Note the following: Warning This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens. This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended. (A) . Trademarks SIMATIC and SINEC are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG. Some of the other designations used in these documents are also registered trademarks; the owner's rights may be violated if they are used be third parties for their own purposes. Copyright Siemens AG 1996 All rights reserved Disclaimer of Liability The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed. Siemens AG Automation Group Industrial Automation Systems P.O. Box 4848, D-90327 Nuremberg Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Technical data subject to change. Siemens AG 1996 Order No. 6ES7 130-1AA00-8BA0 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device Preface Purpose of the Manual The information in this manual will enable you to run the ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect SC in the ET 200 distributed I/O system as a DP slave. Contents of the Manual Order number 6ES7 130-1AA00-8AA0 comprises the manual ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device, Release 4 User information on the ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC (SC = Smart Connect) Appendices Applicability of the Manual This manual is valid for the components of the ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect SC specified in Appendix A. It describes the components valid at the time of publication. We reserve the right to attach current product information on new and updated components. Changes Since the Previous Manual Changes have been made since the previous version of this manual, order number 6ES7 130-1AA00-8AA0, Release 3, as regards the following: ET 200L-SC IM-SC (fine-step modular I/O device) ET 200L: AC terminal block and electronics blocks ET 200L-SC: High-speed SC analog input modules and counter module ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c iii Preface Standards and Certification The ET 200L and Smart Connect SC meet the requirements and and criteria of IEC 1131, Part 2 and are based on the EN 50170 Volume 2, PROFIBUS standard. They meet the requirements for the CE marking, and have CSA, UL and FM certification. You will find detailed information on certification and standards in Section 6.1. Recycling and Disposal The ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect SC are environmentfriendly products. They are exceptional for the following: Development in accordance with the guidelines for environment-friendly products: SN 36350 Laser inscriptions (i.e. no labels) Plastics identification in accordance with DIN 54840 Fewer materials used due to size reduction; fewer parts due to integration in ASICs The ET 200L and Smart Connect SC are recyclable due to their low contaminant content. To recycle and dispose of your old equipment in an environment-friendly manner, contact: Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Anlagenbau und Technische Dienstleistungen ATD TD3 Kreislaufwirtschaft Postfach 32 40 D-91050 Erlangen Phone: +49 91 31/7-3 36 98 Fax: +49 91 31/7-2 66 43 The people there will adapt their advice to suit your situation and provide a comprehensive and flexible recycling and disposal system at a fixed price. After disposal you will receive information giving you a breakdown of the relevant material fractions and the associated documents as evidence of the materials involved. Other Manuals In addition to this manual, you will require the manual for the relevant DP master. CD-ROM The whole of the ET 200 documentation is also available as a collection on CD-ROM. iv ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Preface Aids to Using the Manual To enable you to access the information you require as quickly as possible, the manual contains the following aids: At the beginning of the manual you will find a complete table of contents and lists of all the figures and tables in the manual. In the left-hand margin in each chapter you will find headings that provide you with an overview of the contents of the various sections . Following the appendices you will find a glossary, which contains definitions of important terms used in the manual. At the end of the manual you will find a detailed index, which gives you rapid access to the information you require. Additional Support If you have technical questions, please get in touch with your Siemens representative or office. You will find the address in the manuals of the DP masters (e.g. in the appendix entitled "Siemens Worldwide" of the S7-300 Programmable Controller; Hardware and Installation manual) in catalogs and in CompuServe (GO AUTFORUM). A hotline is available on +49 (911) 895-7000 (fax: 7001). If you require the type file or device master file, you can download it by modem. Dial +49 (911) 737972. If you have questions or comments about the manual itself, please fill in the form at the end of the manual and send it to the specified address. Please give us your personal assessment of the manual on the form. To make things easier for those new to the ET 200 distributed I/O device, we offer the "KO-ET 200" workshop. If you are interested, please contact your regional training center or the central training center in D-90327 Nuremberg (tel. 0911 895 3154). ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c v Preface Constantly Updated Information You can get constantly updated information on SIMATIC products: On the Internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/ On the fax polling no. +49 8765-93 00 50 00 In addition, SIMATIC Customer Support provides you with current information and downloads that can be useful to you when using SIMATIC products: On the Internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/support/html_00/index.shtml At the SIMATIC Customer Support mailbox on +49 (911) 895-7100 To access the mailbox, use a modem of up to V.34 (28.8 kbps) with the following parameter settings: 8, N, 1, ANSI. Alternatively, use ISDN (x.75, 64 kbps). You can contact SIMATIC Customer Support by phone on +49 (911) 895-7000 and by fax on +49 (911) 895-7002. You can also send queries by e-mail on the Internet or to the above mailbox. vi ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Contents Preface Contents 1 2 3 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1.1 What Is the ET 200 Distributed I/O System? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 What Is the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device and Smart Connect? . . . . . . . What Is the ET 200L Block I/O Device? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is the ET 200L-SC Modular I/O Device? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is the ET 200L-SC IM-SC Fine-Step Modular I/O Device? . . . . . . . . 1-3 1-8 1-10 1-13 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2.1 Installing the ET 200L TB 16L/TB 32L Terminal Block and Supplementary Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 2.2 Installing and Disassembling the ET 200L Electronics Block . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 2.3 Installing the TB 16IM-SC/TB 16SC Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 2.4 Connecting Smart Connect Electronic Modules to the TB 16IM-SC/TB 16SC Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 2.5 Installing the ET 200L IM-SC Interface Module on the TB 16IM-SC Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 2.6 Setting the ET 200L PROFIBUS Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 Installing a supplementary terminal and shield terminal on the TB 16IM-SC/ TB 16SC terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 2-18 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3.1 General Rules and Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 3.2 Configuring the Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 3.3 Wiring Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 3.4 Wiring the ET 200L TB 16L/TB 32L Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 3.5 Wiring the Smart Connect TB 16SC Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 3.6 Wiring the ET 200L TB 16IM-SC Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 3.7 Wiring the ET 200L IM-SC Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 3.8 Using the Supplementary Terminal for the TB 16SC/TB 16IM-SC . . . . . . . 3-22 3.9 Connecting Shielded Lines to the Shield Terminal of the Supplementary Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 3.10 Connecting the Smart Connect SC to the ET 200L-SC/TB 16IM-SC . . . . ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 3-24 vii Contents 4 5 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4.1 Configuration Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4.2 Commissioning the ET 200L and Smart Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 4.3 Replacing SC Electronic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 5.1 Diagnostics Using the LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 Slave Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 General Remarks on Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Structure of the Slave Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Structure of Station Statuses 1 to 3, Master Station Number and Manufacturer Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Structure of the Module Diagnosis for the ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Structure of the Station Diagnosis for the ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Structure of Slave Diagnosis for Default Start-Up of ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 6 7 General Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6.1 Standards and Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 6.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 6.3 Shipping and Storage Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 6.4 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 6.5 Details of Insulation Testing, Safety Class, and Degree of Protection . . . . 6-8 6.6 Rated Voltage of the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Terminal Blocks and Supplementary Terminals - Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7.1 Terminal Block TB 16L - 6ES7 193-1CH00-0XA0, 6ES7 193-1CH10-0XA0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Terminal Block TB 32L - 6ES7 193-1CL00-0XA0, 6ES7 193-1CL10-0XA0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 7.3 Terminal Block TB 16L AC 6ES7 193-1CH20-0XA0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 7.4 Terminal Block TB 16SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 7.5 Terminal Block TB 16IM-SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 7.6 Supplementary Terminals for the TB 16L and TB 32L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 7.7 Supplementary Terminals for the TB 16SC and TB 16IM-SC . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 8.1 Electronics Block L 16 DI DC 24 V - 6ES7 131-1BH00-0XB0 . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 8.2 Electronics Block L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A - 6ES7 132-1BH00-0XB0 . . . . 8-6 8.3 Electronics Block L 32 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BL00-0XB0 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 8.4 Electronics Block L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A -6ES7 132-1BL00-0XB0 . . . . . 8-12 7.2 8 viii ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Contents 9 10 11 8.5 Electronics Block L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A - 6ES7 133-1BL00-0XB0 8-15 8.6 Electronics Block L 16 DI AC 120 V - 6ES7 131-1EH00-0XB0 . . . . . . . . . 8-18 8.7 Electronics Block L 16 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A - 6ES7 132-1EH00-0XB0 . . . 8-21 8.8 Electronics Block L 16 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0 A - 6ES7 132-1JH00-0XB0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 8.9 Electronics Block L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A - 6ES7 133-1EH00-0XB0 8-28 8.10 Electronics Block L 8 DI AC 120 V/8 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0 A - 6ES7 133-1JH00-0XB0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks - Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 9.1 Interface Module IM-SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 9.2 Electronics Block L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V - 6ES7 131-1BH11-0XB0 . . . . . . . 9-4 9.3 Electronics Block L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A - 6ES7 132-1BH11-0XB0 . 9-7 9.4 Electronics Block L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V - 6ES7 131-1BL11-0XB0 . . . . . . . 9-10 9.5 Electronics Block L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A - 6ES7 133-1BL10-0XB0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 SC Digital Electronic Modules - Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 10.1 Digital Electronic Module 2DIDC24V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 10.2 Digital Electronic Module 2DODC24V0.5A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 10.3 Digital Electronic Module 2DODC24V2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 10.4 Digital Electronic Module 1DIAC120/230V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 10.5 Digital Electronic Module 1DOAC120/230V1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 10.6 Digital Electronic Module 1DORel.AC230V, DC 24 V to 120 V . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 11.1 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 11.2 Notes on the Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 11.3 Default Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 11.4 Behavior of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 11.5 Conversion and Cycle Times of the Analog Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 11.6 Connecting Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 11.7 Connecting Non-Isolated Voltage Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 11.8 Connecting Current Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15 11.9 Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17 11.10 Floating Measuring Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18 11.11 Wiring Unused Inputs of Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19 11.12 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20 11.13 Notes on the Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ix Contents 12 13 x 11.14 Default Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22 11.15 Behavior of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23 11.16 Conversion, Cycle, Settling and Response Times of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24 11.17 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26 11.18 Wiring Unused Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28 11.19 Analog Value Representation in S7 Number Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29 11.20 Analog Measurement Ranges for Input Channels in S7 Number Format . 11-30 11.21 Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Modules in S7 Number Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32 11.22 Analog Output Ranges for Output Channels in S7 Number Format . . . . . 11-37 11.23 Analog Value Representation for Output Modules in S7 Number Format . 11-39 11.24 Analog Value Representation in S5 Number Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-41 11.25 Analog Measurement Ranges for Input Channels in S5 Number Format . 11-43 11.26 Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Modules in S5 Number Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-45 11.27 Analog Output Ranges for Output Channels in S5 Number Format . . . . . 11-50 11.28 Analog Value Representation for Output Modules in S5 Number Format . 11-52 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 12.1 Analog Electronic Module 2 AI U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 12.2 High-Speed Analog Electronic Module 2 AI HS U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 12.3 Analog Electronic Module 2 AI I (...123-1GB00...) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 12.4 Analog Electronic Module 2 AI I (...123-1GB10-...) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20 12.5 High-Speed Analog Electronic Module 2 AI HS I (0/4-20 mA, 4-Wire Measuring Transducer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26 12.6 High-Speed Analog Electronic Module 2 AI HS I (4-20 mA, 2-Wire Measuring Transducer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32 12.7 Analog Electronic Module 2 AI TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-38 12.8 Analog Electronic Module 1 AI RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-44 12.9 Analog Electronic Module 1 AO U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-50 12.10 Analog Electronic Module 1 AO I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-54 The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 13.1 Front and Side Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 13.2 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 13.3 13.3.1 13.3.2 13.3.3 Functions of the Counter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24V Pulse Initiator With/Without Direction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gate Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 13-7 13-8 13-9 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Contents A 13.4 13.4.1 13.4.2 Wiring the Counter and Putting the Counter into Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Wiring the Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Putting the Counter into Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 13.5 Parameters of the Counter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 13.6 Subdivision of the Data Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 13.7 Application Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 13.8 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25 Order Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 A.1 Order Numbers for ET 200L Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 A.2 Order Numbers for Smart Connect SC Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6 A.3 Order Numbers for PROFIBUS Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9 B Type and Device Master Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 C Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L . . . . . . . . . . C-1 C.1 Identifiers for the ET 200L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2 C.2 Types of ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 C.3 C.3.1 C.3.2 C.3.3 Configuration Frame for the ET 200L-SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identifiers for the ET 200L-SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identifiers for the ET 200L-SC IM-SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Frame Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4 C-6 C-9 C-11 C.4 C.4.1 C.4.2 C.4.3 C.4.4 C.4.5 C.4.6 Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC . . . . Standard Section and Parameters for the Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters for the Smart Connect Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameterization Frame Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14 C-16 C-17 C-19 C-20 C-22 C-27 C.5 C.5.1 C.5.2 Default Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default Start-up with Digital Smart Connect Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default Start-Up with Analog Smart Connect Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-31 C-32 C-36 Guidelines for Handling Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . D-1 D.1 What is ESD? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2 D.2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 D.3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4 D Glossary Index ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c xi Contents Figures 1-1 1-2 1-3 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-9 2-10 2-11 2-12 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-9 xii A Typical PROFIBUS-DP Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 View of the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 ET 200L-SC IM-SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Installing the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Disassembling the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Installing the Electronics Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Snapping the Terminal Block onto the Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Sliding the Labeling Strip into the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Positioning the Coding Slide Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Using the Screwdriver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Designation Plate with Labeling Strips (Reduced in Size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Connecting the Electronic Modules to the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Installing the IM-SC Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Securing a Supplementary Terminal to the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Connecting a Shield Terminal to the Supplementary Terminal . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Operating the ET 200L from a Grounded Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Power Supply of the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 How the Spring Terminal Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Terminal Connections on Terminal Block TB 16L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Alternative Ways of Connecting the Voltage Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Front View of the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Connections of the TB 16IM-SC Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Connection Alternatives for the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Connections of the IM-SC Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Length of Insulation Stripped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Wiring the PROFIBUS-DP Screw-Type Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Connecting the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Functioning of the Bus Terminating Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Structure of the Slave Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Structure of the Module Diagnosis with the COM/S7 Configuration Software for the ET 200L-SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Structure of the Module Diagnosis with the COM/S7 Configuration Software for the ET 200L-SC IM-SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Structure of the Module Diagnosis with any Configuration Software for the ET 200L-SC, ET 200L-SC IM-SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Structure of Station Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Slave Diagnosis for Default Start-up of the ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 The TB 16L Terminal Block with the Electronics Block Clipped On, Dimension Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 The TB 32L Terminal Block with the Electronics Block Clipped On, Dimension Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 The TB 16L AC Terminal Block with the Electronics Block Mounted, Dimension Drawing (mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Front Elevation of the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Block Diagram of the TB16 SC Terminal Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 The TB 16IM-SC Terminal Block with the IM-SC Interface Module Mounted, Dimension Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 Block Diagram of the TB 16IM-SC Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 TB 16L/TB 32L Supplementary Terminals, Dimension Drawing . . . . . . . . . 7-19 TB 16SC/TB 16IM-SC Supplementary Terminals, Dimension Drawing . . 7-20 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Contents 8-1 8-2 8-3 8-4 8-5 8-6 8-7 8-8 8-9 8-10 8-11 8-12 8-13 8-14 8-15 8-16 8-17 8-18 8-19 8-20 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-8 9-9 9-10 10-1 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-5 10-6 10-7 10-8 10-9 10-10 10-11 10-12 11-1 11-2 View of the L 16 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Block Diagram of the L 16 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 View of the L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Block diagram of the L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block . . . . . . . . 8-7 View of the L 32 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Block diagram of the L 32 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 View of the L 32 DO Electronics Block DC 24 V/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Block Diagram of the L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block . . . . . . . . 8-13 View of the L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Block Diagram of the L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block . . . 8-16 View of the L 16 DI AC 120 V Electronics Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Block Diagram of the L 16 DI AC 120 V Electronic Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 View of the L 16 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A Electronics Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 Block Diagram of the L 16 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A Electronics Block . . . . . . . 8-22 View of the L 16 RO DC 24 V/AC 120V/2.0 A Electronics Block . . . . . . . . 8-24 Block Diagram of the L 16 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0 A Electronics Block 8-25 View of the L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A Electronics Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 Block Diagram of the L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A Electronics Block . . . . 8-29 View of the L 8DI AC 120 V/8 RO DC 24 V/AC 2.0A Electronics Block . . 8-31 Block Diagram of the L 8 DI AC 120 V/8 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0A Electronics Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 IM-SC Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Block Diagram of the IM-SC Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 View of the L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Block Diagram of the L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 View of the L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Block diagram of the L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block . . . . . 9-8 View of the L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Block diagram of the L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 View of the L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block . . . . . . . . 9-13 Block Diagram of the L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block 9-14 Front and Side Elevations of the 2DIDC24V Digital Electronic Module . . . 10-2 Block Diagram of the 2DIDC24V Digital Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Front and Side Elevations of the 2DODC24V0.5A Digital Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Block Diagram of the 2DODC24V0.5A Digital Electronic Module . . . . . . . 10-6 Front and Side Elevations of the 2DODC24V2A Digital Electronic Module 10-8 Block Diagram of the 2DODC24V2A Digital Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Front and Side Elevations of the 1DIAC120/230V Digital Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Block diagram of the 1DIAC120/230V Digital Electronic Module . . . . . . . . 10-12 Front and Side Elevations of the 1DOAC120/230V1A Digital Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Block Diagram of the 1DOAC120/230V1A Digital Electronic Module . . . . 10-15 Front and Side Elevations of the 1DORel.AC230V Digital Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Block Diagram of the 1DORel.AC230V Digital Electronic Module . . . . . . . 10-18 Structure of Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 Connecting Insulated Thermocouples Without Compensation, With Internal Compensation, or Use of the Reference Temperature (Example TB 16SC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c xiii Contents 11-3 11-4 11-5 11-6 11-7 11-8 11-9 11-10 12-1 12-2 12-3 12-4 12-5 12-6 12-7 12-8 12-9 12-10 12-11 12-12 12-13 12-14 12-15 12-16 12-17 12-18 12-19 12-20 12-21 12-22 12-23 12-24 12-25 12-26 12-27 12-28 13-1 13-2 13-3 13-4 13-5 13-6 13-7 xiv Connecting Insulated Thermocouples of the Same Type with External Compensation, via a Resistance Thermometer Connected to the Resistance Measurement Module, to Slot A of the Terminal Block (Example TB 16SC) . . 11-13 Connecting Voltage Sensors (Example TB 16SC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 Connecting 4-Wire Measuring Transducers (Example TB 16SC) . . . . . . . 11-15 Connecting 2-wire measuring transducers (Example TB 16SC) . . . . . . . . 11-16 4-Conductor Connection for Resistance Thermometers and Resistors (Example TB 16SC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17 Response Time of the Analog Output Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25 Connecting Loads/Actuators to a Current Output (Example TB 16SC) . . . 11-26 Connecting Loads/Actuators to a Voltage Output via a 4-Wire Circuit (Example TB 16SC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27 Front and Side Elevations of the 2 AI U Analog Electronic Module . . . . . . 12-2 Block Diagram of the 2 AI U Analog Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Jump response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 Front and Side Elevations of the 2 AI HS U High Speed Analog Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 Block Diagram of the 2 AI HS U High-Speed Analog Electronic Module . 12-9 Jump response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 Front and Side Elevations of the 2 AI I Analog Electronic Module . . . . . . . 12-14 Block Diagram of the 2 AI I Analog Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 Jump Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17 Front and Side Elevations of the 2 AI I Analog Electronic Module . . . . . . . 12-20 Block Diagram of the 2 AI I Analog Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21 Jump Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23 Front and Side Elevations of the 2 AI HS I High-Speed Analog Electronic Module (0/4-20mA, 4-Wire Measuring Transducer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26 Block Diagram of the 2 AI HS I High-Speed Analog Electronic Module (0/4-20mA, 4-Wire Measuring Transducer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27 Jump Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29 Front and Side Elevations of the 2 AI HS I High-Speed Analog Electronic Module (4-20mA, 2-Wire Measuring Transducer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32 Block Diagram of the 2 AI HS I High-Speed Analog Electronic Module (4-20mA, 2-Wire Measuring Transducer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33 Jump response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-35 Front and Side Elevations of the 2 AI TC Analog Electronic Module . . . . . 12-38 Block Diagram of the 2 AI TC Analog Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-39 Jump Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-41 Front and Side Elevations of the 1 AI RTD Analog Electronic Module . . . 12-44 Block Diagram of the 1 AI RTD Analog Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-45 Jump Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-47 Front and Side Elevations of the 1 AO U Analog Electronic Module . . . . . 12-50 Block Diagram of the 1 AO U Analog Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-51 Front and Side Elevations of the 1 AO I Analog Electronic Module . . . . . . 12-54 Block Diagram of the 1 AO I Analog Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-55 Front and Side Elevations of the 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module . . . . . . 13-2 Block Diagram of the 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Continuous Upward Counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Continuous Downward Counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Single-Pass Upward Counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Single-Pass Downward Counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Single-Pass Counting with Loaded Value and Gate Function . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Contents 13-8 13-9 13-10 13-11 13-12 13-13 13-14 13-15 13-16 13-17 13-18 13-19 13-20 13-21 A-1 A-2 A-3 C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 C-6 C-7 C-8 C-9 C-10 C-11 C-12 C-13 C-14 C-15 C-16 C-17 D-1 Periodic Upward Counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Periodic Downward Counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Signals of a 24V Pulse Initiator with Direction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Opening and Closing of a Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Example 1: The Output Is Set to Be Active from the Comparison Value to Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Example 2: The Output Is Set to Be Active from the Comparison Value to Underflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Example 3: The Output Is Set to Be Active for the "Pulse Duration on Reaching the Comparison Value Counting Upward" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Example 4: The Output Is Set to Be Active for the "Pulse Duration on Reaching the Comparison Value Counting Downward" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Example 5: The Output Is Set to Be Active for the "Pulse Duration on Reaching the Comparison Value Counting Upward/Downward" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Connecting a Pulse Initiator with a Direction Signal (Example TB 16SC) . 13-15 Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 Example 1, Continued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23 Example 2, Continued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24 Labeling Strips 6ES7 193-1BH00-0XA0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4 Labeling Strips 6ES7 193-1BL00-0XA0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5 Labeling Strips for Smart Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8 Structure of the Parameterization Frame of the ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14 Standard Section of the Parameterization Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16 Parameters for the Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16 Structure of Data Record 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19 Structure of the Header of Data Record 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20 Structure of Data Record 128, Bytes 7 to 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21 Structure of the Header of Data Record 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-22 Structure of Data Record 130 for Single-Channel Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . C-23 Structure of Data Record 130 for Two-Channel Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-23 Structure of Data Record 130 for the 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module . . C-24 AI Parameters in Byte 12 or 17 of DS130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-25 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module - Purpose of Bytes 11 to 17 of Data Record 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-26 Structure of the Parameterization Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34 Default Setting for Digital SC Modules with the ET 200L-SC . . . . . . . . . . . C-34 Default Setting for Digital SC Modules with the ET 200L-SC IM-SC . . . . . C-35 Structure of the Parameterization Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-37 Default Setting for Analog Smart Connect Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-38 Electrostatic Voltages which can Build up on a Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c xv Contents Tables 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 6-1 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 8-1 8-2 8-3 9-1 10-1 11-1 11-2 11-3 11-4 11-5 11-6 11-7 11-8 11-9 11-10 11-11 11-12 11-13 11-14 11-15 11-16 11-17 11-18 11-19 11-20 xvi General Components for the ET 200L, ET 200L-SC, ET 200L-SC IM-SC 1-6 Components of the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Components of a ET 200L-SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Components of an ET 200L-SC IM-SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 DIN VDE Regulations for Installation of a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Pinout of the PROFIBUS-DP Terminal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Pinout of the PROFIBUS-DP Terminal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Assignment of the PROFIBUS-DP Connection at the IM-SC Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Assignment of the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Diagnostics Using the LED Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Diagnostics Using the LEDs of the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC . . 5-3 Function Blocks for Slave Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Structure of Station Status 1 (Byte 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Structure of Station Status 2 (Byte 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Bytes 13 to 16 for the Diagnostic Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Rated Voltage of the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Pinout of the TB 16L Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Pinout of the TB 32L Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Pinout of the TB 16L AC Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Supplied Versions of the Supplementary Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Supplied Versions of the Supplementary Terminals TB16SC/ TB 16IM-SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Assignment of the ET 200L Electronic Blocks to the Terminal Blocks . . . 8-1 Service Life of the Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27 Service Life of the Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 Assignment of the Interface Module/ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks to the Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Default Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 Effect of the Operating Mode of the CPU and the Supply Voltage L+ on the Analog Input Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20 Output Types/Output Ranges of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21 Default Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22 Effect of the Operating Mode of the CPU and the Supply Voltage L+ on the Analog Output Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23 Bipolar Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30 Unipolar Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30 Life-Zero Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31 Bipolar Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-37 Unipolar Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-37 Life-Zero Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38 Representation of the Measurement Ranges for Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . 11-41 Representation of the Measurement Rangesfor Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . 11-42 Bipolar Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43 Unipolar Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43 Life-Zero Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-44 Bipolar Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-50 Unipolar Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-50 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Contents 11-21 12-1 12-2 12-3 12-4 12-5 12-6 12-7 12-8 12-9 12-10 12-11 13-1 13-2 A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5 A-6 A-7 A-8 A-9 A-10 B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 C-6 C-7 C-8 C-9 C-10 C-11 C-12 C-13 C-14 C-15 C-16 Life-Zero Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-51 Static Parameters of the 2 AI U Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 Static Parameters of the 2 AI HS U HighSpeed Electronic Module . . . . . . 12-10 Static Parameters of the 2 AI I Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 Static Parameters of the 2 AI I Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22 Static Parameters of the 2 AI HS I Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28 Static Parameters of the 2 AI HS I Electronic Module (4-20mA, 2-Wire Measuring Transducer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34 Static Parameters of the 2 AI TC Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40 Dynamic Parameters of the 2 AI TC Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40 Static Parameters of the 2 AI RTD Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-46 Static Parameters of the 1 AO U Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52 Static Parameters of the 1 AO I Electronic Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-56 Displays, Colour and Functions of the LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 Terminal Block Order Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 Electronics Block Order Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 Supplementary Terminal Order Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3 Terminal Block and Terminal Order Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6 Digital SC Electronic Module Order Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6 Analog SC Electronic Module Order Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7 Function Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7 Accessories for the ET 200 Distributed I/O Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9 Manuals for STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10 Manuals for ET 200 on SIMATIC S5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10 Version der Projektier-Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 Data for PROFIBUS-DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 Maximum Number of Inputs and Outputs with the ET 200L . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 Maximum Number of Inputs and Outputs with the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 DP Identifiers for the ET 200L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2 Types of ET 200L-SC of ET 200L-SC IM-SC Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 Structure of the Configuration Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4 Identifiers for the ET 200L-SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6 Identifiers for the Smart Connect with Digital ET 200L-SC Modules . . . . C-7 Identifiers for the Smart Connect with Analog ET 200L-SC Modules . . . C-7 Identifiers for the Smart Connect with Digital ET 200L-SC IM-SC Modules C-9 Identifiers for the Smart Connect with ET 200L-SC IM-SC Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9 Data Records for the ET 200L-SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17 Data Records for the ET 200L-SC IM-SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18 AI Parameters in Byte 11 and 16 of DS130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24 AO Parameters in Byte 11 or 16 of DS130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-25 ET 200L-SC IM-SC Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-27 Type Files for the ET 200L-SC Default Start-up with Digital SC Modules . C-32 ET 200L-SC: Configuration Frame Extension for Analog Smart Connect Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-36 ET 200L-SC IM-SC: Configuration Frame Extension for Analog Smart Connect Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-36 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c xvii Contents xviii ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 1 Product Overview In This Chapter The product overview provides information about The role of the ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect within the ET 200 distributed I/O system. The components which make up the ET 200L distributed I/O device. The components which make up the Smart Connect SC. How the components of the ET 200L and Smart Connect SC can be used together. Contents of the Chapter Section Subject Page 1.1 What Is the ET 200 Distributed I/O System? 1-2 1.2 What Is the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device? 1-3 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 1-1 Product Overview 1.1 What Is the ET 200 Distributed I/O System? What Is the ET 200? When a system is installed, the input/output modules are normally installed centrally in the programmable logic controller. If inputs and outputs are made at long distances from the programmable logic controller, there may be long runs of cabling which are not immediately comprehensible, and electromagnetic interference may impair reliability. In such systems, we recommend you to use the ET 200 distributed I/O system: The controller CPU is located centrally. The I/O (input/output) system operates locally in a distributed fashion. The ET 200 high-performance bus system ensures that the CPU and I/O system communicate with each other without problems owing to its high data transfer rates. What Does the ET 200 Consist Of? S7-300M7-300 The ET 200 distributed I/O system consists of active (master) and passive (slave) nodes that are interconnected via the PROFIBUS-DP. S7-400M7-400 S5-95U S5-115U to 155 U with IM 308-C PU or PC DP master PROFIBUS-DP DP slaves ET 200L Figure 1-1 ET 200M ET 200B S5-95U Other field devices A Typical PROFIBUS-DP Installation PROFIBUS-DP PROFIBUS-DP (DP means distributed I/O) is an open bus system conforming with EN 50170 Volume 2, PROFIBUS. The PROFIBUS-DP consists of a DP master and DP slaves. DP master: The link between the controller and the distributed I/O system is the DP master. The DP master exchanges data with the distributed I/O system over the PROFIBUS-DP and monitors the field bus. DP slave: The I/O devices are connected as DP slaves. DP slaves process data locally from the sensors and signal control elements in such a manner that they can be transferred over the PROFIBUS-DP field bus. 1-2 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Product Overview 1.2 What Is the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device and Smart Connect? Definition The ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect is a DP slave within the ET 200 distributed I/O system, its degree of protection being IP 20. Applications Owing to its compact and flat design, the ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect is particularly suitable for applications in which space is at a premium. The ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect has been designed for the low-end to medium performance ranges. The ET 200L and Smart Connect is available in three versions: The ET 200L block I/O device The ET 200L-SC modular I/O device The ET 200L-SC IM-SC fine-step modular I/O device ET 200L Block I/O Device The ET 200L block I/O device is not expandable. The ET 200L consists of a terminal block for the wiring, to which an electronics block is connected. The electronics block determines the number of input/output channels. The ET 200L block I/O device is available with 16 or 32 channels. ET 200L Electronics block ET 200L Terminal block TB 16L, TB 16L AC 16 channels Terminal block TB 32L 32 channels ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 1-3 Product Overview ET 200L-SC Modular I/O Device The ET 200L-SC modular I/O device can be upgraded with the SIMATIC Smart Connect. The ET 200L-SC also consists of a terminal block to which an electronics block is connected. The electronics block has an interface for connecting the SIMATIC Smart Connect. The Smart Connect (SC) consists of a TB 16SC terminal block and up to 8 SC electronic modules. There are one- and two-channel SC electronic modules for digital and analog inputs/outputs or for count functions. ET 200L-SC Electronics block ET 200L-SC Terminal block TB 16L SC electronic modules Terminal block TB 16SC 16 channels 32 1-4 16 channels 16 channels Terminal block TB 32L Terminal block TB 16SC 32 channels 16 channels ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Product Overview ET 200L-SC IM-SC Fine-Step Modular I/O Device The ET 200L-SC IM-SC fine-step modular I/O device can be upgraded with the SIMATIC Smart Connect. The ET 200L-SC IM-SC consists of a TB 16IM-SC terminal block to which you can connect the IM-SC interface module and up to 8 Smart Connect electronic modules. The IM-SC interface module connects the ET 200L-SC IM-SC to the PROFIBUS-DP. You can add the TB 16SC to the ET 200L-SC IM-SC, thus allowing you to run an additional 8 SC electronic modules. ET 200L-SC IM-SC IM-SC interface module for PROFIBUS SC electronic modules Terminal block TB 16 IM-SC SC electronic modules 16 channels Terminal block TB 16 IM-SC 16 channels ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Terminal block TB 16SC 16 channels 1-5 Product Overview General Components for the ET 200L, ET 200L-SC, ET 200L-SC IM-SC Table 1-1 A range of components are available for setting up the ET 200L, ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC. You will find the components that you require for all versions of the ET 200L in Table 1-1. You will find other components in Sections 1.2.1 to 1.2.3. General Components for the ET 200L, ET 200L-SC, ET 200L-SC IM-SC Component Function Rail (EN 50022, 3515 or 357.5) ... is the mounting rack for the ET 200L. Power supply (PS) ... converts the mains voltage (120/230 VAC) into a 24 V DC operating voltage for supplying the ET 200L. Illustration ... is the load current power supply for the 24 V DC load circuits. PROFIBUS cables with bus connector 1-6 ... interconnect the nodes of a PROFIBUS-DP installation. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Product Overview Terminal Block The terminal block (TB) is used for mounting the electronics block (EB). It contains the wiring so that if the electronics block is replaced, leads do not have to be loosened. The terminal block is characterized by the following: It can be pre-wired before the electronics block is mounted. Depending on the design, wiring can be connected by means of screwtype or spring terminals. It has a two-wire termination and can be upgraded to a three- or four-wire termination by using supplementary terminals. It does not contain any active electronic components. The terminal block cannot therefore be destroyed electrically. You can insert different electronics blocks. There are 16-channel (TB 16L) and 32-channel (TB 32L) terminal blocks. The TB 16IM-SC terminal block is used in conjunction with the IM-SC interface module, offers pre-wiring and can be expanded directly by means of a TB 16SC terminal block of the Smart Connect. Electronics Block The electronics block contains the logic circuitry and is inserted into the terminal block and screwed. It is characterized by the following: It defines the number of input/output channels. You do not have to loosen the terminal lead to replace the electronics block; you merely have to remove the bus connector. The PROFIBUS-DP is connected via a bus connector to the electronics block. You can set PROFIBUS addresses 1 to 99. There is galvanic isolation between the PROFIBUS-DP and the internal electronics. LEDs are used to display: The voltage supply of the electronics block (ON), bus faults (BF), group errors (SF; not for ET 200L), the status of inputs and outputs There is a labeling strip in the electronics block for clear identification of inputs and outputs. You can order the labeling strip separately (refer to Appendix A.1). A circuit diagram is displayed on the electronics block. The circuit diagram is located beneath the labeling strip. The electronics blocks of the ET 200L-SC can each be be upgraded with a TB 16SC terminal block of the SIMATIC Smart Connect. Processing Time The internal processing time is < 1ms. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 1-7 Product Overview 1.2.1 What Is the ET 200L Block I/O Device? Features of the ET 200L Figure 1-2 shows you a view of the ET 200L distributed I/O device. It consists of a terminal block and an electronics block. Electronics block Terminal block Figure 1-2 View of the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device ET 200L Modules The modules incorporated in the ET 200L include: 24 V DC digital input and/or output modules AC digital input and/or output modules 1-8 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Product Overview ET 200L Components Table 1-2 A whole range of components is available for installing and commissioning the ET 200L. The most important components and their functions are listed in Table 1-2: Components of the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device Function Component TB 16L, TB 32L, TB 16L AC terminal block ... carries the wiring and accepts the electronics block. Electronics block ... is mounted on the terminal block. It defines the function (input or output). Supplementary terminals - 1-row - 2-row ... are an extension for actuators and sensors with a 3- or 4-wire termination. Illustration PEPEPEPEPEPEPEPEPEPEPEPEPEPEPEPEPE M MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM PEPEPEPEPEPEPEPEPEPEPEPEPEPEPEPEPE Labeling sheet Technical Data ... allows the labeling strips to be labeled automatically or printed using a laser printer. You will find the technical data for the terminal blocks in Sections 7.1 to 7.3 and the technical data for the electronics blocks in Chapter 8. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 1-9 Product Overview 1.2.2 What Is the ET 200L-SC Modular I/O Device? ET 200L-SC Modules The modules of the ET 200L-SC can be upgraded with a Smart Connect. The modules of the ET 200L-SC include: 24 V DC digital input modules 24 V DC digital output modules 24 V DC digital input and output modules Smart Connect SC The digital and analog electronic modules of the Smart Connect SC add to the digital inputs and outputs of the ET 200L-SC. Modules of the Smart Connect SC The Smart Connect SC has the following modules: 24 V 0.5A/2A DC digital input/output modules 120/230 V AC digital input/output modules 230 V AC relay module Analog input modules (U, I, TC, RTD) Analog output modules (U, I) Features of the Smart Connect SC The Smart Connect SC consists of a terminal block and various electronic modules that you can connect to it. The Smart Connect SC allows you to fine tune the inputs and outputs to your process. You can connect both analog and digital electronic modules to the terminal block at the same time. Smart Connect Connecting Cable You connect the ET 200L to the Smart Connect SC by means of the prefabricated connecting cable. Chapter 3.10 describes how to do this. Components of the Smart Connect SC A number of components are available to you for installing and commissioning a Smart Connect. Table 1-3 lists these components and their functions: 1-10 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Product Overview Table 1-3 Components of a ET 200L-SC Component TB 16L, TB32L terminal block - With spring terminal - With screw-type terminal Function Illustration ...carries the wiring and accepts the electronics block. Electronics block for the SC ...is mounted on the terminal block. It defines the function and has an interface for connecting the Smart Connect. TB16 SC terminal block - With spring terminal - With screw-type terminal ...carries the wiring and the SC electronic modules. Digital/analog electronic modules ...are connected to the TB 16SC terminal block. Electronic modules define the functions (input/ output...). Smart Connect connecting cable (comes with the TB 16SC terminal block) ... connects the TB 16SC to the SC electronic modules. Supplementary terminal, singlerow - Spring terminal - Screw-type terminal ...is an add-on module for actuators and sensors with 3-conductor connections. Supplementary terminal, 2-row - Spring terminal - Screw-type terminal ...is an add-on module for actuators and sensors with 4-conductor connections. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 1-11 Product Overview Table 1-3 Components of a ET 200L-SC, continued Component Function Shield terminal ...connects the shielding of analog signal lines with the supplementary terminal. Labeling sheet ...allows the labeling strips to be labeled automatically or printed using a laser printer. Technical Data Illustration You will find the technical data in the following chapters and sections: TB 16L and TB 32L terminal blocks: Sections 7.1 and 7.2 Electronics blocks for the Smart Connect: Chapter 9 TB 16SC terminal block: Section 7.4 SC electronic modules: Chapters 10 and 12 1-12 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Product Overview 1.2.3 What Is the ET 200L-SC IM-SC Fine-Step Modular I/O Device? Features of the ET 200L-SC IM-SC The ET 200L-SC IM-SC consists of the TB 16IM-SC terminal block, to which the IM-SC interface module and up to 8 Smart Connect electronic modules are connected. IM-SC interface module SC electronic modules SC add-on TB 16IM-SC terminal block Supplementary terminal Figure 1-3 ET 200L-SC IM-SC IM-SC Interface Module The IM-SC interface module connects the ET 200L-SC IM-SC to the PROFIBUS-DP. It is tilted onto the TB 16IM-SC terminal block. It has a connector for the PROFIBUS-DP. The PROFIBUS addresses 1 to 99 can be set. Modules of the SC Electronic Modules You can connect up to 8 SC electronic modules to the TB 16IM-SC terminal block directly. The Smart Connect SC modules include: 24 V 0.5A/2A DC digital input/output modules 120/230 V AC digital input/output modules 230 V AC relay module High-speed analog input modules (U, I) Analog input modules (U, I, TC, RTD) Analog output modules (U, I) 40 kHz counter module ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 1-13 Product Overview Expanding the ET 200L-SC IM-SC The ET 200L-SC IM-SC can be expanded by means of a TB 16SC terminal block to connect 8 additional SC electronic modules. High-Speed Analog Input Modules These modules offer high-speed measured-value acquisition and data transfer. They are particularly well suited to rapid data acquisition for pressure and flow measurements. The high-speed analog input modules can only be used in the TB 16IM-SC terminal block or in the expanded TB 16SC terminal block. Components for the ET 200L-SC IM-SC Table 1-4 There are a range of components available for installing and commissioning a Smart Connect. Table 1-4 lists the components and specifies their functions: Components of an ET 200L-SC IM-SC Component Function IM-SC interface module ... connects the TB 16IM-SC terminal block to the PROFIBUS-DP. TB 16IM-SC terminal block - With spring terminal - With screw-type terminal ...carries the wiring, the IM-SC interface module and the SC electronic modules. TB 16SC terminal block (with SC connection cable) - With spring terminal - With screw-type terminal ... is added to the TB 16IM-SC and carries the wiring and 8 additional SC electronic modules. Digital/analog electronic modules/counter module ...are connected to the TB 16IM-SC and TB 16SC terminal blocks. Electronic modules determine the functions (input/output...). Smart Connect connecting cable (comes with the TB 16IM-SC terminal block) ... connects the ET 200L-SC IM-SC to the TB 16SC for connecting 8 additional SC electronic modules. 1-14 Illustration IM-SC ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Product Overview Table 1-4 Components of an ET 200L-SC IM-SC Component Function Supplementary terminal, singletier - Spring terminal - Screw-type terminal ...is an extension for actuators and sensors with a 3-wire connection. Supplementary terminal, twotier - Spring terminal - Screw-type terminal ...is an extension for actuators and sensors with a 4-wire connection. Shield terminal ...connects the shielding of analog signal lines with the supplementary terminal. Labeling sheet ...enables automatic labeling or printing by laser printer. Technical Data Illustration You will find the technical data for the ET 200L-SC IM-SC in the following sections and chapters: IM-SC interface module: Section 9.1 TB 16IM-SC terminal block: Section 7.5 TB 16SC terminal block: Section 7.4 SC electronic modules: Chapters 10 and 12 Counter module: Chapter 13 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 1-15 Product Overview 1-16 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 2 Installation Introduction The ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect has been designed for simple installation and wiring. To this end, the label of the ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect has been made self-explanatory. In this chapter, you will find additional information on installing and wiring the ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect. Procedure A number of steps are involved in the installation of the ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect. We suggest you adhere to the following sequence: Procedure Installing the ET 200L Installing the ET 200L-SC and S tC Smart Connectt Installingg the ET 200L-SC 200L SC IM-SC and Smart Connect Section 1. Install the ET 200L TB 16L/TB 32L terminal block and supplementary terminal 2.1 2. Install and disassemble the ET 200L electronics block 2.2 3. Set the ET 200L PROFIBUS address 2.6 1. Install the ET 200L TB 16L/TB 32L terminal block and supplementary terminal 2.1 2. Install and disassemble the ET 200L electronics block 2.2 3. Install the SC TB 16SC terminal block 2.3 4. Connect the Smart Connect electronic modules to the TB 16SC terminal block 2.4 5. Set the ET 200L PROFIBUS address 2.6 6. Install a supplementary terminal and shield terminal on the TB 16SC terminal block 2.7 1. Install the ET 200L TB 16IM-SC terminal block 2.3 2. Connect Smart Connect electronic modules to the TB 16IM-SC terminal block 2.4 3. Install the SC TB 16SC terminal block 2.3 4. Connect Smart Connect electronic modules to the TB 16SC terminal block 2.4 5. Set the ET 200L PROFIBUS address on the IM-SC 2.6 6. Install a supplementary terminal and shield terminal on the TB 16IM-SC/ TB 16SC terminal block 2.7 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 2-1 Installation Contents of the Chapter 2-2 Section Topic Page 2.1 Installing the ET 200L TB 16L/TB 32L Terminal Block and Supplementary Terminal 2-3 2.2 Installing and Disassembling the ET 200L Electronics Block 2-6 2.3 Installing the TB 16IM-SC/TB 16SC Terminal Block 2-7 2.4 Connecting the Smart Connect Electronic Modules to the TB 16IM-SC/TB 16SC Terminal Block 2-13 2.5 Installing the ET 200L IM-SC Interface Module on the TB 16IM-SC Terminal Block 2-17 2.6 Setting the ET 200L PROFIBUS Address 2-18 2.7 Installing a Supplementary Terminal and Shield Terminal on the TB 16IM-SC/TB 16SC Terminal Block 2-19 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Installation 2.1 Installing the ET 200L TB 16L/TB 32L Terminal Block and Supplementary Terminal Introduction In this section, we describe how you install the terminal block and the supplementary terminal. Requirements Install the terminal block on a rail. You install the ET 200L distributed I/O device on a rail conforming with EN 50022 (357.5 or 3515). The preferred mounting position is horizontal installation on a vertical wall. All other mounting positions are conceivable. You require a free space on a rail of 145 mm (16 channels) or 191 mm (32 channels). The minimum installation depth is 82 mm (with an electronics block installed and an MLFB 6ES7 972-0CA30 0XA0 bus connector connected) when using a 357,5 mm rail. You require a free space of 35 mm above the terminal block. You require a free space of 20 mm below the terminal block(when using the 42 mm single-tier supplementary terminal or the 57 mm two-tier supplementary terminal). If you add a TB 16SC to the ET 200L, you need a free space of 40 mm instead of 35 mm above the terminal block. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 2-3 Installation Installing the Terminal Block Install the terminal block in the following order: 1. Mount the terminal block on the rail. 2. Tilt the terminal block backwards until you hear both the safety bolts engage. You can now wire the terminal block (refer to Chapter 3) before you install the electronics block. If you are using supplementary terminals, you must install them before you commence wiring. 1 2 Figure 2-1 Installing and Disassembling Supplementary Terminals Installing the Terminal Block Push the supplementary terminals into the existing guideways on the lower side of the terminal block until you hear the safety bolt engage. To disassemble supplementary terminals, proceed as follows: 1. Pull the safety bolt downwards as far as the stop. 2. Pull out the supplementary terminals forwards from the guideways. 2-4 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Installation Disassembling the Terminal Block Remove the terminal block in the following order (refer also to Figure 2-2): 1. Turn off the power supply. 2. Remove the electronics block. - Remove the bus connector. - Loosen the fixing screw. - Tilt the electronics block forwards. 3. Loosen the wiring. 4. If you are using supplementary terminals, you must remove them before disassembling the terminal block (see above). 5. Press the two safety bolts downwards in succession with a screwdriver. 6. Tilt and remove the terminal block from the rail. 2 5 6 5 5 Figure 2-2 Disassembling the Terminal Block ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 2-5 Installation 2.2 Installing and Disassembling the ET 200L Electronics Block Installing the Electronics Block Attach the electronics block to the terminal block in the following order: 1. Insert the electronics block from above into the guideways on the terminal block. 2. Tilt the electronics block backwards as far as the stop. 3. Secure the electronics block on the terminal block by tightening the screw: 1 1 2 3 Figure 2-3 Disassembling the Electronics Block Installing the Electronics Block To disassemble the electronics block, proceed in the reverse order. 1. Turn off the power supply. 2. Remove the bus connector. 3. Loosen the fixing screw. 4. Tilt the electronics block forwards. 2-6 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Installation 2.3 Installing the TB 16IM-SC/TB 16SC Terminal Block Installation The terminal blocks are intended for installation in a cabinet or in an enclosed casing or operating room. The TB 16SC and TB 16IM-SC terminal blocks can be installed horizontally. Provided temperatures do not exceed 40 _C, other installation locations are also possible. Installation Dimensions and Clearances When working out the space requirements of a terminal block, you must maintain adequate clearances to other components. These minimum clearances are necessary at installation and during operation for the following reasons: S For installing and removing the terminal block and the electronic modules S To guarantee the air flow required for cooling during operation S TB 16IM-SC terminal block: You require a free space of 40 mm above the terminal block and 50 mm under the terminal block (when using the 50 mm single-tier supplementary terminal or the 57 mm two-tier supplementary terminal). S TB 16SC terminal block: You require a free space of 40 mm above the terminal block and 20 mm under the terminal block (when using the 42 mm single-tier supplementary terminal or the 57 mm two tier supplementary terminal). Installation Work If you carry out installation work with AC modules with a 230 V load supply that involves disconnecting the protective conductor from the TB 16SC or TB16 IM-SC, you must first switch off the 230 V load supply. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 2-7 Installation Installing the Terminal Block Proceed as follows: 1. Mount the terminal block in such a way that sufficient clearance remains for ventilating the terminal block and installing and ventilating the electronic modules. 2. Screw the rail (35 mm wide) to the cabinet frame or the mounting block (screw size: M5). 3. Position the terminal block on the 35 mm rail from above, and swing it down. The terminal block snaps onto the rail (see Figure 2-4). Figure 2-4 2-8 Snapping the Terminal Block onto the Rail ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Installation Sliding the Labeling Strips into the Terminal Block Proceed as follows: 1. Note the assignment between the slot and the module on the labeling strip. 2. Slide the labeling strip from the side into the terminal block guide. Figure 2-5 Sliding the Labeling Strip into the Terminal Block ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 2-9 Installation Positioning the Coding Slide Switches You must now position the coding slide switches correctly in accordance with the configuration of your system so that you can install the electronic modules. Each slot has a coding slide switch. The terminal blocks are supplied with coding slide switches at position 0. Electronic Module Position of the 1st Coding Slide Switch DC Modules Digital electronic module 2DIDC24V (single width) DC position (up) Digital electronic module 2DODC24V0.5A (single width) DC position (up) Digital electronic module DODC24V2A (single width) DC position (up) Counter module 1COUNT40kHz (single width) DC position (up) AC Modules Digital electronic module 1DIAC120/230V (single width) AC position (down) Digital electronic module 1DOAC120/230V1A (single width) AC position (down) Digital electronic module 1DORel.AC230V (single width) AC position (down) Analog Electronic Modules ! Analog electronic module 2 AI U, 2 AI HS U (single width) DC position (up) Analog electronic module 2 AI I, 2 AI HS I (single width) DC position (up) Analog electronic module 2 AI TC (single width) DC position (up) Analog electronic module 1 AI RTD (single width) DC position (up) Analog electronic module 1 AO U (double width) DC position (up) Analog electronic module 1 AO I (double width) DC position (up) Warning There is a risk of injury and damage to property. Do not attempt to force the coding slide switch. Forcing the coding slide switch is dangerous and can destroy electronic modules. 2-10 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Installation Coding slide switches Figure 2-6 Positioning the Coding Slide Switches 1. Select a screwdriver with a blade width of 3.5 mm. 2. Insert the screwdriver into the slot on the coding slide switch (see Figure 2-7). 3. Apply slight pressure to push the coding slide switch into the required position. Figure 2-7 Using the Screwdriver ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 2-11 Installation Noting the System Designation Note your system designations on the enclosed labeling strip for the electronic module. Separating edges Labeling strips for electronic modules Labeling strips for terminal block and supplementary terminal can be truncated here Figure 2-8 2-12 Designation Plate with Labeling Strips (Reduced in Size) ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Installation 2.4 Connecting Smart Connect Electronic Modules to the TB 16IM-SC/TB 16SC Terminal Block Connection Rules for the Electronic Modules The following connection rules apply to the SC electronic modules: You can connect up to 10 counter modules in an ET 200L-SC IM-SC (with TB 16SC). The slot immediately to the right of an AC module/relay module must either have an AC module/relay module or be free (see the following example). Under certain circumstances the number of plug-in SC electronic modules is limited (see the next page). Note If you use the TB 16IM-SC and TB 16SC together, you have a maximum of 16 slots available. This gives you up to 32 digital/analog channels, which can include a maximum of 12 analog channels. Examples 8 slots (A...H) are available to you on each terminal block. You Want to Connect the Following Electronic Modules to a Terminal Block A B C D E F G H Only DC modules DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC Only analog electronic modules Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Only AC modules AC AC AC AC AC Relay DC modules and AC modules AC DC DC AC AC Relay Analog AC AC AC AC AC Analog electronic modules and AC modules Analog AC Analog Analog electronic modules, DC modules and AC modules Analog Analog Analog DC DC Analog AC AC Analog electronic modules and DC modules Analog DC Analog DC DC Analog DC Analog Circuit Schematic The circuit schematic is shown on the front of every electronic module. Up to two LEDs are located below the circuit schematic. In the operating mode, the circuit schematic is covered by the labeling strip. The LEDs are visible through the transparent part of the labeling strip. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 2-13 Installation Number of Plug-in Analog SC Electronic Modules The number of plug-in analog SC electronic modules is limited in the following cases: - When there is no S7 DP master - When they are used in an ET 200L-SC IM-SC with a TB 16SC connected The PROFIBUS-DP standard EN 50 170, Volume 2, restricts the length of the parameterization data to a maximum of 244 bytes. This means that when analog SC electronic modules are used, the number of plug-in SC electronic modules may be limited. You will find a formula below for calculating the maximum number of SC electronic modules permitted in an ET 200L-SC IM-SC: 244 x 10 + [(14 + D 7)]1 + [(21 + A 9 + K 5 + C 18)]2 Key: D = total number of digital SC electronic modules plugged in A = total number of analog SC electronic modules plugged in K = total number of analog channels plugged in C = total number of SC counter modules plugged in [...]1 only necessary if digital SC electronic modules are plugged in [...]2 only necessary if analog SC electronic modules are plugged in Example 1 ET 200L-SC IM-SC: 15 2AE; 1 2DE: --> D = 1; A = 15; K = 30 10 + (14 + 1 7) + (21 + 15 9 + 30 5) = 10 + 21 + 306 = 337 The result is greater than 244 so this configuration is not possible. Example 2 ET 200L-SC IM-SC: 8 2AE; 4 2DE: --> D = 4; A = 8; K = 16 10 + (14 + 4 7) + (21 + 8 9 + 16 5) = 10 + 42 + 173 = 225 The result is less than 244 so this configuration is not possible. Example 3 ET 200L-SC IM-SC: 6 2AE; 3 1COUNT40kHz; 4 2DE: --> D = 4; A = 6; K = 12; C = 3 10 + (14 + 4 7) + (21 + 6 9 + 12 5 + 3 18) = 10 + 42 + 189 = 241 The result is less than 244 so this configuration is not possible. 2-14 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Installation Labeling Strips of the Electronic Modules Slide the labeling strip down from the top into the electronic module to be plugged in. Note You will only achieve full operating safety of the electronic modules if you have inserted the labeling strips on the front of the electronic modules (electrostatic discharge on the front of the module, covering the LEDs). Figure 2-9 Connecting the Electronic Modules to the Terminal Block ! Warning There is a risk of injury and damage to property. If you install a combination of AC and DC modules on a terminal block, you must comply with the rules for doing this. If you do not, injury and damage can be caused. Always position the electronic modules in accordance with the connection rules. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 2-15 Installation ! Warning There is a risk of injury and damage to property. When using AC modules, you must use a supplementary terminal (screwtype terminal), to which you must connect the protective conductor. When using AC modules, you must use screw-type supplementary terminals. 2-16 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Installation 2.5 Installing the ET 200L IM-SC Interface Module on the TB 16IM-SC Terminal Block Requirements Before you install the IM-SC interface module on the TB 16IM-SC terminal block, note the following: The screw for fixing the IM-SC interface module is shipped screwed into the terminal block. Use a screwdriver to remove the screw. When the IM-SC interface module is installed, a cable lug providing a connection to chassis ground is fixed at the same time. Secure the ground cable in the cable lug, and establish a connection to chassis ground. See Section 3.7. Installing the IM-SC Interface Module Secure the IM-SC interface module by proceeding in the following sequence: 1. Hook the interface module from above into the guides on the terminal block. 2. Tilt the interface backward until the stop. 3. Put the cable lug for chassis ground (with the ground cable) on the screw, and secure the IM-SC interface module on the TB 16IM-SC terminal block by tightening the screw. IM-SC interface module Cable lug TB 16IM-SC terminal block Figure 2-10 Installing the IM-SC Interface Module ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 2-17 Installation 2.6 Setting the ET 200L PROFIBUS Address Introduction The PROFIBUS address defines the address of the ET 200L distributed I/O device on the PROFIBUS-DP. Location of Rotary Switches The two rotary switches for the PROFIBUS address are located on the electronics block beneath the bus connector. Tip: You must set the PROFIBUS address before clipping on the bus connector. When clipped on, the bus connector conceals the two rotary switches. Example PROFIBUS address 63: x10 Position 6 Rotary switches for the PROFIBUS address Rotary Switches of the ET 200L-SC IM-SC x1 The two rotary switches are on the right-hand side of the IM-SC interface module. Tip: Set the PROFIBUS address before you wire the TB 16IM-SC terminal block or before you mount the IM-SC interface module. The rotary switches are more accessible then. Rotary switches for the PROFIBUS address Example x1 Position 3 Modifying the PROFIBUS Address Position 3 PROFIBUS address 63: x10 Position 6 You modify the PROFIBUS address at the two rotary switches by using a small screwdriver. PROFIBUS addresses 1 to 99 are authorized for the ET 200L distributed I/O device. PROFIBUS address 0, which is set when the ET 200 distributed I/O system leaves the works, is reserved for a PU or PC. Any change made to the PROFIBUS address takes effect when the supply voltage is turned on. 2-18 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Installation 2.7 Installing a supplementary terminal and shield terminal on the TB 16IM-SC/TB 16SC terminal block Securing the Supplementary Terminal to the Terminal Block If you want to connect a single-tier or two-tier supplementary terminal, proceed as follows: 1. Hold the supplementary terminal parallel to the terminal block. Use the right edge as a guide. 2. Insert the mountings (dovetails) into the grooves on the underside of the terminal block. 3. Press the upper side of the supplementary terminal against the underside of the terminal block, and slide the supplementary terminal to the back. The supplementary terminal engages. Figure 2-11 Securing a Supplementary Terminal to the Terminal Block ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 2-19 Installation Shielding for Analog Processing In analog processing, you insert the cables of the signal lines in the shield terminal. To do this, proceed as follows: 1. Clip the TB 16IM-SC/TB 16SC terminal block onto the rail. 2. Connect a 1- or 2-tier supplementary terminal to the TB 16IM-SC/ TB 16SC terminal block. 3. Connect the metallic shield terminal to the 1- or 2-tier supplementary terminal. Figure 2-12 Connecting a Shield Terminal to the Supplementary Terminal 2-20 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Installation 4. Secure the shield terminal in the supplementary terminal by tightening the screw of the slot with a screwdriver. 5. If you are using a TB 16IM-SC/TB 16 SC (screw-type terminal): Secure the shield terminal in the supplementary terminal by tightening the screw of the slot with a screwdriver. If you are using a TB 16IM-SC/TB 16 SC (spring terminal): Secure the shield terminal in the supplementary terminal by inserting a screwdriver in the lower opening and the shield terminal in the upper opening until the stop. 6. Strip the insulation to bare the conductors. 7. Secure the bared wire ends in the terminal block, and pull them through the shield terminal. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 2-21 Installation 2-22 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 3 Wiring Introduction The ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect has been designed for simple wiring. To this end, the label of the ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect has been made self-explanatory. In this chapter, you will find additional information on wiring the ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect. Procedure The wiring of the ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect involves several steps. We suggest you adhere to the following sequence: Procedure Important p infor- 1. General rules and regulations mation on wiring 2. Configuring the electrical installation Section 3.1 3.2 3. Wiring rules 3.3 Wiring the ET 200L 1. Wire the ET 200L TB 16L/TB 32L terminal block 3.4 Installingg the ET 200L-SC 200L SC and Smart Connect 1. Wire the ET 200L TB 16L/TB 32L terminal block 3.4 2. Wire the Smart Connect TB 16SC terminal block 3.5 3. Install a supplementary terminal for the TB 16SC 3.8 4. Connect shielded cables to the shield terminal of the supplementary terminals 3.9 5. Connect the Smart Connect SC to the ET 200L-SC 3.10 1. Wire the ET 200L TB 16IM-SC terminal block 3.4 2. Wire the ET 200L IM-SC interface module 3.7 3. Wire the Smart Connect TB 16SC terminal block 3.5 4. Install the supplementary terminal for the TB 16SC/TB 16IM-SC 3.8 5. Connected shielded cables to the shield terminal of the supplementary terminals 3.9 6. Connect the Smart Connect SC to the TB 16IM-SC 3.10 Wiringg the ET 200L-SC 200L SC IM-SC and Smart Connect ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 3-1 Wiring Contents of the Chapter 3-2 Section Topic Page 3.1 General Rules and Regulations 3-3 3.2 Configuring the Electrical Installation 3-5 3.3 Wiring Rules 3-9 3.4 Wiring the ET 200L TB 16L/TB 32L Terminal Block 3-11 3.5 Wiring the Smart Connect TB 16SC Terminal Block 3-14 3.6 Wiring the ET 200L TB 16IM-SC Terminal Block 3-16 3.7 Wiring the ET 200L IM-SC Interface Module 3-18 3.8 Installing a Supplementary Terminal for the TB 16SC/TB 16IM-SC 3-22 3.9 Connecting Shielded Cables to the Shield Terminal of the Supplementary Terminals 3-23 3.10 Connecting the Smart Connect SC to the ET 200L-SC/TB 16IM-SC 3-24 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Wiring 3.1 General Rules and Regulations Introduction As a component part of a plant or system, the ET 200L distributed I/O device necessitates observance of special rules and regulations, depending on where it is to be used. This section provides an overview of the most important rules which you have to observe for integrating the ET 200L distributed I/O device in a plant or system. Specific Application Observe the safety and accident prevention regulations - for example, the machine protection guidelines - for specific applications. EMERGENCY STOP Devices EMERGENCY STOP devices conforming with IEC 204 (corresponds to DIN VDE 113) must remain effective in all the operating modes of the plant or system. Plant Start-up After Certain Events The following table shows the points you have to take into account upon start-up of a plant following certain events. If ... Then ... Start-up follows a voltage drop or failure Start-up of the ET 200L follows an interruption of bus communications Start-up follows unlocking of the EMERGENCY STOP device No hazardous operating states may occur. Force an EMERGENCY STOP, if necessary. There must not be an uncontrolled or undefined start-up. ET 200L start-up occurs without the DP master addressing the ET 200L Supply Voltage The following table shows you the items you have to take into account in respect of the supply voltage. With ... It Is Essential That ... A permanently installed plant or system not having an allpole supply isolating switch A supply isolating switch or a fuse be present in the building installation Load current power supplies, power supply modules The set rated voltage range corresponds to the local supply voltage All circuits of the ET 200L distributed I/O device The fluctuation or deviation of the supply voltage from the rated value be within the permitted tolerance (refer to Section 6.6) ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 3-3 Wiring 24 VDC Supply The following table shows the points that you have to take into account in respect of the 24 VDC supply. With ... Protection Against External Electrical Phenomena Pay Attention to... Outdoor lightning protection 24 VDC supply lines, signal lines Indoor lightning protection 24 VDC supply Safe (electrical) isolation of extra-low voltage The following table shows you the items you have to take into account in respect of protection against electrical phenomena or faults. With ... 3-4 Take lightning protection pprecautions - for example, l lightning li ht i conductors Buildings Pay Attention to: Any plant or system in which the ET 200L is installed Is the plant or system connected to a protective conductor for diverting electromagnetic interference? Connecting leads, signal and bus lines Are the wiring arrangement and installation correct? Signal and bus lines Any break of a line or conductor must not result in undefined states of the plant or system. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Wiring 3.2 Configuring the Electrical Installation Introduction In this section, you will find information on the overall installation of an ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect on a grounded supply (TN-S system). The specific topics discussed are: S Circuit-breaking devices, short-circuit and overload protection in accordance with DIN VDE 0100 and DIN VDE 0113 S Load current power supplies and load circuits. Definition: Grounded Supply With grounded supplies, the neutral conductor of the system is grounded. A mere ground fault between a live conductor and ground or a grounded section of the plant causes the protective devices to trip. Components and Protective Measures Different components and protective measures are specified for erecting a complete plant. The types of component and the degree to which the protective measures are binding depend on the DIN VDE regulation that applies to the installation of your plant. The following table refers to Figure 3-1. Table 3-1 DIN VDE Regulations for Installation of a Controller Compare ... Ref. to Fig. 3-1 DIN VDE 0100 DIN VDE 0113 Circuit-breaking device for PLC, sensors and signal control elements ... Part 460: Main switch ... Part 1: Disconnector Short-circuit and overloadprotection: Grouped for sensors and signal control elements ... Part 725: Single-pole protection of circuits ... Part 1: S With grounded secondary circuit: singlepole protection S In all other cases: all-pole protection Load current power supply for AC load circuits with more than five electromagnetic apparatus Galvanic isolation by means of a transformer is recommended Galvanic isolation by means of a transformer is essential Note The ET 200L and Smart Connect cannot be operated with an ungrounded supply. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 3-5 Wiring rCharacteristics of Load Current Power Supplies The load current power supply feeds input and output circuits (load circuits) as well as sensors and actuators. The following table lists the characteristics of load current power supplies that are required in specific applications. Characteristic of Load Current Power Supply Required for ... Safe (electrical) isola- Modules that have to be tion supplied with voltages v 60 VDC or v 25 VAC Remarks Power supply PS 307 and Siemens Series 6EP1 load current power supplies have this characteristic 24 VDC load circuits Output voltage tolerances: 20.4 V to 28.8 V 24 VDC load circuits If the output tolerances are exceeded, we recommend that you install a back-up capacitor. Rating: 200 F per 1 A load current (with full-wave rectification). Rule: Ground Load Circuits Load circuits should be grounded. EMC You will find notes on EMC-compatible installation and wiring in the manual for the DP master you are using or for the host system. Fault-free operating reliability is ensured by the common reference potential (ground). Install a detachable connection to the protective conductor on the external power supply (terminal L or M) or on the isolation transformer (Figure 3-1, ). This measure makes it simpler for you to locate ground faults in the power distribution system. Take into account the following notes on EMC-compatible installation of the ET 200L distributed I/O device: S We recommend that you place the cable shield of the PROFIBUS-DP on both sides of a shield bus. S The chassis ground and the ground terminal are interconnected in the ET 200L distributed I/O device. Connect the ground terminal of the ET 200L distributed I/O device using a copper cable of at least 2.5 mm2 to the central grounding point in the installation cabinet. S In the case of the ET 200L-SC, connect the ground terminals of the ET 200L-SC and Smart Connect SC using a short copper cable of at least 2.5 mm2. 3-6 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Wiring ET 200L in Overall Installation Figure 3-1 shows the location of the ET 200L in the overall system (load current voltage supply and grounding philosophy) for supply from a TN-S system. Remark: The arrangement of the power supply connections shown in the figure does not correspond to the actual arrangement but was chosen for the sake of clarity. L1 L2 L3 N PE Low-voltage distribution system for example, TN-S system (3 400 V) Cabinet PS ET 200L ET 200L-SC Rail ET 200L-SC IM-SC L1 L+ Electronics M N Ground bus in cabinet AC AC Load circuit 24 to 230 VAC for AC modules AC DC 5 to 60 VDC load circuit for non-isolated DC modules AC DC 5 to 60 VDC load circuit for floating DC modules Figure 3-1 Operating the ET 200L from a Grounded Supply ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 3-7 Wiring Smart Connect in Overall Installation Only safely isolated low voltage (DC 24 V) can be used as the power supply. Safe isolation from the mains supply can be achieved in accordance with the requirements in VDE 0100 Part 410 / HD 384-4-41 / IEC 364-4-41 (as functional low voltage with safe isolation) or VDE 0805 / EN 60950 / IEC 950 (as safety extralow voltage with safe isolation SELV) or VDE 0106 Part 101. L1 Low-voltage distribution, e.g. TN-S system N PE Cabinet Rail Terminal block PS Electronic modules L L+ M N Supplementary terminal PE Ground bus in cabinet Figure 3-2 Power Supply of the Terminal Block Special Feature The 1DIAC120/230V and 1DOAC120/230V1A electronic modules do not require any auxiliary voltage (L+, M). A supplementary terminal for connecting the protective conductor is required when these electronic modules are used. 3-8 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Wiring 3.3 Wiring Rules Rules for Wiring Table 3-2 The table below shows you what you must observe when wiring the terminal block and the supplementary terminal. Pinout of the PROFIBUS-DP Terminal Connection Rules for ... Terminal block Spring Terminal Screw-Type Terminal Suitable cable cross-sections: 0.14 to 1.5 mm2 (for PI connection: 2.5 mm2) Solid cables Flexible cables Without wire end ferrule With wire end ferrule 0.14 to 1.5 mm2 (for PI connection: 2.5 mm2) 0.14 to 1.5 mm2 Number of cables per connection 1 or combination of 2 cables to a total of 1.5 mm2 in one wire end ferrule Max. diameter of cable insulation 3.1 mm 3.8 mm for 2.5 mm2 Insulation stripping length of the cables Without insulation collars With insulation collars 7 to 11 mm 7 to 11 mm Wire end ferrule in accordance with DIN 46228 Without insulation collars With insulation collars - 0.25 to 1.0 mm 2 - 1.5 mm2 Shape A; up to 12 mm long Shape A; up to 12 mm long Shape E; up to 12 mm long Shape E; up to 12 mm long* Shape E; 12 mm long Shape E; 18 mm long* Blade width of the screwdriver 3.5 mm (cylindrical design) Tightening torque for connecting cables (not applicable to spring terminals) - Ground connection up to 6 mm2 in cable lug for M4 screw Terminal Block with Screw-Type Terminal 0.4 to 0.7 Nm To wire the terminal block (screw-type terminal), proceed as follows: 1. Strip the insulation of the wires down to 11 mm. 2. Connect the conductors. Begin on the left under the terminal block. 3. Screw the ends of the cables onto the terminal block with a tightening torque of 0.5 Nm. Tighten the screws on the unwired terminals as well. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 3-9 Wiring Terminal Block with Spring Terminal To wire the terminal block (spring terminal), proceed as follows: 1. Strip the insulation of the wires down to 11 mm. Remember to: Insert the screwdriver in the lower opening. Insert the cable in the upper opening until the stop. 1. Insert the screwdriver 2. Insert the cable into the spring terminal until the stop 3. Remove the screwdriver. The cable is clamped to the contact Figure 3-3 How the Spring Terminal Works 4. Release the spring terminal of the first connection using a screwdriver (0.5 x 3.5 mm DIN 5264). Begin at the bottom left of the terminal block. 5. Push the first wire into the released spring terminal and withdraw the screwdriver. 6. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all other wires. ! Warning There is a risk of injury and damage to property. Connecting different phases of a three-phase system to a terminal block can cause injury and damage to property. Connect only one phase to each terminal block. 3-10 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Wiring 3.4 Wiring the ET 200L TB 16L/TB 32L Terminal Block Introduction When wiring the ET 200L distributed I/O device, we distinguish between the terminal block with its supplementary terminal and the electronics block. The terminal block and, if required, the supplementary terminal carry the wiring. The electronics block incorporates the PROFIBUS-DP connection. Wiring the Terminal Block All terminal connections on the terminal block and supplementary terminals are located on the front and are clearly marked and readily visible from the front. Assignment of terminal connections to input/output channels is simple to perform, without danger of confusion. Connect the terminal block and the supplementary terminal in accordance with the configuration. Figure 3-4 shows the terminal connections for terminal block TB 16L. Its pinout is described in Chapter 7. Signal connections for sensors or actuators 1L+ 2L+ 3L+ 4L+ 5L+ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1M 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 TB16L 2M 3M 4M 5M X 2 3 4 A Channel group A Channel group B Power supply Figure 3-4 B 193-1CH00-0XA0 Electronics Sensor supply (DI) or chassis ground (DO) Connection for PE Terminal Connections on Terminal Block TB 16L ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 3-11 Wiring Connecting the Voltage Supply There are three different ways to connect the voltage supply to the terminal block. 1st alternative 2nd alternative L+ 1L+ 2L+ 3L+ 1M 2M 3M 4L+ 4M 5L+ 1L+ 2L+ 3L+ 5M 1M 2M 3M M Shared voltage supply for electronics and groups of channels Figure 3-5 3rd alternative L+ L+ 4L+ 4M L+ L+ L+ 5L+ 1L+ 2L+ 3L+ 5M 1M 2M 3M 4L+ 4M 5L+ 5M M M Shared voltage supply for groups of channels M M M Separate voltage supply for each group of channels Separate voltage supply for electronics Separate voltage supply for electronics Alternative Ways of Connecting the Voltage Supply Block Diagram The block diagrams relating to the ET 200L distributed I/O device will be found in Chapter 7. Label A labeling strip is located on the front of the electronics block for noting the assignment of inputs and outputs. Terminal Connection Model A terminal connection model showing the terminal connection assignment and electrical connections is located beneath the labeling strip on the electronics block (refer to Chapter 8). Clipping on the Bus Connector Clip the bus connector on the electronics block. 1. Clip the bus connector on the PROFIBUS-DP terminal connection after setting the PROFIBUS address of the ET 200L distributed I/O device (refer to Section 2.6). 2. Tighten the fastening screws of the bus connector. 3-12 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Wiring PROFIBUS-DP Terminal Connection The table below describes the pinout of the 9-pin PROFIBUS-DP terminal connection. Table 3-3 View 1 6 2 7 3 8 9 4 5 1 Pinout of the PROFIBUS-DP Terminal Connection Pin No. Signal Name Description 1 - - 2 - - 3 RxD/TxD-P Data line B 4 RTS Request To Send 5 M5V21 Data reference potential (from station) 6 P5V21 Supply Plus (from station) 7 - - 8 RxD/TxD-N Data line A 9 - - For connecting an ET 200 handheld or an optical-fiber module ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 3-13 Wiring 3.5 Wiring the Smart Connect TB 16SC Terminal Block Introduction The TB 16SC terminal block and - if required - the supplementary terminal carry the wiring. Wiring the TB 16SC The figure below shows the connections of the TB 16SC terminal block: Figure 3-6 ! Front View of the Terminal Block Warning When installing the following electronic modules 2DODC24V0.5A (6ES7 122-1BB00-0AA0) 2DODC24V2A (6ES7 122-1BB10-0AA0) check that the polarity of 1L+ and 1M and 2L+ and 2M on the TB 16SC terminal block is correct before you switch on the load voltage. If the polarity is incorrect, any actuators connected may be activated. Connecting to Local Ground The terminal block has one local ground point. 1. You must provide a low resistance connection between the local ground point and the rail. For this purpose, use at least a 4mm2 conductor with a maximum length of 0.5 m (cable lug rated size 4-6 in accordance with DIN 46237). 2. Provide a low-resistance connection between the rail and foundation ground. Ungrounded installation is not possible. 3-14 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Wiring TB 16SC Terminal Designation The following table contains an example of the assignment of terminals to slots. Slot Terminals 1L+; 2L+ 1M; 2M Terminal Assignments ! Slot A (on the extreme left) A1;A2;A3;A4 Slot B B1;B2;B3;B4 Slot C C1;C2;C3:C4 Slot D D1;D2;D3;D4 Slot E E1;E2;E3;E4 Slot F F1;F2;F3;F4 Slot G G1;G2;G3;G4 Slot H H1;H2;H3;H4 Not all electronic modules use all the terminals assigned to the slot. Unused terminals must not be wired in order to maintain the clearance and creepage distances. Warning There is a risk of injury and damage to property. Connecting cables to unassigned terminals can cause injury and damage to property. Do not connect cables to unassigned terminals. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 3-15 Wiring 3.6 Wiring the ET 200L TB 16IM-SC Terminal Block Introduction The TB 16IM-SC terminal block and - if required - the supplementary terminal carry the wiring. The TB 16IM-SC terminal block also has an interface to the Smart Connect. Wiring the TB16 IM-SC The figure below shows the connection of the TB 16IM-SC terminal block: Slots for SC electronic modules Connector for the Smart Connect SC 1L+ 1M A1 A2 B1 B2 C1 C2 D1 D2 E1 E2 F1 F2 G1 G2 H1 H2 2L+ 2M A3 A4 B3 B4 C3 C4 D3 D4 E3 E4 F3 F4 G3 G4 H3 H4 3L+ 3M A B Figure 3-7 Connections of the TB 16IM-SC Terminal Block ! Warning There is a risk of injury and damage to property. Connecting cables to unassigned terminals can cause injury and damage to property. Do not connect cables to unassigned terminals. 3-16 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Wiring Connecting the Power Supply There are two different ways to connect the voltage supply to the terminal block. 1st alternative TB 16IM-SC TB 16IM-SC 1L+ 1M 1L+ 1M 2L+ 2M 2L+ 2M L+ 3L+ 3M L+ 4L+ 4M IM-SC IM-SC M Shared power supply for the IM-SC and TB 16IM-SC (slots A to H) L+ TB 16IM-SC L+ M 1L+ 1M 2L+ 2M M 3L+ 3M 4L+ 4M 5L+ 5M 3rd alternative 2nd alternative L+ M 3L+ 3M 4L+ 4M IM-SC M 5L+ 5M L+ M 5L+ 5M Shared power supply for the TB 16IM- Separate power supply for the TB 16IM-SC (slots A to D and E to H) SC (slots A to H). Separate power supply for the Separate power supply for the IM-SC IM-SC The bridges between 4L+ and 5L+ and between 4M and 5M are in the screw-type terminal for the power supply (see Table 3-5). Figure 3-8 Connection Alternatives for the Power Supply TB 16IM-SC Terminal Designation Unused terminals must not be wired in order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances. Terminals Description Load Group 1L+, 1M Power supply slot A to D - 2L+, 2M; 3L+, 3M Power supply slot E to H - A1;A2;A3;A4 Slot A (extreme left) A B1;B2;B3;B4 Slot B A C1;C2;C3:C4 Slot C A D1;D2;D3;D4 Slot D A E1;E2;E3;E4 Slot E B F1;F2;F3;F4 Slot F B G1;G2;G3;G4 Slot G B H1;H2;H3;H4 Slot H B ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 3-17 Wiring 3.7 Wiring the ET 200L IM-SC Interface Module Introduction The IM-SC connects the TB 16IM-SC terminal block to the PROFIBUS-DP. Wiring the IM-SC The figure below shows all the connections of the IM-SC interface module: Bus terminating switch Connection for power supply Connection for PROFIBUS-DP Connection for chassis ground Figure 3-9 Connections of the IM-SC Interface Module IM-SC Connection to Chassis Ground The chassis ground connection of the ET 200L-SC IM-SC is on the IM-SC interface module. 1. You must connect the connection point to the rail with low resistance. To do this, use at least a 4mm2 cable with a maximum length of 0.5 m and a cable lug with a nominal size of 4-6 (in accordance with DIN 46237). Place the cable lug on the screw by means of which you attach the interface module to the terminal block. 2. Connect the rail with low resitance to the foundation ground. Ungrounded installation is not possible. Strain Relief Grip 3-18 Attach a strain relief grip approximately 20 - 30 cm from the IM-SC for the connecting cables for the power supply and PROFIBUS-DP. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Wiring IM-SC PROFIBUSDP Connection A plug-in, 6-pin screw-type terminal with a shield support connects the ET 200L-SC IM-SC to the PROFIBUS-DP. You can connect the bus lines and the shield to the screw-type terminal. The 6-pin screw-type terminal is shipped with the IM-SC interface module. Table 3-4 Assignment of the PROFIBUS-DP Connection at the IM-SC Interface Module View Cover Holder Signal Name Designation Ground Bus line shield A1 Data line A (IN) B1 Data line B (IN) A2 Data line A (OUT) B2 Data line B (OUT) Ground Bus line shield ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 3-19 Wiring Wiring the PROFIBUS-DP Connection The bus lines (see Appendix A) are connected to the plug-in, multipole screw-type terminal. Note When you remove the PROFIBUS-DP screw-type terminal, the subsequent DP slaves are disconnected from the PROFIBUS-DP. 1. Strip the insulation from the bus line as shown in the figure below. 22 mm 7 mm 6.5 mm Figure 3-10 Length of Insulation Stripped 2. Connect the bus line to the screw-type terminal, and screw the cover on the holder. Cover Bus line IN Holder Bus line OUT Shield IM-SC Shield support Figure 3-11 Wiring the PROFIBUS-DP Screw-Type Terminal 3. Insert the screw-type terminal in the appropriate socket on the IM-SC interface module. 3-20 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Wiring Power Supply Table 3-5 You connect the power supply for the electronics to the plug-in, 4-pole screw-type terminal. The 4L+, 5L+ and 4M, 5M terminals are linked internally. This enables the power supply to be looped through via the 5L+ and 5M terminals. Insert the screw-type terminal in the appropriate socket on the IM-SC interface module. Assignment of the Power Supply Signal Name View Connecting the Power Supply Designation 4L+ DC 24V 5L+ DC 24V (for looping through) 4M Ground 5M Ground (for looping through) You connect the 24V DC power supply to the plug- in, 4-pole screw-type terminal. 1. Connect the bus line to the screw-type terminal, and press the cover on the screw-type terminal. Cover IM-SC Figure 3-12 Connecting the Power Supply 2. Insert the screw-type terminal in the appropriate socket on the IM-SC interface module. IM-SC Bus Terminating Resistors The bus terminating switch allows you to switch bus terminating resistors on or off. The bus terminating switch is located in a recess on the front of the IM-SC interface module. ON The bus terminating resistors are activated. The PROFIBUS-DP terminates at the IM-SC. A data line connected to AOUT and BOUT is separated. OFF The bus terminating resistors are deactivated. You can loop the PROFIBUS-DP through to the IM-SC. Figure 3-13 Functioning of the Bus Terminating Switch ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 3-21 Wiring 3.8 Using the Supplementary Terminal for the TB 16SC/TB 16IM-SC Possible Uses of the Single-Tier Supplementary Terminal The terminals are electrically connected to each other internally. You can use the single-tier supplementary terminal for different purposes. You must adapt the labeling of the supplementary terminal according to the application. 1. You must use the screw-type single-tier supplementary terminal: Connection of protective conductors when using AC modules or the relay module for switching circuits that are not safely isolated. The printed label must remain visible. 2. You can use the single-tier supplementary terminal for the following purposes: Connecting protective ground for BEROs: For this purpose, you must leave the orginal labeling visible. Multiplying M potentials: For this purpose, select either - the labeling strip marked M - or leave the original labeling visible. Multiplying any potentials: For this purpose, you must label the strip yourself. Possible Uses of the Two-Tier Supplementary Terminal All the terminals of a tier are electrically connected to each other internally. You can use the two-tier supplementary terminal for different purposes. You must adapt the labeling of the supplementary terminal according to the application. 1. You must use the screw-type 2-tier supplementary terminal: Lower tier Connection of protective conductors when using AC modules or the relay module for switching circuits that are not safely isolated. The printed label must remain visible. 2. You can use the two-tier supplementary terminal for the following purposes: Upper tier Multiplying M potentials: For this purpose, select either: - the labeling strip marked M - or leave the original labeling visible Multiplying the potential of any one potential For this purpose, you must label the blank strip yourself. Lower tier Connecting protective ground for BEROs or shield terminals 3-22 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Wiring 3.9 Connecting Shielded Lines to the Shield Terminal of the Supplementary Terminals Application The shield terminal makes it easy to connect to ground all shielded cables that lead to or from electronic modules of the Smart Connect. You obtain a connection to ground by installing the shield terminal in the supplementary terminal and connecting it to local ground at low resistance. Structure of the Shield Terminal The shield terminal is subdivided by function into a connecting lug and a spring terminal. The connecting lug establishes the electrical contact in the supplementary terminal. The spring terminal contacts the shield of the signal line. Mounting the Shield Terminal To secure the shield terminal, proceed as follows: 1. Make as short a connection as possible between 2M on the TB 16SC/TB 16IM-SC terminal block and the tier of the supplementary terminal in which you want to insert the shield terminals. 2. Insert the shield terminal into the desired position in the supplementary terminal. 3. Use a screwdriver with a blade width of 3.5 mm to secure the shield terminal. Connecting Cables You can only connect one or two shielded cables to each shield terminal. You connect the cables to the bared cable shield. The bared length of the cable shield must be at least 20 mm. Cables with cross-sections of 4...7 mm are connected securely. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 3-23 Wiring 3.10 Connecting the Smart Connect SC to the ET 200L-SC/TB 16IM-SC Introduction The electronics blocks of the ET 200L-SC and the ET 200L-SC IM-SC can all be supplemented by means of the Smart Connect: ET 200L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V - 6ES7 131-1BH11-0XB0 ET 200L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V - 6ES7 131-1BL11-0XB0 ET 200L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 132-1BH11-0XB0 ET 200L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 133-1BL10-0XB0 ET 200L-SC TB 16IM-SC - 6ES7 120-0AH50-0AA0 (screw-type terminal), 6ES7 120-0BH50-0AA0 (spring terminal) Connecting the Smart Connect Enclosed with every TB 16SC terminal block is a 5 cm long Smart Connect cable set with which you can connect the Smart Connect. 1. Insert the sheathed end of the cable set into the Smart Connect interface of the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC. 2. One of the connecting cable's connectors has a lug. Insert this connector into the terminal block of the Smart Connect. Note All open Smart Connect interfaces must be closed using the accompanying SC cover before operating the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC. Only then are the requirements for handling electrostatically sensitive components met. Removing the Smart Connect When you remove Smart Connect, do it in the following order: 1. Turn off the power supply on the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC and Smart Connect. 2. Detach the cable set from the terminal block of the Smart Connect. 3. Place the SC cover on the Smart Connect interface of the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC. Only then are the requirements for handling electrostatically sensitive components met. 3-24 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 4 Commissioning Contents of the Chapter Section Topic Page 4.1 Configuration Software 4-2 4.2 Commissioning the ET 200L and Smart Connect 4-3 4.3 Replacing SC Electronic Modules 4-5 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 4-1 Commissioning 4.1 Configuration Software ET 200L You configure the ET 200L distributed I/O device and SC using the following configuration software. COM ET 200 Windows as of Version 1.0 COM PROFIBUS as of Version 3.0 STEP 7 as of Version 2.1 You will find the name of the type file for the various electronics blocks and the contents of the device master file described in Appendix C. ET 200L-SC The following applies to the ET 200L-SC: DP Master Configuration Software Type Files SIMATIC S7 STEP 7 as of Version 3.0 IM 308C COM ET 200 Windows as of Version 1.0 See Table C-14 IM 308C See Table C-14 COM ET 200 Windows as of Version 2.1 See Table C-14 see Section 5.2.1 to 5.2.5 5.2.1 to 5.2.5 5.2.6 C.5 5.2.1 to 5.2.5 Device master files: See Table C-2 COM PROFIBUS as of Version 3.0 See Table C-14 S5-95U with DP master interface COM ET 200 Windows as of Version 1.0 See Table C-14 Other master COM PROFIBUS Version 3.1 ET 200L-SC IM-SC DP Master Recommendation: See Table C-14 and Device master files: See Table C-2 C.5 5.2.6 C.5 The following applies to the ET 200L-SC IM-SC: Configuration Software Type Files SIMATIC S7 STEP 7 as of Version V 4.1 See Table C-14 IM 308-C COM PROFIBUSas of Version V 3.2 See Table C-14 S5-95U with DP master interface COM PROFIBUS as of Version V 3.2 See Table C-14 Other master COM PROFIBUS as of Version V 3.2 4-2 5.2.6 see Section 5.2.1 to 5.2.5 5.2.1 to 5.2.5 Recommendation: S. Table C-14 and Device master files: See Table C-2 5.2.6 C.5 5.2.6 C.5 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Commissioning 4.2 Commissioning the ET 200L and Smart Connect Commissioning the ET 200L Step Commission the ET 200L distributed I/O device as follows: Activity Explanation 1 Install and wire up the ET 200L. You will find detailed instructions on installing and wiring in Chapters 2 and 3. 2 Set the PROFIBUS address of the ET 200L. 3 Clip the bus connector on the electronics block. The two rotaryy switches used to set the PROFIBUS address dd are concealed l d bby th the bus connector (refer to Section 2.6). 4 If you are using an ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC, you can now connect the Smart Connect. Use the enclosed Smart Connect cable set for this purpose. 5 Turn on the power supply for the ET 200L. - Result: The ET 200L starts up automatically. 6 If you are using an ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC, turn on the power supply of the Smart Connect SC and ET 200L-SC. The power supply of the Smart Connect SC must not be turned on after that of the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC. Result: The ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC and Smart Connect SC starts up automatically. Note Full operational safety of the electronics blocks is not ensured until you have applied the labeling strips to the front of the electronics blocks (electrostatic discharge at the front of the module, LED coverage). ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 4-3 Commissioning Start-up The ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect starts up automatically when the power supply is turned on. A separate switch is not available. During start-up, both LEDs (ON and BF =Bus Fault) are on. The ET 200L distributed I/O device ... Sets the outputs to "0". Applies the PROFIBUS address from the two rotary switches. Receives the configuration data from the DP master and evaluates the details contained in the configuration data. If the configuration agrees with the installation, the ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect initiates data exchange, and the BF LED goes off. ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC with SC-Modules The ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC behaves as follows when analog SC modules are connected: SC modules can only be detected at ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC start-up after power on. If the 24V supply on the SC terminal block is not yet connected at start-up, SC modules are not detected. The ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC starts up when the power supply is switched on. This behavior can result in the following errors: A configured SC module is not detected at start-up. As a result, a diagnostic interrupt occurs with a parameterization error for the SC add-on, and the SF LED on the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC comes on. ET 200L-SC (as of version 3), ET 200L-SC IM-SC. An SC module or counter module fails during operation. As a result, a diagnostic interrupt occurs with a module error for the SC add-on, and the SF LED on the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC comes on. Data Exchange After start-up, data exchange is initiated between the DP master and the ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect. The data exchange is displayed by the ET 200L distributed I/O device as follows: The green operating LED (ON) is on. The bus fault LED (BF) is off. The inputs and outputs are enabled. Conductive inputs and outputs are indicated on the status LEDs by the corresponding LED flashing. 4-4 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Commissioning 4.3 Replacing SC Electronic Modules Starting point The system is running. You want to change the system configuration of the Smart Connect. You Want to Connect Additional Electronic Modules The system is in RUN mode. You want to plug in one or more additional electronic modules. 1. Set the CPU to STOP mode. 2. Switch off the load voltage supply to the ET 200L and Smart Connect. 3. Extend the process wiring. 4. Insert the new electronic modules into the terminal block in accordance with the positioning of the coding slide switches. 5. Create a new configuration. 6. Switch on the load voltage supply to the ET 200L and Smart Connect again. 7. Expand your user program. 8. Set the CPU to RUN mode. 9. Check the actual status of the system Note Never connect and disconnect the SC electronic modules during operation. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 4-5 Commissioning 4-6 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 5 Diagnostics Introduction Contents of the Chapter The ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect was designed to make working with and commissioning it as simple as possible. If a failure nevertheless occurs, you can find out what it is by means of LEDs and slave diagnostics. Section Topic Page 5.1 Diagnostics Using the LEDs 5-2 5.2 Slave Diagnostics 5-5 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 5-1 g Diagnostics 5.1 Diagnostics Using the LEDs Introduction The ET 200L distributed I/O device features the following diagnostic options: LEDs Slave diagnostics (refer to Section 5.2) Status Display Each input and output of the ET 200L distributed I/O device has a status display. The status display LED lights up when the input or output is active. ET 200L LED Display The ET 200L distributed I/O device has two LEDs for displaying statuses. Table 5-1 Diagnostics Using the LED Display BF LED (Bus Fault) ON LED Off Off On Meaning On Error Handling No voltage is being applied to Check the power supply. the ET 200L. An ET 200L hardware fault has occurred. Switch on the on-off switch for 24 VDC on the power supply module. Check whether the electronics block is properly secured on the terminal block. ET 200L is in the process of - starting up. The connection to the DP mas- Check the PROFIBUS connec- ter has failed. ET 200L has still not received any configuration data. Check the DP master. Check the configuration in the tion. DP master (station type, input/ output, PROFIBUS address). Check which PROFIBUS address has been set. Off 5-2 On Data exchange - ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c g Diagnostics LEDs on the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC Table 5-2 The ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC distributed I/O device has three LEDs for indicating its status. Diagnostics Using the LEDs of the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC SF LED (Group Error) BF LED (Bus Fault) ON LED Meaning Off Off Off No voltage is being applied Check the power supply. to the ET 200LSC/ET 200L-SC IM-SC An ET 200LSC/ET 200L-SC IM-SC hardware fault has occurred. Switch on the on-off switch for 24 V DC on the power supply module. Check whether the electronics block is properly secured on the terminal block. Power supply of the - Off Off On Error Handling ET200L-SC/ ET 200L-SC IM-SC is on (comes on briefly when the power is switched on) Data exchange Incorrect assignment of pa- On rameters SC communication error No meaning On On Check whether parameter assignment for the Smart Connect configuration matches the actual Smart Connect configuration. Check that the cable to the Smart Connect is properly connected. Check the power supply of the TB16 SC. Connection to SC module (see byte 15.1, Table 5-6) with serial data transfer aborted (analog module, counter) 24 V power supply of the SC modules is switched off (analog module, counter) Module defective Transmission rate is being Check the PROFIBUS con- adjusted (max. 4s). ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c nection. Check the DP master. 5-3 g Diagnostics Table 5-2 Diagnostics Using the LEDs of the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC SF LED (Group Error) BF LED (Bus Fault) ON LED Off Flashing On On Meaning ET 200L-SC/ET 200L-SC Check the configuration in IM-SC has still not received any configuration data or has received incorrect data. Bus protocol incorrect the DP master (station type, input/output, PROFIBUS address). Check the format of the parameterization frame. Error in configuration Check the configuration in frame. 5-4 Error Handling the DP master (station type, input/output, PROFIBUS address). Check the configuration of the configuration frame. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c g Diagnostics 5.2 Slave Diagnostics In Section 5.2 You will find the following topics in this section: Section Definition Topic Page 5.2.1 General Remarks on Diagnostics 5-6 5.2.2 Structure of the Slave Diagnosis 5-7 5.2.3 Structure of Station Statuses 1 to 3, Master Station Number and Manufacturer Identification 5-8 5.2.4 Structure of the Module Diagnosis for the ET 200L-SC 5-10 5.2.5 Structure of the Station Diagnosis for the ET 200L-SC 5-13 5.2.6 Structure of the Slave Diagnosis for Default Start-Up of the ET 200L-SC 5-15 Diagnostics is the detection and localization of errors. The diagnostics structure is laid down in EN 50170 Volume 2, PROFIBUS. ET 200L diagnostics complies with this standard. Slave diagnostics is explained in the section that follows for the ET 200L. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 5-5 g Diagnostics 5.2.1 General Remarks on Diagnostics Diagnostics with an S7/M7 DP Master If you are operating the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC as a DP slave with a SIMATIC S7/M7 DP master, the modules behave like S7 300 CPU modules. You read out the diagnosis (data record 0) with SFC 13, "DPNRM_DG". Diagnostics with Another DP Master If you are operating the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC as a DP slave with another DP master for example, with an IM 308-C on a SIMATIC S5 - you will find the slave diagnosis structure in Sections 5.2.2 to 5.2.6. Diagnostic Interrupt and Process Interrupt The ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC supports diagnostic interrupts. You can evaluate these types of interrupt with an S7/M7 DP master. In the event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs run automatically in the CPU - refer to the programmer's manual, System Software for S7-300/S7-400, Program Design). If you are operating the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC with another DP master, these interrupts are simulated within station diagnostics. Note In order to be able to evaluate diagnostic interrupts by means of a station diagnosis with another DP master, you must take the following into account: The DP master should be able to store diagnostic messages; this means that diagnostic messages should be stored within the DP master in a ring buffer store. If the DP master cannot store diagnostic messages, only the latest diagnostic message to be received would always be stored, for instance. You have to poll regularly in your application the corresponding bits in the station diagnosis. In doing so, you have to take into account the bus run time of the PROFIBUS-DP so that you poll the bits at least once in synchronization with the bus run time, for instance. Diagnosis upon Erroneous Assignment of Parameters If the DP master sends an erroneous parameter assignment for the SC extension in the parameterization frame, the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC responds with a diagnostic message - in the event of diagnostics being enabled. Owing to an internal processing time, the reply does not immediately follow the parameterization frame, but there is a delay. In the start-up OB, therefore, the diagnosis of the module should be read after a period of approximately 100 ms to determine whether the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC is operating properly. If the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC is already exchanging data, all the available SC inputs are supplied as zeros, and all the available SC outputs remain at zero. 5-6 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c g Diagnostics 5.2.2 Structure of the Slave Diagnosis Introduction The diagnostics of the ET 200L/ET 200L-SC/ET 200L-SC IM-SC distributed I/O device comply with EN 50710 Volume 2, PROFIBUS. The slave diagnosis is explained below. Structure of the Slave Diagnosis The slave diagnosis comprises 6 bytes for the ET 200L and not more than 17 bytes for the ET 200L-SC/ET 200L-SC IM-SC: Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Station statuses 1 to 3 Byte 3 Master PROFIBUS address Byte 4 Byte 5 High byte Manufacturer ID Low byte ET 200L Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 ET 200L-SC Module diagnosis for the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC Byte 9 . . Station diagnosis for ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC Byte 16 Figure 5-1 Requesting a Slave Diagnosis Structure of the Slave Diagnosis You can request a slave diagnosis with the following function blocks: Table 5-3 Function Blocks for Slave Diagnosis PLC Family Number Name SIMATIC S5 with IM 308-C FB 192 192 FB IM308C SIMATIC S7/M7 SFC 13 13 SFC "DPNRM_DG" S5-95U with DP master interface FB 230 230 FB S_DIAG SIMATIC S5 with CP 5431 DP/FMS ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Communication function blocks (see standard FBs) SEND and RECEIVE with job number 209 5-7 g Diagnostics 5.2.3 Structure of Station Statuses 1 to 3, Master Station Number and Manufacturer Identification Definition of Station Status Station statuses 1 to 3 provide an overview of the status of a DP slave (refer to Figure 5-1, bytes 0 to 2). Structure of Station Status 1 Station status 1 provides information about the DP slave and is structured as follows: Table 5-4 Bit Structure of Station Status 1 (Byte 0) Meaning Action 0 1: The DP slave cannot be addressed by the DP master. 1 1: The DP slave is not yet ready to exchange data. Wait, because the ET 200L is just being pow- 1: The configuration data sent by the DP master to the DP slave do not agree with the installation of the DP slave. Correct station type or correct installation of 3 1: An external diagnosis exists. Check the contents of the external diagnosis. 4 1: The requested function is not supported by the DP slave. Check the configuration. 5 1: The DP master cannot interpret the reply from the DP slave. Check the bus installation. 6 1: The DP slave type does not agree with the software configuration. Correct station type entered in the system con- 1: Parameters have been assigned to the DP slave by a different DP master from that which currently has access to the DP slave. The bit is always 1 if you are in the process of 2 7 5-8 Correct PROFIBUS address set on ET 200L? Bus connector connected? Voltage at DP slave? RS 485 repeater set correctly? Supply voltage ON/ OFF performed on ET 200L? ered up. the ET 200L entered in the system configuration software? figuration software? accessing, for example, the ET 200L with the PU or another DP master. The PROFIBUS address of the parameterization master is located in the "master PROFIBUS address" diagnostic byte. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c g Diagnostics Structure of Station Status 2 Station status 2 provides additional information about the DP slave and is structured as follows: Table 5-5 Structure of Station Status 2 (Byte 1) Bit 1 Meaning 0 1: Parameters have to be assigned again to the DP slave. 1 1: A diagnostic message has been issued. The DP slave cannot resume operation until the fault has been corrected (static diagnostic message). 2 1: The bit is always set to "1" if the DP slave having this PROFIBUS address is present. 3 1: Response monitoring has been enabled for this DP slave. 4 1: The DP slave has received the "FREEZE" control command1. 5 1: The DP slave has received the "SYNC" control command1. 6 1: The bit is always set to "0". 7 1: The DP slave is disabled - that is, it has been removed from the processing in progress. The bit is updated only if another diagnostic message changes too. Structure of Station Status 3 Station status 3 is reserved and is not relevant in as far as the diagnostics of the ET 200L distributed I/O device are concerned. Definition of the Master PROFIBUS Address The Master PROFIBUS Address diagnostic byte stores the PROFIBUS address of the DP master which has assigned parameters to the DP slave (refer to Figure 5-1, byte 3). Structure of the Master PROFIBUS Address The master PROFIBUS address comprises one byte with the PROFIBUS address of the DP master that assigned parameters to the DP slave and has read and write access to the DP slave. Definition of the Manufacturer ID A code is stored in the manufacturer identification that describes the type of the DP slave (refer to Figure 5-1, bytes 4 and 5). Structure of the Manufacturer ID The manufacturer identification of the DP slave comprises two bytes. You will find the manufacturer identifications of the different electronics blocks in Appendix C, Table C-1 and C-4. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 5-9 g Diagnostics 5.2.4 Structure of the Module Diagnosis for the ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Module Diagnosis The module diagnosis for the ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC (bytes 6 to 8) tells you the slot for which a diagnosis is available. Structure with the COM/S7 Configuration Software The structure of the module diagnosis is indicated below. You will find an explanation of the slots in Appendix C.3. Byte 6 43H 6 5 4 3 1 1 1 1 Bit no. Byte 7 7 6 5 4 3 1 1 1 1 1 Bit no. L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A ET 200L-SC: Inputs/outputs 1 to 8 of the on-board device defective (slot 4) ET 200L-SC: Inputs/outputs 9 to 16 of the on-board device defective (slot 5) Smart Connect digital/analog1 defective (slot 6) Smart Connect analog defective (slot 7) L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V ET 200L-SC: Inputs 1 to 8 of the on-board device defective (slot 4) ET 200L-SC: Inputs 9 to 16 of the on-board device defective (slot 5) ET 200L-SC: Inputs 17 to 24 of the on-board device defective (slot 6) ET 200L-SC: Inputs 25 to 32 of the on-board device defective (slot 7) Smart Connect digital/analog1 defective (slot 8) 7 6 5 4 3 1 1 1 1 1 Bit no. L-SC 16 DI/16 DO 24 V/0.5 A ET 200L-SC: Outputs 1 to 8 of the on-board device defective (slot 4) ET 200L-SC: Outputs 9 to 16 of the on-board device defective (slot 5) ET 200L-SC: Inputs 1 to 8 of the on-board device defective (slot 6) ET 200L-SC: Inputs 9 to 16 of the on-board device defective (slot 7) Smart Connect digital/analog1 defective (slot 8) Bit no. Byte 8 1 L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V L-SC 16 DI/16 DO 24 V/0.5 A Smart Connect analog defective (slot 9) SC modules analog when only analog modules are used Figure 5-2 5-10 0 1 Structure of the Module Diagnosis with the COM/S7 Configuration Software for the ET 200L-SC ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c g Diagnostics Byte 6 43H Byte 7 4 3 1 1 Bit no. L-SC IM SC Smart Connect digital/analog1 defective (slot 4) Smart Connect analog defective (slot 5) Byte 8 1 00H L-SC IM-SC SC modules analog when only analog modules are used Figure 5-3 Structure of the Module Diagnosis with the COM/S7 Configuration Software for the ET 200L-SC IM-SC ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 5-11 g Diagnostics Structure with any Configuration Software A module diagnosis is structured as follows. You will find an explanation of the slots in Appendix C.3. Byte 6 43H 5 4 3 1 1 1 Bit no. Byte 7 5 4 3 1 1 1 Bit no. L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A ET 200L-SC: Inputs/outputs 1 to 16 of the on-board device defective (slot 4) Smart Connect digital/analog1 defective (slot 6) Smart Connect analog defective (slot 7) L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V ET 200L-SC: Inputs 1 to 32 of the on-board device defective (slot 4) Smart Connect digital/analog1 defective (slot 6) Smart Connect analog defective (slot 7) 5 4 3 1 1 1 Bit no. L-SC 16 DI/16 DO 24 V/0.5 A ET 200L-SC: Inputs/outputs 1 to 16 of the onboard device defective (slot 4) Smart Connect digital/analog1 defective (slot 6) Smart Connect analog defective (slot 7) 4 3 1 1 Bit no. L-SC IM SC Smart Connect digital/analog1 defective (slot 4) Smart Connect analog defective (slot 5) 1 SC modules analog when only analog modules are used Figure 5-4 5-12 Structure of the Module Diagnosis with any Configuration Software for the ET 200L-SC, ET 200L-SC IM-SC ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c g Diagnostics 5.2.5 Structure of the Station Diagnosis for the ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Definition The station diagnosis provides detailed information about a DP slave. Data record 0, which is typical of the SIMATIC S7, is stored in the station diagnosis (bytes 9 to 16). The contents of the station diagnosis always refer to the Smart Connect section. Structure The station diagnosis contains a maximum of eight bytes. You will find an explanation of the slots in Appendix C.3. 7 0 0 Byte 9 0 Bit no. Length of station diagnosis incl. byte 9 (= max. of 8 bytes) Code for station diagnosis Byte 10 01H 01H: Code for S7 diagnosis Byte 11 05H to 9H 04H, 05H Slot for ET 200L-SC Slot for ET 200L-SC IM-SC Byte 12 00H Byte 13 . . Byte 16 Figure 5-5 Saving the Diagnosis Reserved Station diagnosis for the ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Structure of Station Diagnosis Transfer the contents of the station diagnosis to a data block, since the station diagnosis will be updated periodically. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 5-13 g Diagnostics Bytes 13 to 16 for the Diagnostic Interrupt Table 5-6 shows the structure and contents of bytes 13 to 16 for a diagnostic interrupt. Table 5-6 Byte 13 14 15 Bytes 13 to 16 for the Diagnostic Interrupt Bit Meaning Error Handling 0 Module malfunction A module malfunction has occurred. 1 Internal error An internal error has occurred (see byte 13.6, byte 13.7 and byte 15.0). 2 External error An external error has occurred (see byte 15.1). 2 to 6 Not applicable --- 7 Wrong parameters in module Check the ET 200L-SC parameter assignment. 0 to 3 Module class: 0010 (special module) --- 4 to 7 Not applicable --- 0 User module wrong or missing Smart Connect incorrect or missing. 1 SC communication error (ET 200L-SC, as of version 3) Connection to the SC module with serial data transfer aborted (analog module, counter). Module defective 24V power supply of the SC modules is switched off (analog module, counter).1 15 2 to 7 Not applicable --- 16 0 to 7 Not applicable --- 1 5-14 After the 24V power supply is connected, the SC module is included in cyclic data transfer again with the parameters received at start-up. It is reported that the diagnosis has been processed and the problem thus corrected. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c g Diagnostics 5.2.6 Structure of Slave Diagnosis for Default Start-Up of ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Default Start-up When you execute a default start-up (see AppendixC.5), the following slave diagnosis applies. You will find an explanation of the slots in Appendix C.3. Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Station status 1 to 3 (see Section 5.2.3) Byte 3 Master PROFIBUS adress (see Section 5.2.3) Byte 4 Byte 5 High byte Low byte manufacturer ID (see Section 5.2.3) Module diagnosis: Byte 6 43H Byte 7 5 4 3 1 1 1 Bit no. L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24V/0.5 A ET 200L-SC: On-board I/O device defective (slot 4) Smart Connect digital/analog1 defective (slot 5) Smart Connect analog defective (slot 6) 4 3 1 1 Bit no. L-SC IM SC Smart Connect digital/analog1 defective (slot 4) Smart Connect analog defective (slot 5) Byte 8 1 00H SC modules analog when only analog modules are used Figure 5-6 Slave Diagnosis for Default Start-up of the ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 5-15 g Diagnostics 5-16 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 6 General Technical Data What Is General Technical Data? Contents of the Chapter The general technical data consists of the standards and test values with which the ET 200L conforms and which it fulfills, and the test criteria by which the ET 200L distributed I/O device was tested. Section Topic Page 6.1 Standards and Certification 6-2 6.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility 6-4 6.3 Shipping and Storage Conditions 6-6 6.4 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions 6-7 6.5 Details of Insulation Testing, Safety Class, and Degree of Protection 6-8 6.6 Rated Voltage of the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device 6-9 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 6-1 General Technical Data 6.1 Standards and Certification Introduction This chapter contains information the following for the modules and components of the ET 200L and Smart Connect SC: The most important standards complied with by the ET 200L and Smart Connect SC The certification of the ET 200L and Smart Connect SC IEC 1131 The ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect SC meet the requirements and criteria of IEC 1131, Part 2. PROFIBUS DP The ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect SC meet the requirements and criteria of EN 50 170 Volume 2, PROFIBUS. CE Marking Our products fulfill the requirements and safety objectives of the following EC Directives and comply with the harmonized European standards (EN) published for stored-program controllers in the official journals of the European Communities: 89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive (for electrical equipment) The EC Declarations of Conformity are available to the relevant authorities at the following address: Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Bereich Automatisierungstechnik A&D AS E 14 Postfach 1963 D-92209 Amberg PNO The ET 200L has the following PNO certificates: Product Name Order Number Release PNO Certificate ET 200L 16 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BH00-0XB0 1 Z00179 ET 200L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BH11-0XB0 1 Z00210 ET 200L 32 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BL00-0XB0 1 Z00180 ET 200L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BL11-0XB0 1 Z00212 ET 200L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 132-1BH00-0XB0 1 Z00181 ET 200L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5A 6ES7 132-1BH11-0XB0 1 Z00211 ET 200L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 132-1BL00-0XB0 1 Z00182 ET 200L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 133-1BL00-0XB0 1 Z00183 6-2 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c General Technical Data UL Recognition UL Recognition Mark Underwriters Laboratories (UL) to Standard UL 508, File No. 116536 CSA Certification CSA Certification Mark Canadian Standard Association (CSA) to Standard C22.2 No. 142, File No. LR 48323 FM Approval Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611, Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D. ! Warning There is a risk of injury and damage to property. In potentially explosive atmospheres, there is a risk of injury to people and damage to property if you disconnect connectors when a ET 200 is in operation. Always de-energize the ET 200 in potentially explosive atmospheres before disconnecting any connectors. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 6-3 General Technical Data 6.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility Definition Electromagnetic compatibility is the ability of an electric device to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with this environment. The ET 200L distributed I/O device also meets the requirements, among others, of the EMC act of the European inner market. A requirement for this is that the ET 200L distributed I/O device meets the specifications and directives concerning electrical installation. Pulse-Shaped Interference The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200L distributed I/O device with regard to pulse-shaped interference. Pulse-Shaped Interference Electrostatic discharge to IEC 801-2 (DIN VDE 0843, Part 2) Burst impulses in accordance with IEC 801-4 (DIN VDE 0843, Part 4) Tested with Corresponds to Severity 8 kV 4 kV 3 (air discharge) 2 (contact discharge) 2 kV (supply line) 2 kV (signal line) 3 Surge in accordance with IEC 801-5 (DIN VDE 0839, Part 10) Only with lightning protection elements (refer to DP master manual). Assymmetrical connection Symmetrical connection 6-4 2 kV (supply line) 2 kV (signal line/data line) 3 1 kV (supply line) 1 kV (signal line/data line) ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c General Technical Data Sine-Shaped Interference The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200L distributed I/O device with regard to sine-shaped interference. HF Radiation to ENV 50140 (Corresponds to IEC 801-3) Electromagnetic RF Field Amplitude-Modulated Pulse-Modulated 80 to 1000 MHz 900 MHz "5 MHz 10 V/m 80 % AM (1 kHz) Emission of Radio Interference RF Coupling to ENV 50141 (Corresponds to IEC 801-6)) p 0.15 to 80 MHz 10 Vrms unmodulated 50 % ED 80 % AM (1 kHz) 200 Hz repetition frequency 150 W source impedance Emitted interference of electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55011: Limit Value Class A, Group 1 (measured at a distance of 30 m). Frequency Emitted Interference From 20 to 230 MHz < 30 dB (mV/m)Q From 230 to 1000 MHz < 37 dB (mV/m)Q ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 6-5 General Technical Data 6.3 Shipping and Storage Conditions Conditions The ET 200L distributed I/O device surpasses the requirements of IEC 1131, Part 2, with regard to shipping and storage conditions. The following details apply to modules that are shipped and stored in their original packaging. Type of Condition v Free fall Temperature variation Relative humidity 6-6 1m From - 40 C to + 70 C Temperature Air pressure Admissible Range 20 K/h From 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponds to a height of -1000 to 3500 m) From 5 to 95 %, without condensation ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c General Technical Data 6.4 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions Climatic Environmental Conditions The following climatic environmental conditions apply: Environmental Conditions Mechanical Environmental Conditions Testing Mechanical Environmental Conditions Operating Ranges Remarks Temperature From 0 to 60 C From 0 to 40 C Temperature variation 10 K/h Relative humidity From 15 to 95 % Without condensation, corresponds to relative humidity (RH) stress rate 2 to IEC 1131-2 Air pressure From 1080 to 795 hPa Corresponds to a height of -1000 to 2000 m Contaminant concentration Test: SO2: < 0.5 ppm; rel. humidity 10 ppm; 4 days < 60 %, no moisture condensation 1 ppm; 4 days H2S: < 0.1 ppm; rel. humidity < 60 %, no moisture condensation Horizontal wall mounting All other installation positions The mechanical environmental conditions are shown in the following table in the form of sinusoidal oscillations. Frequency Range Permanent Occasional 10 v f v58 Hz 0.0375 mm amplitude 0.075 mm amplitude 58 v f v150 Hz 0.5 g constant acceleration 1 g constant acceleration The following table provides information on the type and extent of tests of mechanical environmental conditions. Test for ... Test Standard Remarks Oscillations Oscillation test to IEC 68, Part 2-6 (sine) Oscillation type: frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave per minute. 10 Hz v f v58 Hz, const. amplitude 0.075 mm. 58 Hz v f v150 Hz, const. acceleration 1 g. Oscillation time: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in all of the three perpendicular axes. Shock Shock test to IEC 68, Part 2-27 Type of shock: half sine Force of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration Direction of shock: 3 shocks per +/- direction in all of the three perpendicular axes. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 6-7 General Technical Data 6.5 Details of Insulation Testing, Safety Class, and Degree of Protection Test Voltage Insulation strength is demonstrated in the routine test with the following test voltage in accordance with IEC 1131, Part 2: Circuits with a Rated Voltage Ue to Other Circuits or to Ground Test Voltage 0 V < Uev50 V 500 VDC Safety Class Safety class II in accordance with IEC 536 (VDE 0106, Part 1) - that is, connection to a protective conductor is not necessary. Protection Against Foreign Matter and Water IP 20 degree of protection in accordance with IEC 529 - that is, protection against contact with standard test fingers. Furthermore, it is protected against foreign matter having a diameter greater than 12.5 mm. No special protection against water. 6-8 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c General Technical Data 6.6 Rated Voltage of the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device Rated Voltage for Operation The ET 200L distributed I/O device operates with the rated voltage and corresponding tolerances shown in the following table. Table 6-1 Bridging Voltage Drops Rated Voltage of the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device Rated Voltage Tolerance Range 24 VDC 20.4 to 28.8 VDC The ET 200L distributed I/O device bridges voltage drops of the power supply of up to 20 ms long (does not apply to SC electronic modules). ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 6-9 General Technical Data 6-10 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Terminal Blocks and Supplementary Terminals - Technical Data Introduction Contents of the Chapter 7 The product spectrum of ET 200L and Smart Connect includes various terminal blocks to which you can connect different electronics blocks. This chapter contains the technical data for the terminal blocks and their supplementary terminals. Section Subject Page 7.1 Terminal Block TB 16L - 6ES7 193-1CH00-0XA0, 6ES7 193-1CH10-0XA0 7-2 7.2 Terminal Block TB 32L - 6ES7 193-1CL00-0XA0, 6ES7 193-1CL10-0XA0 7-4 7.3 Terminal Block TB 16L AC- 6ES7 193-1CH20-0XA0 7-7 7.4 Terminal Block TB 16SC 6ES7 120-0AH01-0AA0, 6ES7 120-0BH01-0AA0 7-10 7.5 Terminal Block TB 16IM-SC - 6ES7 120-0AH50-0AA0, 6ES7 120-0BH50-0AA0 7-14 7.6 Supplementary Terminals for TB 16L and TB 32L 7-18 7.7 Supplementary Terminals for TB 16SC and TB 16IM-SC 7-20 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 7-1 Terminal Blocks and Supplementary Terminals - Technical Data 7.1 Terminal Block TB 16L - 6ES7 193-1CH00-0XA0, 6ES7 193-1CH10-0XA0 Order Numbers The TB 16L terminal block is available with two types of connection. Connection by means of a screw-type terminal (Order Number 6ES7 193-1CH00-0XA0) Connection by means of a spring terminal (Order Number 6ES7 193-1CH10-0XA0) Plug-In Electronics Blocks You can connect the following electronics blocks to the TB 16L terminal block: Chapter Plug-In Electronics Blocks Order Number Chapter p 9: ET 200L 16 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BH00-0XB0 ET 200L Electronics Blocks ET 200L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BH11-0XB0 ET 200L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5A 6ES7 132-1BH00-0XB0 ET 200L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 132-1BH11-0XB0 Technical Data Characteristics The terminal block bears the stationary wiring. Dimension Drawing In Figure 7-1 you can see the dimension drawing of the TB 16L terminal block with the 16 DI 24 V DC electronics block clipped on. PROFIBUS-DP BF ET200L ON A B 1 9 SENSOR SUPPLY 61 2 10 POWER SUPPLY 1L+ 17.... 24 1M 1 .... 8 2L+ 25.... 32 2M 9 .... 16 3 11 4 12 4L+ 5 13 4M 6 14 x10 x1 7 15 100 52.5 DI 16xDC24V 8 16 47.5 131-1BH00-0XB0 1L+ 2L+ 3L+ 4L+ 5L+ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1M 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 TB16L 2M 3M 4M 5M A 35.3 B 139-1CH00-0XA0 145 69* * With bus connector: 82 mm Figure 7-1 7-2 Rail support The TB 16L Terminal Block with the Electronics Block Clipped On, Dimension Drawing ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Terminal Blocks and Supplementary Terminals - Technical Data Pinout Table 7-1 shows the pinout of the TB 16L terminal block. Table 7-1 Pinout of the TB 16L Terminal Block Terminal Assignment Inputs Outputs 1 to 8 I0: Signals .0 to .7 Q0: Signals .0 to .7 9 to 16 I1: Signals .0 to .7 Q1: Signals .0 to .7 17 to 24 I0: Sensor supply Q0: Chassis ground (internally jumpered) 25 to 32 I1: Sensor supply Q1: Chassis ground (internally jumpered) 1L+ Power supply for channel group A (I0 and Q0) 2L+ Power supply for channel group B (I1 and Q1) internally jumpered 3L+ 4L+ 5L+ Power supply for electronics, electronics internally jumpered 1M 2M 3M Chassis Ch i groundd connection ti for f channel h l group A, A channel h l group B, and electronics (all internally jumpered) 4M 5M PE Technical Data Dimensions and Weight Dimensions WHD (mm) 14510040.5 Height with electronics block from top edge rail (with bus terminator 6ES7 972-0CA30-0XA0) 82 mm Weight 230 g Module-Specific Data Number of channels ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 16 7-3 Terminal Blocks and Supplementary Terminals - Technical Data 7.2 Terminal Block TB 32L - 6ES7 193-1CL00-0XA0, 6ES7 193-1CL10-0XA0 Order Numbers The TB 32L terminal block is available with two types of connection. Connection via screw-type terminal (Order Number 6ES7 193-1CL00-0XA0) Connection via spring terminal (Order Number 6ES7 193-1CL10-0XA0) Plug-In Electronics Blocks Chapter You can connect the following electronics blocks to the TB 32L terminal block: Plug-In Electronics Blocks Order Number Chapter p 9: ET 200L 32 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BL00-0XB0 ET 200L Electronics Blocks ET 200L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BL11-0XB0 T h i l Data Technical D t ET 200L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 132-1BL00-0XB0 ET 200L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 133-1BL00-0XB0 ET 200L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 133-1BL10-0XB0 Characteristics 7-4 The terminal block bears the stationary wiring. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Terminal Blocks and Supplementary Terminals - Technical Data Dimension Drawing In Figure 7-2 you can see the dimension drawing of the TB 32L terminal block with the LSC 32 DI 24 V electronics block clipped on. PROFIBUS-DP ET200L-SC SF BF ON DI 32xDC24V 52,5 A 1 1M 17 25 18 26 3 11 POWER SUPPLY 4L+ 4M 1L+ 2L+ 3L+ 4L+ 5L+ B SENSOR SUPPLY 33... 1L+ 48 16 1... 1M 9 2 10 19 27 4 12 2M 3M 4M 5M 49... 17... 2L+ 2M 5 13 10 28 64 32 21 29 6 14 22 30 7 15 23 31 8 16 24 32 SC X 2 3 4 47,5 131-1BL10-0XBO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 TB32L Rail support 35,3 69* * With bus connector: 82 mm Figure 7-2 The TB 32L Terminal Block with the Electronics Block Clipped On, Dimension Drawing ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 7-5 Terminal Blocks and Supplementary Terminals - Technical Data Pinout Table 7-2 shows the pinout of the TB 32L terminal block. Table 7-2 Pinout of the TB 32L Terminal Block Terminal Assignment Inputs Outputs 1 to 8 I0: Signals .0 to .7 Q0: Signals .0 to .7 9 to 16 I1: Signals .0 to .7 Q1: Signals .0 to .7 17 to 24 I2: Signals .0 to .7 Q2: Signals .0 to .7 25 to 32 I3: Signals .0 to .7 Q3: Signals .0 to .7 33 to 40 I0: Sensor supply Q0: Chassis ground (internally jumpered) 41 to 48 I1: Sensor supply Q1: Chassis ground (internally jumpered) 49 to 56 I2: Sensor supply Q2: Chassis ground (internally jumpered) 57 to 64 I3: Sensor supply Q3: Chassis ground (internally jumpered) 1L+ Power supply for channel group A (I0 and I1 or Q0 and Q1) 2L+ Power supply for channel group B (I2 and I3 or Q2 and Q3) internally jumpered 3L+ 4L+ 5L+ Power supply for electronics, electronics internally jumpered 1M 2M 3M Chassis Ch i groundd connection ti for f channel h l group A, A channel h l group B, and electronics (all internally jumpered) 4M 5M PE Technical Data Dimensions and Weight Dimensions WHD (mm) 19110040.5 Height with electronics block from top edge rail (with bus terminator 6ES7 972-0CA30-0XA0) 82 mm Weight 350 g Module-Specific Data Number of channels 7-6 32 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Terminal Blocks and Supplementary Terminals - Technical Data 7.3 Terminal Block TB 16L AC 6ES7 193-1CH20-0XA0 Characteristics The TB 16L AC terminal block has the following characteristics: Screw-type terminal connection The terminal block bears the stationary wiring Plug-In Electronics Blocks Chapter You can connect the following electronics blocks to the TB 16L AC terminal block: Plug-In Electronics Blocks Order Number Chapter p 9: ET 200L 16 DI AC 120 V 6ES7 131-1EH00-0XA0 ET 200L Electronics Blocks ET 200L 16 DO AC 120V/1.0A 6ES7 132-1EH00-0XB0 ET 200L 16 DO DC 24 V/AC 120V/2.0 A 6ES7 132-1JH00-0XB0 ET 200L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120V/1.0A 6ES7 133-1EH00-0XB0 Technical Data ET 200L 8DI AC 120V/8 DO DC 24V/AC 120V/2.0 A 6ES7 133-1JH00-0XB0 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 7-7 Terminal Blocks and Supplementary Terminals - Technical Data Dimension Drawing In Figure 7-3 you can see the dimension drawing of the TB 16L AC terminal block with the L 16 DI AC 120 V electronics block clipped on. PROFIBUS-DP BF ET200L ON DI 16xAC120V 1 5 1 17 2 18 2 9 5 21 6 22 6 3 3 19 4 20 4 7 23 8 24 L1 N 14 10 26 11 8 13 29 25 10 7 POWER SUPPLY 13 9 14 30 15 11 X10 15 31 27 12 X1 16 12 28 16 32 x 3 2 4 131 1EH00-0XB0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 L1 L1 TB16L AC 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 N x 3 N 2 4 193 1CH20-0XA0 40.5 99.1 Figure 7-3 7-8 The TB 16L AC Terminal Block with the Electronics Block Mounted, Dimension Drawing (mm) ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Terminal Blocks and Supplementary Terminals - Technical Data Pinout Table 7-2 shows the pinout of the TB 16L AC terminal block. Table 7-3 Pinout of the TB 16L AC Terminal Block Terminal Assignment Inputs Outputs 1 to 8 I0: Signals .0 to .7 Q0: Signals .0 to .7 9 to 16 I1: Signals .0 to .7 Q1: Signals .0 to .7 17 I0.0: Sensor neutral Q0.0: Load voltage 18 I0.1: Sensor neutral Q0.1: Load voltage 19 I0.2: Sensor neutral Q0.2: Load voltage 20 I0.3: Sensor neutral Q0.3: Load voltage 21 I0.4: Sensor neutral Q0.4: Load voltage 22 I0.5: Sensor neutral Q0.5: Load voltage 23 I0.6: Sensor neutral Q0.6: Load voltage 24 I0.7: Sensor neutral Q0.7: Load voltage 25 I1.0: Sensor neutral Q1.0: Load voltage 26 I1.1: Sensor neutral Q1.1: Load voltage 27 I1.2: Sensor neutral Q1.2: Load voltage 28 I1.3: Sensor neutral Q1.3: Load voltage 29 I1.4: Sensor neutral Q1.4: Load voltage 30 I1.5: Sensor neutral Q1.5: Load voltage 31 I1.6: Sensor neutral Q0.6: Load voltage 32 I1.7: Sensor neutral Q1.7: Load voltage L1 Power supply line for electronics N Power supply neutral for electronics PE Technical Data The following table shows the technical data of the TB 16L AC terminal block. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions WHD (mm) 19110040.5 Height with electronics block from top edge rail (with bus terminator) 98.5 mm Weight 283 g Module-Specific Data Number of channels ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 16 7-9 Terminal Blocks and Supplementary Terminals - Technical Data 7.4 Terminal Block TB 16SC Order Numbers The TB 16SC terminal block is available with two types of connection: Connection by means of a screw-type terminal (Order Number 6ES7 120-0AH01-0AA0) Connection by means of a spring terminal (Order Number 6ES7 120-0BH01-0AA0) Plug-In Electronic Modules You can connect the following electronic modules to the TB 16 SC terminal block: Chapter Plug-In Electronic Modules Order Number Chapter p 10: 2DIDC24V 6ES7 121-1BB00-0AA0 Digital SC Electronic Modules 2DODC24V0.5A 6ES7 122-1BB00-0AA0 2DODC24V2A 6ES7 122-1BB10-0AA0 1DIAC120/230V 6ES7 121-1FA00-0AA0 1DOAC120/230V 6ES7 122-1FA00-0AA0 Technical Data 1DORel.AC230V Counter module 1COUNT40kHz Chapter p 12: Analog SC Electronic Modules Technical Data 2 AI U 2 AI HS U 6ES7 122-1HA01-0AA0 * 6ES7 127-1BE00-0AB0 6ES7 123-1FB00-0AB0 * 6ES7 123-1FB50-0AB0 2 AI I 6ES7 123-1GB00-0AB0 , 6ES7 123-1GB10-0AB0 2 AI HS I * 6ES7 123-1GB50-0AB0, 6ES7 123-1GB60-0AB0 2 AI TC 6ES7 123-1JB00-0AB0 1 AI RTD 6ES7 123-1JA00-0AB0 1 AO U 6ES7 124-1FA00-0AB0 1 AO I 6ES7 124-1GA00-0AB0 * Only in conjunction with TB 16IM-SC 7-10 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Terminal Blocks and Supplementary Terminals - Technical Data Characteristics The TB 16SC terminal block has the following characteristics: It can be wired before you plug in the electronic modules. Depending on the design, the wiring can be connected either via screwtype terminals or via spring terminals. You must establish a connection to local ground. The TB16 SC enables a 2-wire connection and can be expanded to 3-wire and 4-wire connection using supplementary terminals. You can slide a labeling strip into the TB16 SC terminal block for noting the assignments between slot and module. The counter module and the high-speed analog SC-electronic modules can only be used in the TB 16SC, when the TB 16SC is connected to a TB 16IM-SC. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 7-11 Terminal Blocks and Supplementary Terminals - Technical Data Dimension Drawing Figure 7-4 shows the front elevation of the TB 16SC terminal block. 112 52.5 69* 47.5 100 115 * With bus connector: 82 mm Figure 7-4 Front Elevation of the Terminal Block ! Caution The spring terminal will be destroyed if you insert the screwdriver into the opening for the wires. Only press the screwdriver into the rectangular openings of the terminal block. 7-12 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Terminal Blocks and Supplementary Terminals - Technical Data Block Diagram The figure below shows you the block diagram of the TB16 SC terminal block. The connections 2L+ and 2M are used for looping through the load voltage supply 1L+ and 1M. Connection cable Figure 7-5 1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M A1 ... A4 B1 ... B4 C1 ... C4 D1 ... D4 E1 ... E4 F1 .... F4 G1 ... G4 H1 ... H4 Block Diagram of the TB16 SC Terminal Block. ! Warning There is a risk of injury and damage to property. Connecting different phases of a three-phase system to a terminal block can lead to injury and damage to property. Connect only one phase to each terminal block. Technical Data Dimensions and Weight Dimensions WHD (mm) 14510040.5 Weight 230 g Module-Specific Data Number of slots 8 Current-carrying capacity via 1L+ and 2L+ Current-carrying capacity per slot with parallel supply max. 8A max. 1,5 A Number of times an electronic module can max. 20 be plugged into a slot of the TB 16 SC Insulation tested (from slot to slot) ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c DC 4000 V 7-13 Terminal Blocks and Supplementary Terminals - Technical Data 7.5 Terminal Block TB 16IM-SC Order Numbers The TB 16IM-SC terminal block is available with two types of connection. Connection by means of a screw-type terminal (Order Number 6ES7 120-0AH50-0AA0) Connection by means of a spring terminal (Order Number 6ES7 120-0BH50-0AA0) Characteristics The TB 16IM-SC terminal block has the following characteristics: It can be wired before you plug in the electronic modules. Depending on the design, the wiring can be connected either via screwtype terminals or via spring terminals. The TB 16IM-SC enables a 2-wire connection and can be expanded to a 3- and 4-wire connection with the supplementary terminals of the TB 16SC. You can slide a labeling strip into the TB 16IM-SC terminal block for noting the assignments between slot and module. the TB 16IM-SC can be expanded with the TB 16SC to connect another 8 SC electronics modules. two load voltage supplies (load voltage group 1L+: A to D, load voltage group 2L+, 3L+: E to F) 7-14 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Terminal Blocks and Supplementary Terminals - Technical Data Plug-In Electronic Modules You can connect the following electronic modules to the TB 16IM-SC terminal block: Chapter Plug-In Electronic Modules Order Number Chapter p 10: 2DIDC24V 6ES7 121-1BB00-0AA0 Digital SC Electronic Modules 2DODC24V0.5A 6ES7 122-1BB00-0AA0 2DODC24V2A 6ES7 122-1BB10-0AA0 Counter module 1COUNT40kHz 6ES7 127-1BE00-0AB0 1DIAC120/230V 6ES7 121-1FA00-0AA0 1DOAC120/230V 6ES7 122-1FA00-0AA0 1DORel.AC230V 6ES7 122-1HA01-0AA0 Chapter p 12: 2 AI U 6ES7 123-1FB00-0AB0 Analog SC Electronic Modules 2 AI HS U 6ES7 123-1FB50-0AB0 2 AI I 6ES7 123-1GB00-0AB0 6ES7 123-1GB10-0AB0 2 AI HS I 6ES7 123-1GB50-0AB0, 6ES7 123-1GB60-0AB0 2 AI TC 6ES7 123-1JB00-0AB0 1 AI RTD 6ES7 123-1JA00-0AB0 1 AO U 6ES7 124-1FA00-0AB0 1 AO I 6ES7 124-1GA00-0AB0 Technical Data Technical Data ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 7-15 Terminal Blocks and Supplementary Terminals - Technical Data Dimension Drawing Figure 7-6 shows the front elevation of the TB 16IM-SC terminal block. IM-SC SF ON Bus terminator ON OFF 100 52.5 BF SIMATIC 47.5 ET200L-SC 160 Rail support 35.3 69* * With bus connector: 82 mm Figure 7-6 The TB 16IM-SC Terminal Block with the IM-SC Interface Module Mounted, Dimension Drawing ! Caution The spring terminal will be destroyed if you insert the screwdriver into the opening for the wires. Only press the screwdriver into the rectangular openings of the terminal block. 7-16 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Terminal Blocks and Supplementary Terminals - Technical Data Block Diagram The figure below shows you the block diagram of the TB 16IM-SC terminal block. The connections 3L+ and 3M are used for looping through the load voltage supply 2L+ and 2M. To the IM-SC A1 ... A4 Figure 7-7 B1 ... B4 C1 ... C4 D1 ... D4 E1 ... E4 F1 .... F4 G1 ... G4 H1 ... H4 1L+ 1M 2L+ 2M 3L+ 3M Block Diagram of the TB 16IM-SC Terminal Block ! Warning There is a risk of injury and damage to property. Connecting different phases of a three-phase system to a terminal block can lead to injury and damage to property. Connect only one phase to each terminal block. Technical Data Dimensions and Weight Dimensions WHD (mm) 16010073.6 Weight 260 g Module-Specific Data Number of slots 8 Current-carrying capacity via 1L+ and 2L+ max. 28A Number of times an electronic module can max. 8 be plugged into a slot of the TB 16IM-SC Isolation tested (from slot to slot) ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c DC 4000 V 7-17 Terminal Blocks and Supplementary Terminals - Technical Data 7.6 Supplementary Terminals for the TB 16L and TB 32L Definition The supplementary terminals allow you to upgrade the two-wire termination of the ET 200L distributed I/O device to a three- or four-wire termination. Versions Supplied Table 7-4 Channels Supplied Versions of the Supplementary Terminals Tiers 1 16 2 1 32 2 Characteristics 7-18 Fixing Order Number Screw-type terminal 6ES7 193-1FH20-0XA0 Spring terminal 6ES7 193-1FH50-0XA0 Screw-type terminal 6ES7 193-1FH30-0XA0 Spring terminal 6ES7 193-1FH60-0XA0 Screw-type terminal 6ES7 193-1FL20-0XA0 Spring terminal 6ES7 193-1FL50-0XA0 Screw-type terminal 6ES7 193-1FL30-0XA0 Spring terminal 6ES7 193-1FL60-0XA0 With the supplementary terminals, every tier is jumpered internally. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Terminal Blocks and Supplementary Terminals - Technical Data Dimension Drawing Figure 7-8 shows the dimension drawings for the supplementary terminals. TB 16L single-tier 22 24.2 PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE 29.8 40.3 145 TB 16L double-tier 37 39.2 M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE 145 29.8 40.3 TB 32L single-tier PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE 22 24.2 PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE 29.8 40.3 191 TB 32L double-tier 37 39.2 M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE 29.8 40.3 Figure 7-8 M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE 191 TB 16L/TB 32L Supplementary Terminals, Dimension Drawing ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 7-19 Terminal Blocks and Supplementary Terminals - Technical Data 7.7 Supplementary Terminals for the TB 16SC and TB 16IM-SC Definition The supplementary terminals allow you to upgrade the two-wire termination of the ET 200L-SC IM-SC distributed I/O device and Smart Connect to a three- or four-wire termination. Versions Supplied Table 7-5 Tiers 1 2 Supplied Versions of the Supplementary Terminals TB16SC/ TB 16IM-SC Fixing Order Number Screw-type terminal 6ES7 120-1AH00-0AA0 Spring terminal 6ES7 120-1BH00-0AA0 Screw-type terminal 6ES7 120-2AH00-0AA0 Spring terminal 6ES7 120-2BH00-0AA0 Shield terminal 6ES7 192-0AA0-0AA0 Characteristics With the supplementary terminals, every tier is jumpered internally. Dimension Drawing Figure 7-8 shows the dimension drawings for the supplementary terminals. TB 16SC/ TB 16IM-SC single-tier 22 115 Installation depth: 40 TB 16SC/ TB 16IM-SC double-tier 38 115 Installation depth: 40 Figure 7-9 7-20 TB 16SC/TB 16IM-SC Supplementary Terminals, Dimension Drawing ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 8 ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Introduction The components of the ET 200L cannot be upgraded with a Smart Connect. This chapter contains the technical data of the ET 200L electronics blocks. TBEB Assignment The following table contains the assignment of the ET 200L electronic blocks to the terminal blocks. Table 8-1 Assignment of the ET 200L Electronic Blocks to the Terminal Blocks Terminal Block Electronics Block Order Number TB 16L - 193-1CH00-0XA0 (6ES7 193-1CH00-0XA0, 6ES7 193-1CH10-0XA0) ET 200L 16 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BH00-0XB0 ET 200L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5A 6ES7 132-1BH00-0XB0 TB 32L - (6ES7 193-1CL00-0XA0, 193 1CL00 0XA0 6ES7 193-1CL10-0XA0) ET 200L 32 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BL00-0XB0 ET 200L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 132-1BL00-0XB0 ET 200L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 133-1BL00-0XB0 ET 200L 16 DI AC 120 V 6ES7 131-1EH00-0XB0 ET 200L 16 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A 6ES7 132-1EH00-0XB0 ET 200L 16 DO DC 24 V/AC 120V/2.0 A 6ES7 132-1JH00-0XB0 ET 200L 8 DI/8DO AC 120 V/1.0 A 6ES7 133-1EH00-0XB0 ET 200L 8DI AC 120V/8 DO DC 24V/AC 120V/2.0 A 6ES7 133-1JH00-0XB0 TB 16L AC (6ES7 193-1CH20-0XA0) 193 1CH20 0XA0) ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 8-1 ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Contents of the Chapter 8-2 Section Subject Page 8.1 Electronics Block L 16 DI DC 24 V - 6ES7 131-1BH00-0XB0 8-3 8.3 Electronics Block L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A - 6ES7 132-1BH00-0XB0 8-9 9.2 Electronics Block L 32 DI DC 24 V - 6ES7 131-1BL00-0XB0 0-4 8.4 Electronics Block L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A - 6ES7 132-1BL00-0XB0 8-12 8.5 Electronics Block L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A - 6ES7 133-1BL00-0XB0 8-15 8.6 Electronics Block L 16 DI AC - 6ES7 131-1EH00-0XB0 8-18 8.7 Electronics Block L 16 DO AC 120 V/ 1.0 A - 6ES7 132-1EH00-0XB0 8-21 8.8 Electronics Block L 16 DO DC 24 V/AC 120V/2.0 A - 6ES7 132-1JH00-0XB0 8-24 8.9 Electronics Block L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A - 6ES7 133-1EH00-0XB0 8-28 8.10 Electronics Block L 8DI AC 120V/8 DO DC 24V/AC 120V/2.0 A - 6ES7 133-1JH00-0XB0 8-31 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data 8.1 Electronics Block L 16 DI DC 24 V - 6ES7 131-1BH00-0XB0 Characteristics The L 16 DI DC 24 V electronics block has the following characteristics: 16 inputs in two groups, each of eight inputs Rated input voltage of 24 V DC Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs) View The following figure shows a view of the electronics block. PROFIBUS-DP BF ET200L ON DI 16xDC24V A B 1 9 SENSOR SUPPLY A 1L+ 1M 17.... 1 .... 24 8 B 2L+ 2M 25.... 9 .... 32 16 2 10 POWER SUPPLY 3 11 4L+ 5 13 4M 6 14 7 15 4 12 x10 x1 X 2 3 4 131-1BH00-0XB0 8 16 Receptacle for labeling strip Figure 8-1 View of the L 16 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 8-3 ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 8-2 shows the block diagram. ON BF Internal power supply Electronics PROFIBUS-DP connection A B Galvanic isolation 10 1 PROFIBUS address EB 1L+ 2L+ 3L+ 4L+ 5L+ 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 24 VA 24 VB 24 Vinternal Figure 8-2 8-4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 A TB B Block Diagram of the L 16 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Technical Data The following table shows the technical data of the L 16 DI DC 24 V electronics block. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions WHD (mm) 1456060.5 Weight Approx. 130 g Module-Specific Data Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Green LED per channel Interrupts None Diagnostic function Yes Bus monitoring Red "BF" LED Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93 .75; 187.5; 500 and 1 500 kBaud Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP FREEZE compatibility Yes Number of inputs 16 Input voltage Unshielded Shielded Max. 600 m Max. 1000 m Rated value At signal "1" At signal "0" Manufacturer ID 0014H Input current Cable length Voltages, Currents, Potentials PROFIBUS-DP Monitoring of electro- Green "ON" LED nics power supply Sensor Selection Data At signal "1" 24 V DC 13 to 30 V -30 to 5 V Typically 5 mA at 24 V Rated supply voltage for electronics (4L+, 5L+) 24 V DC Input delay Reverse polarity With "0" after "1" With "1" after "0" 2.0 to 4.5 ms Yes Input characteristic To IEC 1131-2 Type 1 Connection of 2-wire BEROs Possible protection Power failure with- At least 20 ms stand time Rated load voltage (1L+, 2L+ and 3L+) 24 V DC Maximum number of in16 puts driven simultaneously 2.0 to 4.5 ms Permissible closed-cir- Max. 1.5 mA cuit current Galvanic isolation Between channels No Between channels and Yes PROFIBUS-DP Insulation tested with 500 V DC Power input From supply voltage Max. 70 mA L4+/L5+ From load voltage L1+ Max. 50 mA per load and L2+/L3+ (without load) Power loss of module group Typically 2.2 W ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 8-5 ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data 8.2 Electronics Block L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A - 6ES7 132-1BH00-0XB0 Characteristics The L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A electronics block has the following characteristics: 16 outputs in two groups, each of eight outputs Output current of 0.5 A per output Rated load voltage of 24 V DC Suitable for solenoids, DC contactors, and indicator lights View The following figure shows a view of the electronics block. PROFIBUS-DP BF ET200L ON DO 16xDC24V/0.5A A B 1 9 LOAD VOLTAGE A 1L+ 1M 1 .... 17.... 8 24 B 2L+ 2M 9 .... 25.... 16 32 2 10 POWER SUPPLY 3 11 4L+ 5 13 4M 6 14 7 15 4 12 x10 x1 X 2 3 4 132-1BH00-0XB0 8 16 Receptacle for labeling strip Figure 8-3 8-6 View of the L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 8-4 shows the block diagram. PROFIBUS-DP connection BF ON A Internal power supply Electronics B Galvanic isolation 10 1 PROFIBUS address EB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1L+ 2L+ 3L+ 4L+ 5L+ 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 24 VA 24 VB 24 Vinternal Figure 8-4 A TB B Block diagram of the L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block Technical Data The following table shows the technical data of the L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A electronics block. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions WHD (mm) 1456060.5 Weight Approx. 130 g Cable length Unshielded Shielded Max. 600 m Manufacturer ID 0016H Max. 1000 m Module-Specific Data Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93 .75; 187.5; 500 and 1 500 kBaud Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP SYNC compatibility Yes Number of outputs 16 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 8-7 ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated supply voltage for electronics (4L+, 5L+) 24 V DC S Reverse polarity Yes Actuator Selection Data Output voltage S At signal "1" protection S Power failure with- Output current At least 20 ms S At signal "1" stand time Rated load voltage (1L+, 2L+ and 3L+) 24 V DC Max. 4 A Up to 40 _C Max. 3 A Up to 60 _C Max. 2 A S All other installation positions S With "0" after "1" S With "1" after "0" Max. 50 s Load resistance range 41 W to 28 kW Lamp load Max. 5 W S For redundant control of load S Between channels No S Between channels and Yes S For performance im- Max. 200 s Possible (outputs in same group only) Not possible provement PROFIBUS-DP Driving a digital input 500 V DC Possible Switching frequency Power input S Resistive load S Inductive load to Max. 70 mA L4+/L5+ S from load voltage L1+ Max. 50 mA per load Power loss of module Max. 1 mA Parallel connection of two outputs Max. 2 A Galvanic isolation and L2+/L3+ (without load) 1 mA to 0.5 A Output delay (with resistive load) Up to 30 _C S from supply voltage 0.5 A Permissible range (residual current) S Horizontal installation Insulation tested with Rated value S At signal "0" Aggregate current of outputs (per byte) Up to 40 _C At least L1+ (- 3 V) or L2+/L3+ (3 V) Max. 100 Hz Max. 0.5 Hz IEC 947-5-1, DC13 group S Lamp load Max. 8 Hz Typically 5 W Limitation of voltage induced on circuit interruption Typically L1+ (- 55 V) or L2+/L3+ (- 55 V) Short-circuit protection Yes S Response threshold Typically 0.7 A Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Green LED per channel Interrupts None Diagnostic function Yes S Bus monitoring Red "BF" LED PROFIBUS-DP S Monitoring of electro- Green "ON" LED nics power supply 8-8 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data 8.3 Electronics Block L 32 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BL00-0XB0 Characteristics The L 32 DI DC 24 V electronics block has the following characteristics: 32 inputs in two groups, each of 16 outputs Rated input voltage of 24 V DC Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs) View The following figure shows a view of the electronics block. PROFIBUS-DP BF ET200L ON DI 32xDC24V A 1 9 SENSOR SUPPLY A 2 10 1L+ 1M 33.... 1 .... 48 16 B 17 25 18 26 POWER SUPPLY 3 11 4L+ 5 13 4M 6 14 7 15 22 30 8 16 24 32 19 27 4 12 B 2L+ 2M 49.... 17.... 64 32 20 28 21 29 23 31 x10 x1 X 2 3 4 131-1BL00-0XB0 Receptacle for labeling strip Figure 8-5 View of the L 32 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 8-9 ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 8-6 shows the block diagram. ON Internal power supply PROFIBUS-DP connection BF A B Electronics 24 VA 24 VB 24 Vinternal 1L+ 3L+ 2L+ Galvanic isolation 10 1 5L+ PROFIBUS address 4L+ 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M EB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 TB A Figure 8-6 8-10 B Block diagram of the L 32 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Technical Data The following table shows the technical data of the L 32 DI DC 24 V electronics block. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions WHD (mm) 1456060.5 Weight Approx. 150 g Module-Specific Data Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Green LED per channel Interrupts None Diagnostic function Yes Bus monitoring Red "BF" LED Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93 .75; 187.5; 500 and 1 500 kBaud Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP FREEZE compatibility Yes Number of inputs 32 Input voltage Unshielded Shielded Max. 600 m Max. 1000 m Rated value At signal "1" At signal "0" Manufacturer ID 0015H Input current Cable length Voltages, Currents, Potentials PROFIBUS-DP Monitoring of electro- Green "ON" LED nics power supply Sensor Selection Data At signal "1" 24 V DC 13 to 30 V -30 to 5 V Typically 5 mA at 24 V Rated supply voltage for electronics (4L+, 5L+) 24 V DC Input delay Reverse polarity With "0" after "1" With "1" after "0" 2.0 to 4.5 ms Yes Input characteristic To IEC 1131-2 Type 1 Connection of 2-wire BEROs Possible protection Power failure with- At least 20 ms stand time Rated load voltage (1L+, 2L+ and 3L+) 24 V DC Maximum number of in32 puts driven simultaneously 2.0 to 4.5 ms Permissible closed-cir- Max. 1.5 mA cuit current Galvanic isolation Between channels No Between channels and Yes PROFIBUS-DP Insulation tested with 500 V DC Power input from supply voltage Max. 70 mA L4+/L5+ from load voltage L1+ Max. 100 mA per load and L2+/L3+ (without load) Power loss of module group Typically 3.2 W ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 8-11 ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data 8.4 Electronics Block L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A - 6ES7 132-1BL00-0XB0 Characteristics The L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A electronics block has the following characteristics: 32 outputs in two groups, each of 16 outputs Output current of 0.5 A per output Rated load voltage of 24 V DC Suitable for solenoids, DC contactors, and indicator lights View The following figure shows a view of the electronics block. PROFIBUS-DP BF ET200L ON DO 32xDC24V/0.5A A 1 9 A 2 10 LOAD VOLTAGE 1L+ 1 .... 16 1M 33.... 48 B 17 25 18 26 POWER SUPPLY 3 11 4L+ 5 13 4M 6 14 7 15 22 30 23 31 8 16 24 32 19 27 4 12 B 2L+ 2M 17.... 49.... 32 64 20 28 21 29 x10 x1 X 2 3 4 132-1BL00-0XB0 Receptacle for labeling strip Figure 8-7 8-12 View of the L 32 DO Electronics Block DC 24 V/0.5 A ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 8-8 shows the block diagram. ON Internal power supply PROFIBUS-DP connection BF A B Electronics 24 VA 24 VB 24 Vinternal 1L+ 3L+ 2L+ Galvanic isolation 10 1 5L+ PROFIBUS address 4L+ 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M EB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 TB A Figure 8-8 B Block Diagram of the L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block Technical data The following table shows the technical data of the L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A electronics block. Dimensions and Weight Voltages, Currents, Potentials Dimensions WHD (mm) 1456060.5 Rated supply voltage for electronics (4L+, 5L+) 24 V DC Weight Approx. 150 g S Reverse polarity Yes Module-Specific Data Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93 .75; 187.5; 500 and 1 500 kBaud Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP SYNC compatibility Yes Number of outputs 32 Cable length protection S Power failure with- At least 20 ms stand time Rated load voltage (1L+, 2L+ and 3L+) 24 V DC Aggregate current of outputs (per byte) S Horizontal installation S Unshielded S Shielded Up to 30 _C Max. 4 A Max. 600 m Up to 40 _C Max. 3 A Max. 1000 m Up to 60 _C Max. 2 A Manufacturer ID 0011H S All other installation positions Up to 40 _C ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Max. 2 A 8-13 ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Galvanic isolation Actuator Selection Data Between channels No Between channels and Yes Output voltage At signal "1" PROFIBUS-DP Insulation tested with 500 V DC Output current At signal "1" Power input from supply voltage Max. 70 mA L4+/L5+ from load voltage L1+ Max. 100 mA per load and L2+/L3+ (without load) Power loss of module group Status display Green LED per channel Interrupts None Diagnostic function Yes Bus monitoring Red "BF" LED Monitoring of electro- Green "ON" LED 0.5 A Permissible range 1 mA to 0.5 A At signal "0" Max. 1 mA Output delay (with resistive load) Typically 7 W PROFIBUS-DP Rated value (residual current) Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics nics power supply At least L1+ (- 3 V) or L2+/L3+ (3 V) With "0" after "1" With "1" after "0" Max. 50 s Load resistance range 41 W to 28 kW Lamp load Max. 5 W Max. 200 s Parallel connection of two outputs For redundant control of load For performance im- Possible (outputs in same group only) Not possible provement Driving a digital input Possible Switching frequency Resistive load Inductive load to Max. 100 Hz Max. 0.5 Hz IEC 947-5-1, DC13 8-14 Lamp load Max. 8 Hz Limitation of voltage induced on circuit interruption Typically L1+ (- 55 V) or L2+/L3+ (55 V) Short-circuit protection Yes Response threshold Typically 0.7 A ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data 8.5 Electronics Block L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A - 6ES7 133-1BL00-0XB0 Characteristics The L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A electronics block has the following characteristics: 16 inputs in a single group of 16 inputs - Rated input voltage of 24 V DC - Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs) 16 outputs in a single group of 16 outputs - Output current of 0.5 A - Rated load voltage of 24 V DC - Suitable for solenoids, DC contactors, and indicator lights View The following figure shows a view of the electronics block. PROFIBUS-DP BF ET200L ON DI16/DO16xDC24V/0.5A A 1 9 A 2 10 POWER SUPPLY LOAD VOLTAGE 1L+ 1 .... 16 1M 33.... 48 4 12 5 13 4M 6 14 7 15 18 26 19 27 3 11 4L+ B 17 25 B 49.... 64 2L+ 17.... 32 2M SENSOR SUPPLY 20 28 21 29 22 30 23 31 24 32 8 16 x10 x1 X 2 3 4 133-1BL00-0XB0 Receptacle for labeling strip Figure 8-9 View of the L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 8-15 ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 8-10 shows the block diagram. ON Internal power supply PROFIBUS-DP connection BF A B Electronics 24 VA 24 VB 24 Vinternal 1L+ 3L+ 2L+ Galvanic isolation 10 1 5L+ PROFIBUS address 4L+ 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M EB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 TB 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 B A Figure 8-10 Block Diagram of the L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block Technical Data The following table shows the technical data of the L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A electronics block. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions WHD (mm) 1456060.5 Weight Approx. 130 g Cable length Module-Specific Data 9.6; 19.2; 93 .75; 187.5; 500 and 1 500 kBaud Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP FREEZE compatibility Yes SYNC compatibility Yes 16 Number of outputs 16 Max. 600 m Manufacturer ID 0017H Max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Baud rate Number of inputs Unshielded Shielded Rated supply voltage for electronics (4L+, 5L+) 24 V DC Reverse polarity Yes protection Power failure with- At least 20 ms stand time Rated load voltage (1L+, 2L+ and 3L+) 24 V DC Maximum number of in16 puts driven simultaneously 8-16 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Aggregate current of outputs (per byte) Input delay S Horizontal installation 2.0 to 4.5 ms Up to 30 _C Max. 4 A S With "0" after "1" S With "1" after "0" Up to 40 _C Max. 3 A Input characteristic To IEC 1131-2 Type 1 Up to 60 _C Max. 2 A Connection of 2-wire BEROs Possible S All other installation S Permissible closed-cir- Max. 1.5 mA positions Up to 40 _C Max. 2 A cuit current Actuator Selection Data Galvanic isolation S Between channels No S Between channels and Yes Output voltage S At signal "1" PROFIBUS-DP Insulation tested with 500 V DC Power input S from supply voltage Max. 70 mA L4+/L5+ S from load voltage L1+ Max. 50 mA per load and L2+/L3+ (without load) Power loss of module 2.0 to 4.5 ms group At least L1+ (- 3 V) or L2+/L3+ ( 3 V) Output current S At signal "1" Rated value 0.5 A Permissible range 1 mA to 0.5 A S At signal "0" Max. 1 mA (residual current) Output delay (with resistive load) Typically 5 W Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics S With "0" after "1" S With "1" after "0" Max. 50 s Max. 200 s Status display Green LED per channel Load resistance range 41 W to 28 kW Interrupts None Lamp load Max. 5 W Diagnostic function Yes Parallel connection of two outputs S Bus monitoring Red "BF" LED S For redundant control PROFIBUS-DP S Monitoring of electro- Green "ON" LED nics power supply Input voltage Not possible Driving a digital input Possible Switching frequency 24 V DC 13 to 30 V -30 to 5 V Input current S At signal "1" S For performance im- Possible (outputs in same group only) provement Sensor Selection Data S Rated value S At signal "1" S At signal "0" of load Typically 5 mA at 24 V S Resistive load S Inductive load to Max. 100 Hz Max. 0.5 Hz IEC 947-5-1, DC13 S Lamp load Max. 8 Hz Limitation of voltage induced on circuit interruption Typically L1+ (- 55 V) or L2+/L3+ (- 55 V) Short-circuit protection Yes S Response threshold Typically 0.7 A ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 8-17 ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data 8.6 Electronics Block L 16 DI AC 120 V - 6ES7 131-1EH00-0XB0 Characteristics The L 16 DI AC 120 V electronics block has the following characteristics: 16 inputs, fully isolated Rated input voltage of 120 VAC Suitable for switches and proximity switches compatible with IEC Type 2 currents View Figure 8-11 shows a view of the L 16 DI AC 120V electronics block. PROFIBUS-DP BF ET200L ON DI 16xAC120V 1 17 2 18 3 19 4 20 5 21 6 22 7 23 8 24 POWER SUPPLY L1 N 14 14 30 10 26 15 15 31 11 27 12 28 x10 x1 16 12 8 4 13 29 25 11 7 3 9 10 6 2 13 9 5 1 16 32 Receptacle for labeling strip Figure 8-11 View of the L 16 DI AC 120 V Electronics Block 8-18 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 8-12 shows the block diagram of the L 16 DI AC 120 V electronics block. PROFIBUS-DP connection BF A Electronics B 10 1 PROFIBUS address ON Internal power supply 1 2 3 4 17 18 19 20 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 9 10 11 12 25 26 27 28 13 14 15 16 29 30 31 32 EB L1 L1 N N TB 120 VAC Figure 8-12 Block Diagram of the L 16 DI AC 120 V Electronic Block ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 8-19 ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Technical Data The following table shows the technical data of the L 16 DI AC 120 V electronics block. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions WHD (mm) 1916185.5 Weight Approx. 341 g Status, Alarms, Diagnostics Module-Specific Data Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93 .75; 187.5; 500, 1 500, 3000, and 6000 kBaud Status display Green LED per channel Alarms None Diagnostic function Yes Bus monitoring Red "BF" LED PROFIBUS-DP Monitoring of Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP FREEZE compatibility Yes Number of inputs 16 Input voltage Unshielded Shielded Max. 600 m Max. 1000 m Rated value With signal 1 With signal 0 Manufacturer ID 002AH Input current I/O Cable length Voltages, Currents, Potentials Supply voltage L1 Green "ON" LED electronics power supply Sensor Selection Data With signal 1 With signal 0 120 VAC 74 to 132 VAC 0 to 20 VAC 9 to 27 mA 0 to 4 mA Rated value 120 VAC Input delay Permissible range 74 to 132 VAC 2 to 14 ms Frequency 47 to 63 Hz From 0 to 1 From 1 to 0 Power failure withstand time At least 20 ms Input characteristic To IEC 1131-2 Type 2 Connection of 2-wire BEROs Possible 16 Maximum number of inputs driven simultaneously 6 to 25 ms Optical isolation Between channels Between L1 and Yes Yes PROFIBUS-DP Between channels and Yes PROFIBUS-DP Insulation tested with 1500 VAC Power input from supply voltage L1 Max. 90 mA Power loss of module 8-20 Typically 5.4 W ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data 8.7 Electronics Block L 16 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A - 6ES7 132-1EH00-0XB0 Characteristics The L 16 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A electronics block has the following characteristics: 16 outputs, fully isolated Output current of 1.0 A Rated load voltage of 120 VAC Suitable for solenoids, AC contactors, and indicator lights View Figure 8-13 shows a view of the L 16 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A electronics block. PROFIBUS-DP BF ET200L ON DO 16xAC120V/1.0A 1 2 3 19 4 20 3 7 23 8 24 14 30 15 31 11 27 15 11 x10 16 32 12 28 12 POWER SUPPLY L1 N 14 10 7 8 13 10 26 22 6 13 29 25 9 6 18 9 21 5 2 4 5 17 1 16 x1 Receptacle for labeling strip Figure 8-13 View of the L 16 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A Electronics Block ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 8-21 ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 8-14 shows the block diagram of the L 16 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A electronics block. PROFIBUS-DP connection BF A Electronics B 10 1 Z C Z C Z C Z C PROFIBUS address ON Internal power supply 1 2 3 4 17 18 19 20 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 9 10 11 12 25 26 27 28 13 14 15 16 29 30 31 32 EB L1 L1 N N TB 120 VAC Figure 8-14 Block Diagram of the L 16 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A Electronics Block 8-22 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Technical data The following table shows the technical data of the L 16 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A electronics block. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions WHD (mm) 1916185.5 Weight Approx. 294 g Module-Specific Data Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93 .75; 187.5; 500, 1 500, 3000, and 6000 kBaud Status, Alarms, Diagnostics Status display Green LED per channel Alarms None Diagnostic function Yes S Bus monitoring Red "BF" LED PROFIBUS-DP S Monitoring of Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP SYNC compatibility Yes Number of outputs 16 Load voltage L S Unshielded S Shielded Max. 600 m Max. 1000 m S Rated voltage S Permissible range S Frequency Manufacturer ID 0028H Output voltage I/O Cable length Voltages, Currents, Potentials Supply voltage L1 S S S S Green "ON" LED electronics power supply Actuator Selection Data S With signal 1 120 VAC 74 to 132 VAC 47 to 63 Hz At least L (- 1.5V) Output current S With signal 1 Rated voltage 120 VAC Permissible range 74 to 132 VAC Rated value 1.0 A Pilot Duty Frequency 47 to 63 Hz Permissible range 0.1 to 1.0 A Power failure withstand time At least 20 ms S With signal 0 Max. 2.6 mA (residual current) Aggregate current of outputs (per point) Zero cross inhibit voltage Max. 60 V S Horizontal installation Output delay (with resistive load) Max. 20 ms up to 40_C Max. 1 A up to 60_C Max. 0.4 A S All other installation positions up to 40_C Max. 0.4 A Yes Yes PROFIBUS-DP S Between channels and Yes PROFIBUS-DP Insulation tested with 1500 VAC Power input S from supply voltage L Max. 170 mA Power loss of module S Up to 40_C S Up to 60_C Max. size 4 acc. to NEMA Lamp load Max. 50 W Max. size 3 acc. to NEMA Parallel connection of two outputs Optical isolation S Between channels S Between L1 and Size of motor starter Typically 18.9 W S For redundant control Possible of load S For performance Not possible improvement Driving a digital input Possible Switching frequency S Resistive load S Inductive load S Lamp load Max. 10 Hz Short-circuit protection No ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Max. 0.5 Hz Max. 1 Hz 8-23 ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data 8.8 Electronics Block L 16 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0 A - 6ES7 132-1JH00-0XB0 Characteristics The L 16 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0 A electronics block has the following characteristics: 16 relay outputs, fully isolated Output current of 2.0 A Rated load voltage of 24 V DC or 120 VAC Suitable for solenoids, contactors, and indicator lights Adjacent outputs of 24 V DC and 120 VAC are permitted View Figure 8-15 shows a view of the L 16 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0 A electronics block. PROFIBUS-DP BF ET200L ON RO 16xDC 24 V/AC 120V/2.0A 1 2 3 19 4 20 3 7 23 8 24 14 30 15 31 11 27 15 11 x10 16 32 12 28 12 POWER SUPPLY L1 N 14 10 7 8 13 10 26 22 6 13 29 25 9 6 18 9 21 5 2 4 5 17 1 16 x1 132-1JH00- 0XB0 Receptacle for labeling strip Figure 8-15 View of the L 16 RO DC 24 V/AC 120V/2.0 A Electronics Block 8-24 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 8-16 shows the block diagram of the L 16 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0 A electronics block. PROFIBUS-DP connection BF A Electronics B 10 1 PROFIBUS address ON Internal power supply 1 2 3 4 17 18 19 20 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 9 10 11 12 25 26 27 28 13 14 15 16 29 30 31 32 EB L1 L1 N N TB 120 VAC Figure 8-16 Block Diagram of the L 16 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0 A Electronics Block Technical data The following table shows the technical data of the L 16 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0 A electronics block. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions WHD (mm) 1916185.5 Weight Approx. 302 g Module-Specific Data Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93 .75; 187.5; 500, 1 500, 3000, and 6000 kBaud Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP SYNC compatibility Yes Number of outputs 16 I/O Cable length Unshielded Shielded Max. 600 m Manufacturer ID 0026H ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Max. 1000 m 8-25 ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Voltages, Currents, Potentials Actuator Selection Data Supply voltage L1 S S S S Load voltage L Rated voltage 120 VAC Permissible range 85 to 132 VAC Frequency 47 to 63 Hz Power failure withstand time At least 20 ms S S S S Max. 2 A up to 60_C Max. 1 A Permissible AC range 6 to 132 VAC AC Frequency 47 to 63 Hz At least L (- 1.0V) S With signal 1 S All other installation positions Rated value 2.0 A Pilot Duty Permissible range 10 mA to 2.0 A S With signal 0 Max. 1 A none (residual current) Optical isolation Yes Output delay (with resistive load) Yes Size of motor starter PROFIBUS-DP S Between channels and Yes PROFIBUS-DP 1500 VAC Max. 10 ms S Up to 40_C S Up to 60_C NEMA Size 5 Lamp load Max. 50 W NEMA Size 4 Parallel connection of two outputs Power input S For redundant control S from supply voltage L Max. 220 mA Power loss of module 4.5 to 30 V DC Output current up to 40_C Insulation tested with Permissible DC range S With signal 1 S Horizontal installation S Between channels S Between L1 and 24 V DC or 120 VAC Output voltage Aggregate current of outputs (per byte) up to 40_C Rated voltage Possible of load S For performance Typically 25.6 W Not possible improvement Status, Alarms, Diagnostics Driving a digital input Possible Status display Green LED per channel Switching frequency Alarms None Yes S Bus monitoring Red "BF" LED S Resistive load S Inductive load S Lamp load Max. 10 Hz Diagnostic function Short-circuit protection No PROFIBUS-DP S Monitoring of Max. 0.5 Hz Max. 1 Hz Green "ON" LED electronics power supply 8-26 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Table 8-2 Service Life of the Contacts Resistive Load Voltage Switching Cycles (Typical) Resistive load 0.5 A 30 V DC or 250 V AC 800.000 1.0 A 30 V DC or 250 V AC 550.000 2.0 A 30 V DC or 250 V AC Inductive load (L/R = 7 ms; power factor = 0.4) 300.000 0.5 A 30 V DC or 250 V AC 500.000 1.0 A 30 V DC or 250 V AC 300.000 2.0 A Mechanical 30 V DC or 250 V AC 100.000 20.000.000 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 8-27 ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data 8.9 Electronics Block L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A - 6ES7 133-1EH00-0XB0 Characteristics The L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A electronics block has the following characteristics: 8 inputs, fully isolated - Rated input voltage of 120 VAC - Suitable for switches and proximity switches, compatible with IEC Type 2 currents 8 outputs, fully isolated - Output current of 1.0 A - Rated load voltage of 120 VAC - Suitable for solenoids, AC contactors, and indicator lights View Figure 8-17 shows a view of the L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A electronics block. PROFIBUS-DP BF ET200L ON DI 8/DO 8xAC120V/1.0A 1 21 9 5 2 18 2 6 22 7 23 3 19 4 20 8 24 13 29 25 14 30 15 11 27 12 12 28 POWER SUPPLY L1 N 14 10 26 11 7 8 13 9 10 6 3 4 5 17 1 15 31 16 x10 x1 16 32 Receptacle for labeling strip Figure 8-17 View of the L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A Electronics Block 8-28 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 8-18 shows the block diagram of the L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A electronics block. PROFIBUS-DP connection BF A Electronics B 10 1 Z C PROFIBUS address Z C ON Internal power supply 1 2 3 4 17 18 19 20 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 9 10 11 12 25 26 27 28 13 14 15 16 29 30 31 32 EB L1 L1 N N TB 120 VAC Figure 8-18 Block Diagram of the L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A Electronics Block Technical data The following table shows the technical data of the L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A electronics block. Dimensions and Weight Number of outputs 8 Dimensions WxHxD (mm) 14561 85 .5 I/O Cable length Weight Unshielded Shielded Max. 600 m Manufacturer ID 0029H Approx. 318 g Module-Specific Data Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93 .75; 187.5; 500, 1500, 3000, and 6000kBaud Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP FREEZE compatibility Yes SYNC compatibility Yes Number of inputs 8 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Max. 1000 m 8-29 ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Voltages, Currents, Potentials Supply voltage L1 S S S S Rated voltage 120 VAC Permissible range 74 to 132 VAC Frequency 47 to 63 Hz Power failure withstand time S From 1 to 7 6 to 25 ms Input characteristic To IEC 1131-2 Type 2 Connection of 2-wire BEROs Possible Actuator Selection Data Load voltage L At least 20 ms S Rated voltage S Permissible range S Frequency Aggregate current of outputs (per byte) S Horizontal installation up to 40_ C Max. 1 A Output voltage up to 60_ C Max. 0.4 A S With signal 1 S All other installation 120 VAC 74 to 132 VAC 47 to 63 Hz At least L (- 1.5V) Output current positions S With signal 1 up to 40_ C Max. 0.4 A Optical isolation S Between channels S Between L1 and PROFIBUS-DP Zero cross inhibit voltage Max. 60 V Output delay (with resistive load) Max. 20 ms Size of motor starter S from supply voltage L Max. 130 mA Typically 12.2 W Status, Alarms, Diagnostics Status display Green LED per channel Alarms None Diagnostic function Yes S Bus monitoring Red ``BF" LED PROFIBUS-DP S Up to 40_C S Up to 60_C Max. size 4 acc. to NEMA Lamp load Max. 50 W Max. size 3 acc. to NEMA Parallel connection of two outputs S For redundant control Possible of load S For performance Not possible improvement Green ``ON" LED electronics power supply Driving a digital input Possible Switching frequency Sensor Selection Data Input voltage S Rated value S With signal 1 S With signal 0 Max. 2.6 mA 1500 VAC Power input S Monitoring of 0.1 to 1.0 A (residual current) Yes S Between channels and Yes Power loss of module 1.0 A Pilot Duty Permissible range S With signal 0 Yes PROFIBUS-DP Insulation tested with Rated value 120 VAC 74 to 132 VAC S Resistive load S Inductive load S Lamp load Max. 10 Hz Short-circuit protection No Max. 0.5 Hz Max. 1 Hz 0 to 20 VAC Input current S With signal 1 S With signal 0 9 to 27 mA 0 to 4 mA Input delay S From 0 to 1 8-30 2 to 14 ms ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data 8.10 Electronics Block L 8 DI AC 120 V/8 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0 A - 6ES7 133-1JH00-0XB0 Characteristics The L 8 DI AC 120 V/8 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0 A electronics block has the following characteristics: 8 inputs, fully isolated - Rated input voltage of 120 VAC - Suitable for switches and proximity switches, compatible with IEC Type 2 currents 8 relay outputs, fully isolated - Output current of 2.0 A - Rated load voltage of 24 V DC or 120 VAC - Suitable for solenoids, contactors, and indicator lights - Adjacent outputs of 24 V DC and 120 VAC are permitted View Figure 8-19 shows a view of the L 8 DI AC 120 V/8 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0 A electronics block. PROFIBUS-DP BF ET200L ON DI 8 AC 120 V/RO 8 DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0A 1 21 9 5 2 18 2 6 22 7 23 3 19 4 20 8 24 13 29 25 14 30 15 11 27 12 12 28 POWER SUPPLY L1 N 14 10 26 11 7 8 13 9 10 6 3 4 5 17 1 15 31 16 x10 x1 16 32 1331JH00 0XB0 Receptacle for labeling strip Figure 8-19 View of the L 8DI AC 120 V/8 RO DC 24 V/AC 2.0A Electronics Block ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 8-31 ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 8-20 shows the block diagram of the L 8 DI AC 120 V/8 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0 A electronics block. PROFIBUS-DP connection BF A Electronics B 10 1 PROFIBUS address ON EB Internal power supply 1 2 3 4 17 18 19 20 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 9 10 11 12 25 26 27 28 13 14 15 16 29 30 31 32 L1 L1 N N TB 120 VAC Figure 8-20 Block Diagram of the L 8 DI AC 120 V/8 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0A Electronics Block Technical data The following table shows the technical data of the L 8 DI AC 120 V/8 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0A electronics block. Dimensions and Weight Number of outputs 8 Dimensions WxHxD (mm) 14561 85.5 I/O Cable length Weight Unshielded Shielded Max. 600 m Manufacturer ID 0027H Approx. 322 g Module-Specific Data Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93 .75; 187.5; 500, 1500, 3000, and 6000kBaud Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP FREEZE compatibility Yes SYNC compatibility Yes Number of inputs 8 8-32 Max. 1000 m ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated voltage 120 VAC S From 0 to 1 S From 1 to 7 Permissible range 74 to 132 VAC Input characteristic To IEC 1131-2 Type 2 Frequency 47 to 63 Hz Possible Power failure withstand time At least 20 ms Connection of 2-wire BEROs Supply voltage L1 S S S S Input delay 2 to 14 ms 6 to 25 ms Actuator Selection Data Aggregate current of outputs (per point) Load voltage L S Horizontal installation S S S S up to 40_ C Max. 2 A up to 60_ C Max. 1 A S All other installation positions Rated voltage 24 V DC or 120 VAC Permissible DC range 4.5 to 30 V DC Permissible AC range 6 to 132 VAC AC Frequency 47 to 63 Hz Output voltage up to 40_ C Max. 1A Optical isolation S Between channels S Between L1 and Yes S Between channels and Yes PROFIBUS-DP 1500 VAC S from supply voltage L Max. 160 mA Typically 15.1 W Status, Alarms, Diagnostics Status display Green LED per channel Alarms None Diagnostic function Yes S Bus monitoring Red ``BF" LED PROFIBUS-DP S Monitoring of Green ``ON" LED 2.0 A Pilot Duty Permissible range 10 mA to 2.0 A S With signal 0 none Output delay (with resistive load) Max. 10 ms Size of motor starter S Up to 40_C S Up to 60_C NEMA Size 5 Lamp load Max. 50 W NEMA Size 4 Parallel connection of two outputs S For redundant control Possible S For performance Not possible improvement Sensor Selection Data Driving a digital input Possible Switching frequency Input voltage 120 VAC 74 to 132 VAC 0 to 20 VAC Input current S With signal 1 S With signal 0 Rated value of load electronics power supply S Rated value S With signal 1 S With signal 0 S With signal 1 (residual current) Power input Power loss of module At least L (- 1.0V) Output current Yes PROFIBUSDB Insulation tested with S With signal 1 S Resistive load S Inductive load S Lamp load Max. 10 Hz Short-circuit protection No Max. 0.5 Hz Max. 1 Hz 9 to 27 mA 0 to 4 mA ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 8-33 ET 200L Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Table 8-3 Service Life of the Contacts Resistive Load Voltage Switching Cycles (Typical) Resistive load 8-34 0.5 A 30 V DC or 250 V AC 800.000 1.0 A 30 V DC or 250 V AC 550.000 2.0 A 30 V DC or 250 V AC Inductive load (L/R = 7 ms; power factor = 0.4) 300.000 0.5 A 30 V DC or 250 V AC 500.000 1.0 A 30 V DC or 250 V AC 300.000 2.0 A Mechanical 30 V DC or 250 V AC 100.000 20.000.000 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 9 ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Introduction The components of the ET 200L-SC can be upgraded with a Smart Connect. This chapter contains the technical data of the ET 200L-SC electronics blocks and the IM-SC interface module. TBEB Assignment The following table assigns the interface module/electronics blocks to the terminal blocks. Table 9-1 Assignment of the Interface Module/ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks to the Terminal Blocks Interface Module/Electronics Block Terminal Block Order Number TB 16IM-SC (6ES7 120-0AH50-0AA0, 6ES7 120-0BH50-0AA0) IM-SC interface module 6ES7 138-1XL00-0XB0 TB 16L - ((6ES7 193-1CH00-0XA0, 6ES7 193-1CH10-0XA0) 193 1CH10 0XA0) ET 200L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BH11-0XB0 ET 200L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 132-1BH11-0XB0 TB 32L - (6ES7 ( 193-1CL00-0XA0, 6ES7 193-1CL10-0XA0) 193 1CL10 0XA0) ET 200L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BL11-0XB0 ET 200L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 133-1BL10-0XB0 Contents of the Chapter Section Topic Page 9.1 Interface Module IM-SC 6ES7 138-1XL00-0XB0 9-2 9.2 Electronics Block L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V - 6ES7 131-1BH11-0XB0 9-4 9.3 Electronics Block L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A - 6ES7 132-1BH11-0XB0 9-7 9.4 Electronics Block L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V - 6ES7 131-1BL11-0XB0 9-10 9.5 Electronics Block L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 133-1BL10-0XB0 9-13 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 9-1 ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks - Technical Data 9.1 Interface Module IM-SC Order Number 6ES7 138-1XL00-0XB0 Characteristics The IM-SC interface module has the following characteristics: It connects the TB 16IM-SC terminal block with the PROFIBUS-DP. It is swiveled onto the TB 16IM-SC terminal block. The PROFIBUS-DP can be connected and disconnected at the IM-SC interface module by means of the bus terminating switsch. In this way, a data line connected at A2 and B2 can be disconnected or looped through. When the PROFIBUS-DP screw-type terminal is removed, subsequent DP slaves are disconnected from the PROFIBUS-DP. When the connector for the power supply is removed, the IM-SC is switsched off. Subsequently connected slaves are not affected. View The following figure shows a view of the IM-SC interface module: IM-SC SF BF ON Busterminator ON OFF LEDs for diagnostics Switch for the terminating resistor SIMATIC ET200L-SC 4L+ 5L+ 4M 5M A1 B1 A2 B2 Figure 9-1 9-2 IM-SC Interface Module ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 9-2 shows the block diagram. PROFIBUS-DP connection ON BF Internal power supply SF A B Electronics Galvanic isolation PROFIBUS address 10 4L+ 5L+ 4M 5M 24 Vinternal Figure 9-2 1 Connection for the TB 16IM-SC terminal block Connection for the TB 16-SC terminal block Block Diagram of the IM-SC Interface Module Technical Data The following table shows the technical data of the IM-SC interface module: Dimensions and Weight Voltages, Currents, Potentials Dimensions BHT (mm) Rated supply voltage for electronics (4L+, 5L+) 24 V DC 5410055 Weight Approx. 130 g Reverse polarity Yes Module-Specific Data protection Power failure with- At least 20 ms Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93 .75; 187.5; 500 and 1 500 kBaud Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP FREEZE compatibility Yes Maximum number of inputs/outputs driven simultaneously SYNC compatibility Yes Galvanic isolation Number of inputs Max. 32 Between channels and Yes Number of outputs Max. 32 Manufacturer ID 802BH stand time 32 PROFIBUS-DP Insulation tested with 500 V DC Power loss of module Typically 1.4 W Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Interrupts None Diagnostic function Yes Group error Bus monitoring Red "SF" LED Red "BF" LED PROFIBUS-DP Monitoring of elec- Green "ON" LED tronics power supply ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 9-3 ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks - Technical Data 9.2 Electronics Block L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V - 6ES7 131-1BH11-0XB0 Characteristics The upgraded L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V electronics block has the following characteristics: 16 inputs in two groups, each of 8 inputs Rated input voltage of 24 VDC Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs) Connection of a TB 16SC View The following figure shows a view of the electronics block. PROFIBUS-DP SF ET200L-SC BF DI 16xDC24V A 1 9 SENSOR SUPPLY A 1L+ 1M 17... 1 .... 24 8 B 2L+ 2M 25... 9... 32 16 2 10 POWER SUPPLY 3 11 4L+ 5 13 4M 6 14 7 15 ON 4 12 x1 SC X 2 3 4 131-1BH11-0XB0 8 16 Receptacle for labeling strip Figure 9-3 9-4 x10 Smart Connect connection View of the L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 9-4 shows the block diagram. PROFIBUS-DP connection ON BF Internal power supply SF A B Electronics Galvanic isolation PROFIBUS address 10 1 TB 16SC connection EB 1L+ 2L+ 3L+ 4L+ 5L+ 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 24 VA 24 VB 24 Vinternal Figure 9-4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 A TB B Block Diagram of the L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 9-5 ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Technical Data The following table shows the technical data of the L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V electronics block. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions WHD (mm) 1456060.5 Weight Approx. 130 g Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Module-Specific Data Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93 .75; 187.5; 500 and 1 500 kBaud Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP FREEZE compatibility Yes SYNC compatibility for SC outputs Yes Number of inputs 16 Interrupts None Diagnostic function Yes Bus monitoring Red "BF" LED PROFIBUS-DP Monitoring of elec- Green "ON" LED Group error Red "GE" LED Sensor Selection Data Input voltage Unshielded Shielded Max. 600 m Manufacturer ID 8027 H Rated value At signal "1" At signal "0" Max. 1000 m Rated supply voltage for electronics (4L+, 5L+) 24 VDC Reverse polarity Yes 24 VDC 13 to 30 V -30 to 5 V Input current At signal "1" Voltages, Currents, Potentials Typically 5 mA at 24 V Input delay With "0" after "1" With "1" after "0" 2.0 to 4.5 ms 2.0 to 4.5 ms Input characteristic To IEC 1131-2 Type 1 At least 20 ms Connection of 2-wire BEROs Possible 24 VDC Permissible closed-cir- Max. 1.5 mA protection stand time Rated load voltage (1L+, 2L+ and 3L+) Green LED per channel tronics power supply Cable length Power failure with- Status display cuit current Maximum number of in16 puts driven simultaneously Galvanic isolation Between channels No Between channels and Yes PROFIBUS-DP Insulation tested with 500 VDC Power input from supply voltage Max. 180 mA L4+/L5+ from load voltage L1+ Max. 50 mA per load and L2+/L3+ (without load) Power loss of module 9-6 group Typically 4.0 W ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks - Technical Data 9.3 Electronics Block L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A - 6ES7 132-1BH11-0XB0 Characteristics The upgraded L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A electronics block has the following characteristics: 16 outputs in two groups, each of eight outputs Output current of 0.5 A Rated load voltage of 24 VDC Suitable for solenoids, DC contactors, and indicator lights TB 16SC connection View The following figure shows a view of the electronics block. PROFIBUS-DP SF ET200L-SC BF DO 16xDC24V/0.5A A B 1 9 A 1L+ 1M 1 .... 17.... 8 24 B 2L+ 2M 9 .... 25.... 16 32 2 10 POWER SUPPLY 3 11 4L+ 5 13 4M 6 14 7 15 ON LOAD VOLTAGE 4 12 x1 SC X 2 3 4 132-1BH11-0XB0 8 16 Receptacle for labeling strip Figure 9-5 x10 Smart Connect connection View of the L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 9-7 ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 9-6 shows the block diagram. PROFIBUS-DP connection BF ON SF A B Internal power supply Electronics Galvanic isolation 10 1 PROFIBUS address TB 16SC connection EB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1L+ 2L+ 3L+ 4L+ 5L+ 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 24 VA 24 VB 24 Vinternal Figure 9-6 A TB B Block diagram of the L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block Technical Data The following table shows the technical data of the L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A electronics block. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions WHD (mm) 1456060.5 Weight Approx. 130 g Cable length Unshielded Shielded Max. 600 m Manufacturer ID 8028H Max. 1000 m Module-Specific Data Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93 .75; 187.5; 500 and 1 500 kBaud Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP SYNC compatibility Yes FREEZE compatibility for Yes SC inputs Number of outputs 9-8 16 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated supply voltage for electronics (4L+, 5L+) 24 VDC S Reverse polarity Yes 24 VDC Aggregate current of outputs (per byte) S Horizontal installation Max. 4 A Up to 40 _C Max. 3 A Up to 60 _C Max. 2 A S All other installation positions Max. 2 A Galvanic isolation S Between channels No S Between channels and Yes PROFIBUS-DP Insulation tested with Max. 180 mA L4+/L5+ S from load voltage L1+ Max. 50 mA per load and L2+/L3+ (without load) Power loss of module Rated value 0.5 A Permissible range 1 mA to 0.5 A S At signal "0" Max. 1 mA (residual current) S With "0" after "1" S With "1" after "0" Max. 50 s Load resistance range 41 W to 28 kW Lamp load Max. 5 W Max. 200 s Parallel connection of two outputs S For redundant control of load S For performance im- Possible (outputs in same group only) Not possible provement Driving a digital input 500 VDC Power input S from supply voltage S At signal "1" Output delay (with resistive load) Up to 30 _C Up to 40 _C At least L1+ (- 3 V) or L2+/L3+ (3 V) Output current At least 20 ms stand time Rated load voltage (1L+, 2L+ and 3L+) Output voltage S At signal "1" protection S Power failure with- Actuator Selection Data Possible Switching frequency S Resistive load S Inductive load to Max. 100 Hz Max. 0.5 Hz IEC 947-5-1, DC13 group S Lamp load Max. 8 Hz Typically 4.0 W Limitation of voltage induced on circuit interruption Typically L1+ (- 55 V) or L2+/L3+ (- 55 V) Short-circuit protection Yes S Response threshold Typically 0.7 A Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Green LED per channel Interrupts None Diagnostic function Yes S Bus monitoring Red "BF" LED PROFIBUS-DP S Monitoring of electro- Green "ON" LED nics power supply S Group error Red "SF" LED ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 9-9 ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks - Technical Data 9.4 Electronics Block L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V - 6ES7 131-1BL11-0XB0 Characteristics The upgraded L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V electronics block has the following characteristics: 32 inputs in two groups, each of 16 outputs Rated input voltage of 24 VDC Suitable for switches, and proximity switches (BEROs) TB 16SC connection View The following figure shows a view of the electronics block. PROFIBUS-DP SF ET200L-SC BF DI 32xDC24V A 1 9 ON SENSOR SUPPLY A 2 10 1L+ 1M 33... 1 .... 48 16 B 17 25 18 26 POWER SUPPLY 3 11 4L+ 5 13 4M 6 14 7 15 22 30 8 16 24 32 19 27 4 12 B 2L+ 2M 49... 17... 64 32 20 28 21 29 23 31 Receptacle for labeling strip Figure 9-7 9-10 x10 x1 SC X 2 3 4 131-1BL11-0XB0 Smart Connect connection View of the L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 9-8 shows the block diagram. PROFIBUS-DP connection ON Internal power supply BF SF A B Electronics Galvanic isolation 24 VA 24 VB 24 Vinternal 1L+ 3L+ 2L+ 10 1 5L+ PROFIBUS address 4L+ TB 16SC connection 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M EB TB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 A B Figure 9-8 Block diagram of the L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 9-11 ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Technical Data The following table shows the technical data of the L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V electronics block. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions WHD (mm) 1456060.5 Weight Approx. 150 g Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Module-Specific Data Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93 .75; 187.5; 500 and 1 500 kBaud Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP FREEZE compatibility Yes SYNC compatibility for SC outputs Yes Number of inputs 32 Interrupts None Diagnostic function Yes Bus monitoring Red "BF" LED PROFIBUS-DP Monitoring of elec- Green "ON" LED Group error Red "GE" LED Sensor Selection Data Input voltage Unshielded Shielded Max. 600 m Manufacturer ID 8029H Rated value At signal "1" At signal "0" Max. 1000 m Rated supply voltage for electronics (4L+, 5L+) 24 VDC Reverse polarity Yes 24 VDC 13 to 30 V -30 to 5 V Input current At signal "1" Voltages, Currents, Potentials Typically 5 mA at 24 V Input delay With "0" after "1" With "1" after "0" 2.0 to 4.5 ms Input characteristic To IEC 1131-2 Type 1 At least 20 ms Connection of 2-wire BEROs Possible 24 VDC Permissible closed-cir- Max. 1.5 mA protection stand time Rated load voltage (1L+, 2L+ and 3L+) Green LED per channel tronics power supply Cable length Power failure with- Status display 2.0 to 4.5 ms cuit current Maximum number of in32 puts driven simultaneously Galvanic isolation Between channels No Between channels and Yes PROFIBUS-DP Insulation tested with 500 VDC Power input from supply voltage Max. 180 mA L4+/L5+ from load voltage L1+ Max. 100 mA per load and L2+/L3+ (without load) Power loss of module 9-12 group Typically 4.8 W ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks - Technical Data 9.5 Electronics Block L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A - 6ES7 133-1BL10-0XB0 Characteristics The L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A electronics block has the following characteristics: 16 inputs in a single group of 16 inputs - Rated input voltage of DC 24 V - Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs) 16 outputs in a single group of 16 outputs - Output current of 0.5 A - Rated load voltage of DC 24 V - Suitable for solenoids, DC contactors, and indicator lights TB 16SC connection View The following figure shows a view of the electronics block. PROFIBUS-DP SF ET200L-SC BF DI16/DO16xDC24V/0.5A A 1 9 A 2 10 POWER SUPPLY 3 11 4L+ 5 13 4M 6 14 7 15 LOAD VOLTAGE 1L+ 1 .... 16 33.... 48 1M ON B 17 25 18 26 19 27 4 12 B 2L+ 49.... 64 2M 17.... 32 SENSOR SUPPLY 20 28 22 30 23 31 x1 SC X 2 3 4 133-1BL10-0XB0 24 32 8 16 Receptacle for labeling strip Figure 9-9 x10 21 29 Smart Connect connection View of the L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 9-13 ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 8-10 shows the block diagram. PROFIBUS-DP connection ON Internal power supply BF A B SF Electronics Galvanic isolation 24 VA 24 VB 24 Vinternal 10 1 1L+ 3L+ 2L+ 5L+ PROFIBUS address TB 16SC connection 4L+ 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M EB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 TB 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 B A Figure 9-10 Block Diagram of the L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block Technical Data The following data shows the technical data of the L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A electronics block. Dimensions and Weight Number of outputs 16 Dimensions WHD (mm) 1456060.5 Cable length Approx. 130 g Unshielded Shielded Max. 600 m Weight Manufacturer ID 802CH Module-Specific Data Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93 .75; 187.5; 500 and 1 500 kBaud Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP Max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated supply voltage for electronics (4L+, 5L+) DC 24 V FREEZE compatibility for Yes SC outputs Reverse polarity Yes SYNC compatibility for SC outputs Yes Power failure with- Number of inputs 16 9-14 protection At least 20 ms stand time ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks - Technical Data Rated load voltage (1L+, 2L+ and 3L+) DC 24 V Input delay 16 S At "0" after "1" S At "1" after "0" 2,0 to 4.5 ms Number of inputs driven simultaneously Input Characteristic to IEC 1131-2 Type 1 Connection of 2-wire BEROs Possible Aggregate current of outputs (per byte) S Horizontal installation Up to 30 _C Max. 4 A Up to 40 _C Max. 3 A Up to 60 _C Max. 2 A S All other installation S Permissible closed-cir- Max. 1.5 mA cuit current Actuator Selection Data Output voltage positions Up to 40 _C S At signal "1" Max. 2 A Galvanic isolation Output current S Between channels No S Between channels and Yes S At signal "1" PROFIBUS-DP Isolation tested with 2.0 to 4.5 ms DC 500 V At least L1+ (- 3 V) or L2+/L3+ (- 3 V) Rated value 0.5 A Permissible range 1 mA to 0.5 A S At signal "0" (residual Max. 1 mA current) Power input S From supply voltage Max. 180 mA L4+/L5+ S From load voltage L1+ Max. 50 mA per load and L2+/L3+ (without load) Power loss of module group Typically 5 W Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Green LED per channel Interrupts None Diagnostic function Yes S Bus monitoring Red LED "BF" PROFIBUS-DP S Monitoring of elec- Green LED "ON" tronics power supply S Group error Red LED "SF" S At "0" after "1" S At "1" after "0" Max. 50 s Load resistance range 41 W to 28 kW Lamp load Max. 5 W Max. 200 s Parallel connection of two outputs S For redundant control of load S For performance im- Possible (outputs in same group only) Not possible provement Driving a digital input Possible Switching frequency S Resistive load S Inductive load to Max. 100 Hz Max. 0.5 Hz IEC 947-5-1, DC13 S Lamp load Max. 8 Hz DC 24 V Limitation of voltage induced on circuit interruption Typically L1+ (- 55 V) or L2+/L3+ (- 55 V) 13 to 30 V Short-circuit protection -30 to 5 V S Response threshold Actuator Selection Data Input voltage S Rated value S At signal "1" S At signal "0" Output delay (with resistive load) Typically 0.7 A Input current S At signal "1" Typically 5 mA at 24 V ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 9-15 ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks - Technical Data 9-16 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 10 SC Digital Electronic Modules - Technical Data Contents of Chapter Order Numbers Section Topic Page 10.1 Digital Electronic Module 2DIDC24V 10-2 10.2 Digital Electronic Module 2DODC24V0.5A 10-5 10.3 Digital Electronic Module 2DODC24V2A 10-8 10.4 Digital Electronic Module 1DIAC120/230V 10-11 10.5 Digital Electronic Module 1DOAC120/230V1A 10-14 10.6 Digital Electronic Module 1DORel.AC230V 10-17 Product Name Order Number Digital Electronic Module 2DIDC24V 6ES7 121-1BB00-0AA0 Digital Electronic Module 2DODC24V0.5A 6ES7 122-1BB00-0AA0 Digital Electronic Module 2DODC24V2A 6ES7 122-1BB10-0AA0 Digital Electronic Module 1DIAC120/230V 6ES7 121-1FA00-0AA0 Digital Electronic Module 1DOAC120/230V1A 6ES7 122-1FA00-0AA0 Digital Electronic Module 1DORel.AC230V 6ES7 122-1HA01-0AA0 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 10-1 SC Digital Electronic Modules - Technical Data 10.1 Digital Electronic Module 2DIDC24V Order Number 6ES7 121-1BB00-0AA0 Front Elevation/ Side Elevation The figure below shows you the front elevation and the side elevation of the input module. The circuit schematic is shown on the front of the input module. The two LEDs are located below the circuit schematic. In the operating state, the circuit schematic is covered by the labeling strip. The LEDs are visible through the transparent part of the labeling strip. Front elevation Side elevation (rotated) LED Channel 1 LED Channel 2 The used terminals are shaded gray. A1 A2 A3 A4 Slot 1 is shown Figure 10-1 Front and Side Elevations of the 2DIDC24V Digital Electronic Module Note The status LEDs of the input module indicate the system status. 10-2 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Digital Electronic Modules - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 10-2 shows the block diagram of the 2DIDC24V digital electronic module. I 1 Channel 0 L+ 3 I SC bus 2 Channel 1 L+ 4 1L+, 2L+ 1M, 2M L+, M- supply via terminal block Figure 10-2 Block Diagram of the 2DIDC24V Digital Electronic Module ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 10-3 SC Digital Electronic Modules - Technical Data Technical Data The technical data of the 2DIDC24V digital electronic module is listed below. Dimensions and Weight Power input Dimensions WHD (mm) 106451 From load voltage L+ - Weight approx. 15 g Power loss of the module typ. 0.4 W Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Module-Specifc Data Number of inputs 2 Status indication green LED per channel Interrupts none Diagnostic functions none Cable length Unshieded Shielded Number of times the electronic module can be plugged into a TB 16 SC max. 600 m max. 1000 m Sensor Selection Data max. 20 Input voltage Rated value At signal "1" At signal "0" Voltages, Current, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ DC 24 V Number of simultaneously controllable imputs 2 At signal "1" no no Permissible potential difference Between different circuits -3 ... 5 V typ. 7 mA Input delay Between channels and SC Between different channels 13 ... 30 V Input current Galvanic isolation bus DC 24 V DC 75 V/AC 60 V At "0" to "1" At "1" to "0" Input characteristic to 1.2...4.8 ms Connection of 2-wire BEROs possible Permissible closed-circuit max 1.5 mA 1.2...4.8 ms IEC 1131, Type 1 current 10-4 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Digital Electronic Modules - Technical Data 10.2 Digital Electronic Module 2DODC24V0.5A Order Number 6ES7 122-1BB00-0AA0 Front Elevation/ Side Elevation The figure below shows you the front elevation and the side elevation of the output module. The circuit schematic is shown on the front of the output module. The two LEDs are located below the circuit schematic. In the operating state, the circuit schematic is covered by the labeling strip. The LEDs are visible through the transparent part of the labeling strip. Front elevation Side elevation (rotated) LED Channel 1 LED Channel 2 The used terminals are shaded gray. A1 A2 A3 A4 Slot 1 is shown. Figure 10-3 Front and Side Elevations of the 2DODC24V0.5A Digital Electronic Module Note The status LEDs of the output module indicate the system status. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 10-5 SC Digital Electronic Modules - Technical Data Special Features When L+ is connected by means of a mechanical contact, a disturbing pulse appears at the output with an exponentially increasing width from 8 s at rated current to 20 s at 10 mA load current. (The time specifications are based on a threshold of 10 V.) Block Diagram Figure 10-4 shows the block diagram of the 2DODC24V0.5A digital electronic module. 1 Q Channel 0 3 M SC bus 2 Q Channel 1 4 M 1L+, 2L+ 1M, 2M L+, M- supply via terminal block Figure 10-4 Block Diagram of the 2DODC24V0.5A Digital Electronic Module 10-6 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Digital Electronic Modules - Technical Data Technical Data The technical data of the 2DODC24V0.5A digital electronic module is listed below. Dimensions and Weight Actuator Selection Data Dimensions WHD (mm) 106451 Output voltage Weight approx. 15 g At signal "1" Module-Specific Data Number of outputs 2 Output current At signal "1" Rated value Permissible range Cable length Unshielded Shielded max. 600 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ DC 24 V Total current of the outputs (per module) to 40C to 60C 1A 0.8 A Galvanic isolation no channels From load voltage L+ (without load) Power loss of the module 3 mA typ. 0.4 W Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status indication max. 200 ms Load resistance range 48 W to 4.8 kW Lamp load max. 2.5 W max. 1.3 ms Parallel switching of 2 outputs For redundant control of a load Controlling a digital input not possible possible Switching frequency cordance with IEC 947-5-1, DC 13 DC 75 V/AC 60 V Power input - At "0" to "1" At "1" to "0" With resistive load max. 100 Hz With inductive load in ac- max.2 Hz at 0.3 A Permissible potential difference Between different circuits Output delay (with resistive load) ment no Between the different rent) For performance enhance- possible Between channels and SC bus 0.5 A 5 mA ... 0.6 A At signal "0" (residual cur- max. 0.3 mA max. 1000 m Number of times the electronic module can be plugged into a max. 20 TB 16 SC min. L+ (-0.5 V) green LED per channel Interrupts none Diagnostic functions none max.0.5 Hz at 0.5 A With lamp load max. 1 Hz Inductive switch-off voltage limited (internally) to typ. L+ (48 V) Short-circuit protection of the output yes, electronically 1 Response threshold typ. 0.7...1.8 A 1 After a short-circuit, switch-on under full load cannot be guaranteed. Countermeasures are: Change the signal at the output, or Interrupt the load voltage of the module, or Temporarily disconnect the load from the output. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 10-7 SC Digital Electronic Modules - Technical Data 10.3 Digital Electronic Module 2DODC24V2A Order Number 6ES7 122-1BB10-0AA0 Front Elevation/ Side Elevation The following figure shows you the front elevation and the side elevation of the output module. The circuit schematic is shown on the front of the input module. The two LEDs are located below the circuit schematic. In the operating state, the circuit schematic is covered by the labeling strip. The LEDs are visible through the transparent part of the labeling strip. Front elevation Side elevation (rotated) LED Channel 1 LED Channel 2 The used terminals are shaded gray. A1 A2 A3 A4 Slot 1 is shown. Figure 10-5 Front and Side Elevations of the 2DODC24V2A Digital Electronic Module Note The status LEDs of the output module indicate the system status. 10-8 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Digital Electronic Modules - Technical Data Special Features When L+ is connected by means of a mechanical contact, a disturbing pulse appears at the output with an exponentially increasing width from 5 s at rated current to 100 s at 10 mA load current. (The time specifications are based on a threshold of 10 V.) Block Diagram Figure 10-6 shows the block diagram of the 2DODC24V2A digital electronic module. 1 Q Channel 0 3 M SC bus 2 Q Channel 1 4 M 1L+, 2L+ 1M, 2M L+, M- supply via terminal block Figure 10-6 Block Diagram of the 2DODC24V2A Digital Electronic Module ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 10-9 SC Digital Electronic Modules - Technical Data Technical Data The technical data of the 2DODC24V2A digital electronic module is listed below. Dimensions and Weight Actuator Selection Data Dimensions WHD (mm) 106451 Output voltage Weight approx. 15 g At signal "1" Output current Module-Specific Data Number of outputs At signal "1" 2 Cable length Unshielded Shielded max. 600 m max. 1000 m DC 24 V max. 3 A max. 2 A 5 mA to 1.8 A max. 200 ms Lamp load max. 10 W Load resistance range 12 W to 4.8 kW max. 1.3 ms For redundant control of a not possible no load Controlling a digital input Permissible potential difference DC 75 V/AC 60 V Power input From load voltage L+ typ. 0.9 W green LED per channel Interrupts none Diagnostics function none possible Switching frequency With resistive load max. 100 Hz With inductive load in ac- max. 0.2 Hz at 1 A cordance with IEC 947-5-1, DC 13 6 mA Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status indication For 40 to 60C At "0" to "1" At "1" to "0" channels Power loss of the module - ment no (without load) 5 mA to 2.4 A For performance enhance- possible Between channels and SC Between different circuits For 0 to 40C Parallel switching of 2 outputs Galvanic isolation Between the different - Output delay (with resistive load) Total current of the outputs (per module) bus 2A rent) Voltages, Current, Potentials to 40C to 60C Rated value Permissible range At signal "0" (residual cur- max. 0.6 mA Number of times the electronic module can be plugged into a max. 20 TB 16 SC Rated load voltage L+ min. L+ (-0.5 V) max. 0.1 Hz at 2 A With lamp load max. 1 Hz Inductive switch-off voltage limited (internally) to typ. L+ (48 V) Short-circuit protection of the output Yes, electronically Response threshold typ. 2.8...7.2 A 1 After a short-circuit, switch-on under full load cannot be guaranteed. Countermeasures are: Change the signal at the output, or Interrupt the load voltage of the module, or Temporarily disconnect the load from the output. 10-10 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Digital Electronic Modules - Technical Data 10.4 Digital Electronic Module 1DIAC120/230V Order Number 6ES7 121-1FA00-0AA0 Front Elevation/ Side Elevation The figure below shows you the front elevation and the side elevation of the digital electronic module. The circuit schematic is shown on the front of the digital electronic module. The LED is located below the circuit schematic. In the operating state, the circuit schematic is covered by the labeling strip. The LED is visible through the transparent part of the labeling strip. Front elevation Side elevation LED Channel 1 The used terminals are shaded gray. A1 A2 A3 A4 Slot 1 is shown. Figure 10-7 Front and Side Elevations of the 1DIAC120/230V Digital Electronic Module Note The status LED of the input module indicates the system status. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 10-11 SC Digital Electronic Modules - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 10-8 shows the block diagram of the 1DIAC120/230V digital electronic module. 2 I L SC bus N 4 Figure 10-8 Block diagram of the 1DIAC120/230V Digital Electronic Module Special Feature 10-12 The 1DIAC120/230V electronic module does not require a supply voltage (L+, M). ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Digital Electronic Modules - Technical Data Technical Data The technical data of the 1DIAC120/230V electronic module is listed below. Dimensions and Weight Sensor Selection Data Dimensions WHD (mm) 106451 Input voltage Weight approx. 15 g Rated value At signal "1" AC 120/230 V 1 At signal "0" AC 0 ... 40 V DC 0 ... 40 V max. 600 m Frequency range 47...63 Hz max. 1000 m Input current Module Specific Data Number of Inputs Cable Length Unshielded Shielded Number of times the electronic module can be plugged into a TB 16 SC max. 20 Voltages, Currents, Potentials Galvanic isolation Between channels and SC yes bus Permissible potential difference Between ground and input AC 240 V Isolation tested with DC 2500 V Power loss of the module typ. 0.6 W Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status indication green LED Interrupts none Diagnostic functions none At signal "1" At signal "0" AC 74 ... 264 V DC 75 ... 264 V typ. 3.,7 mA* typ. 2.2 mA* Input delay At "0" to "1" At "1" to "0" max. 30 ms Input characteristic in accordance with IEC 1131, Type 1* Connection of 2-wire BEROS possible Permissible closed-circuit max. 1.5 mA max. 30 ms current * With parallel switching of 2 electronic modules, IEC 1131-2/Type 2 is complied with at AC 120 V. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 10-13 SC Digital Electronic Modules - Technical Data 10.5 Digital Electronic Module 1DOAC120/230V1A Order Number 6ES7 122-1FA00-0AA0 Front Elevation/ Side Elevation The figure below shows you the front elevation and the side elevation of the 1DOAC120/230V1A Front elevation Side elevation L LED Channel 1 The used terminals are shaded gray. A1 A2 A3 A4 Slot 1 is shown. Figure 10-9 Front and Side Elevations of the 1DOAC120/230V1A Digital Electronic Module Special Feature 10-14 The 1DOAC120/230V1A electronic module does not require a supply voltage (L+, M). ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Digital Electronic Modules - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 10-10 shows the block diagram of the 1DOAC120/230V1A digital electronic module. 4 L SC bus N 2 Q Figure 10-10 Block Diagram of the 1DOAC120/230V1A Digital Electronic Module ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 10-15 SC Digital Electronic Modules - Technical Data Technical Data The technical data of the 1DOAC120/230V1A electronic module is listed below. Dimensions and Weight Size of the motor starter Dimensions WHD (mm) 106451 Lamp load Weight approx. 15 g At AC 230 V At AC 120 V Module-Specific Data Number of outputs 1 Parallel switching of 2 outputs max. 600 m For performance enhance- load max. 1000 m Controlling a digital input AC 120/230 V Permissible frequency range 47...63 Hz yes dance with IEC 947-5-1, AC 15 Permissible potential difference Between ground and the outAC 240 V Isolation tested with DC 2500 V Power loss of the module typ. 0.7 W not possible only possible with additional load With resistive load max. 50 Hz With inductive load in accor- bus put possible Switching frequency Galvanic isolation Between channels and SC max. 50 W ment Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L1 max. 100 W For redundant control of a Cable length Unshielded Shielded max. size 8 max. 10 Hz With lamp load max. 1 Hz Short-circuit protection of the output no Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status indication green LED Interrupts none Diagnostic functions none Actuator Selection Data Output voltage At signal "1" min. L (1 V) Output current At signal "1" - Rated value 1A - Permissible range for 00 C to 400 C 40 mA ... 1.1 A - Permissible range for 400 C to 600 C 40 mA ... 0.6 A - Permissible surge current max. 10 A (for 2 half-waves) At signal "0"(residual cur- max. 3 mA rent) Output delay (with resistive load) At "0" to "1" At "1" to "0" max. 20 ms Zero crossing with zero crossing switch 10-16 max. 20 ms ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Digital Electronic Modules - Technical Data 10.6 Digital Electronic Module 1DORel.AC230V, DC 24 V to 120 V Order Number 6ES7 122-1HA00-0AA0 Front Elevation/ Side Elevation The figure below shows you the front elevation and the side elevation of the 1DORel.AC230V digital electronic module. Front elevation Side elevation 6ES7122-1HA01-0AA0 LED Channel 1 The used terminals are shaded gray. A1 A2 A3 A4 Slot 1 is shown. Figure 10-11 Front and Side Elevations of the 1DORel.AC230V Digital Electronic Module ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 10-17 SC Digital Electronic Modules - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 10-12 shows you the block diagram of the 1DORel.AC230V digital electronic module. 4 L+ N 2 SC bus Q 1M, 2M 1L+, 2L+ Figure 10-12 Block Diagram of the 1DORel.AC230V Digital Electronic Module 10-18 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Digital Electronic Modules - Technical Data Technical Data The technical data of the 1DORel.AC230V digital electronic module is listed below. Dimensions and Weight Actuator Selection Data Dimensions WHD (mm) 106451 Continuous thermal current max. 5 A Weight approx. 30 g Minimum load current 1 mA Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts see Table 10-1 For resistive load For inductive load in accor- see Table 10-1 Module-Specific Data Number of outputs 1 Contact type 1xA Cable length Unshielded Shielded max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials dance with IEC 947-5-1 DC13/AC15 Lamp load see Table 10-1 Internal contact connection Varistor rated voltage 275 V Rated supply voltage of relay L+ DC 24 V Parallel switching of 2 outputs Reverse polarity protection yes For redundant control of a yes For performance enhance- load Galvanic isolation Between channels and SC bus Between channel and supply voltage of the relay Permissible potential difference Between ground and supply voltage of the relay DC 75 V, AC 60 V Between ground or supply voltage of the relay and the output not possible possible Switching frequency Mechanical max. 10 Hz With resistive load max. 1 Hz With inductive load in accor- max. 1 Hz dance with IEC 947-5-1 DC13/AC15 AC 240 V possible ment Controlling a digital input yes see Table 10-1 With lamp load max. 0.1 Hz max. 0.1 Hz Isolation tested with Between ground and supply voltage of the relay AC 1500 V Between ground or supply voltage of the relay and the output DC 2500 V Power input From supply voltage L+ max. 15 mA Power loss of the module typ. 0.7 W Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status indication green LED Interrupts none Diagnostic functions none ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 10-19 SC Digital Electronic Modules - Technical Data Table 10-1 Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts With Resistive Load Voltage Current Number of Operations (Typ.) DC 24 V 5.0 A 0.1 million DC 24 V 1.0 A 0.5 million DC 24 V 0.5 A 1.5 million DC 60 V 0.5 A 1.0 million DC 120 V 0.2 A 1.0 million AC 48 V 5.0 A 0.3 million AC 60 V 5.0 A 0.2 million AC 120 V 5.0 A 0.1 million AC 120 V 1.0 A 1.0 million AC 120 V 0.5 A 2.5 million AC 230 V 5.0 A 0.2 million AC 230 V 1.0 A 0.5 million AC 230 V 0.5 A 1.5 million For Inductive Load in Accordance with IEC 947-5-1 DC13/AC15 and Lamp Load Voltage Current Number of Operations (Typ.) DC 24 V 1.0 A 0.1 million DC 24 V 0.5 A 0.5 million DC 60 V 0.5 A 0.5 million DC 120 V 0.2 A 0.1 million AC 48 V 2.0 A 1.0 million AC 60 V 2.0 A 1.0 million AC 120 V 2.0 A 0.5 million AC 120 V 1.0 A 0.7 million AC 120 V 0.7 A 1.0 million AC 120 V 0.5 A 2.0 million AC 230 V 2.0 A 0.2 million AC 230 V 1.0 A 0.5 million AC 230 V 0.5 A 1.0 million The lifetime is longer with an external suppression circuit. 10-20 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Contents of the Chapter Section 11 Topic Page 11.1 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules 11-2 11.2 Notes on the Parameters of the Analog Input Modules 11-4 11.3 Default Parameters of the Analog Input Modules 11-6 11.4 Behavior of the Analog Input Modules 11-7 11.5 Conversion and Cycle Times of the Analog Input Channels 11-8 11.6 Connection of Thermocouples 11-9 11.7 Connecting Non-Isolated Voltage Sensors 11-14 11.8 Connecting Current Sensors 11-15 11.9 Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors 11-17 11.10 Floating Measuring Sensors 11-18 11.11 Wiring Unused Inputs of Analog Input Modules 11-19 11.12 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules 11-20 11.13 Notes on the Parameters of the Analog Output Modules 11-21 11.14 Default Parameters of the Analog Output Modules 11-22 11.15 Behavior of the Analog Output Modules 11-23 11.16 Conversion, Cycle, Settling and Response Times of the Analog Output Modules 11-24 11.17 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs 11-26 11.18 Wiring Unused Analog Output Modules 11-28 11.19 Analog Value Representation in S7 Number Format 11-29 11.20 Analog Measurement Ranges for Input Channels in S7 Number Format 11-30 11.21 Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Modules in S7 Number Format 11-32 11.22 Analog Output Ranges for Output Channels in S7 Number Format 11-37 11.23 Analog Value Representation for Output Modules in S7 Number Format 11-39 11.24 Analog Value Representation in S5 Number Format 11-41 11.25 Analog Measurement Ranges for Input Channels in S5 Number Format 11-43 11.26 Analog Value Representationfor Analog Input Modules in S5 Number Format 11-45 11.27 Analog Output Ranges for Output Channels in S5 Number Format 11-50 11.28 Analog Value Representation for Output Modules in S5 Number Format 11-52 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 11-1 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.1 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules This section contains an overview of the parameters of the analog input modules. The modules use a subset of the parameters and value ranges listed below, depending on their functionality. Tool for Parameterization You will find the tools for parameterization described in Section 4.1. Parameters In the following table, you will find all the parameters used by analog modules. Parameter The following settings are possible for each channel: Measurement range deactivated (yes/no) Voltage measurement range 80 mV 1 ... 5 V 10 V Current measurement range for 4-wire measuring transducer 0 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 20 mA Current measurement range for 2-wire measuring transducer 4 ... 20 mA Resistance measurement range, 4-conductor connection 600 W Thermal resistance with linearization, 4-conductor connection Pt 100 climatic range Pt 100 standard range Ni 100 standard range Thermocouples with linearization Type R Type J Type K 11-2 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Parameter Interference frequency suppression 50 Hz interference suppression 60 Hz interference suppression Smoothing None Weak smoothing Medium smoothing Strong smoothing Reference junction None Dynamic reference temperature at Pt100 module on A Dynamic reference temperature Format (analog value representation) S5 format S7 format ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 11-3 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.2 Notes on the Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Measurement Type/Measurement Range Each module is intended for a specific measurement type. You can select a measurement range for each channel. Measurement Type Measurement Ranges Deactivated Notes Use this parameter if you have not connected a sensor to this channel and you want to shorten the module cycle time. Voltage measurement range " 80 mV ... " 10 V Current, 4-wire measuring transducer " Current, 2-wire measuring transducer 4...20 mA 20 mA; 4...20 mA The 2-wire measuring transducers must be operated via an external voltage source at +24 V. Resistance measurement range, 0 ... 600 W 4-conductor connection The 4-conductor connection gives the maximum possible accuracy. The conductor resistances are in principle fully compensated. Resistance thermometer with linearization Platinum and nickel resistance thermometer Temperature characteristics of various resistance thermometers (dynamic reference temperature) are stored in the module's ROM. The converted analog value is shown in units of 0.1 (0.5)* oC in the standard temperature range and 0.01 (0.05)*oC in the climatic temperature range. Type R (PtRh-Pt) Temperature characteristics of various thermocouples are stored in the module's ROM. The converted analog value is shown in units of 0.1 (1)*oCt. 4-conductor connection Thermocouples with linearization Type J (Fe-CuNi) Type K (NiCr-Ni) * The values in brackets refer to S5 format. 11-4 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Reference Junction Reference Junction If you have connected a thermocouple, the following options are available to you for specifying the reference junction: Notes None The module records only the temperature difference between the measurement point and the free ends of the thermocouple. Dynamic reference temperature module on A Connect a platinum resistance thermometer to the resistance measurement module on slot A in order to record the reference junction in the climatic temperature range. Any thermocouple types on the remaining slots can then use this reference temperature. ET 200L-SC and Smart Connect: The reference temperature refers to slot A on the TB16SC and applies to all other SC modules. ET 200L-SC IM-SC and Smart Connect: The reference temperature refers to slot A on the TB 16IM-SC and applies to all other SC modules. Slot A of the TB16 SC cannot generate a reference temperature. Dynamic reference temperature1 1 Select this option if the temperature at your reference junction is constant or the temperature at the reference junction is recorded by another module. You can specify the temperature in the reference temperature parameter and adjust it dynamically in RUN mode. In the case of the ET 200L-SC, the dynamic reference temperature is only possible with S7 masters. Reference Temperature Here you can enter the reference junction temperature in the climatic temperature range for recording temperatures using thermocouples (in S7 number format: 0.01oC and in S5 number format: 0.05oC). You can update this parameter using your application program. You can, for instance, record the reference junction temperature via another module. In the case of the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC, entering the reference temperature is only possible with S7 masters. Interference Frequency Suppression The frequency of your AC power supply can interfere with the measured value particularly in the case of low voltage ranges and thermocouples. Enter the mains frequency of your system. Smoothing The various measured values are smoothed by digital filtering. You can choose between no, weak, medium and strong smoothing for each module. The stronger the smoothing, the greater the time constant of the filter. Format The analog input module supplies its information in S5 or S7 number format, depending the parameterization. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 11-5 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.3 Default Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Default Parameters If you have not set the parameters of the relevant module using the specified software (Chapter 4), the default settings apply to all input channels after a restart. Specifically, this means: Table 11-1 Default Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Default Value Parameters Measurement type Each module is intended for a specific measurement type. Measurement Range 11-6 " Module type for voltage input 10 V Module type for current input 4 ... 20 mA Module type for resistance input Pt 100 standard Module type for thermocouple input Thermocouple type K Interference frequency suppression 50 Hz Smoothing None Reference junction None Reference temperature value 0000H Format S7 format ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.4 Behavior of the Analog Input Modules Introduction This section describes: The dependency of analog input values on the load power supply of the analog modules and the operating states of the CPU The behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog values in each value range The effect of faults on the analog modules Extreme Range of the Analog Signals The behavior of the analog input modules depends on which part of the value range the input values are in. Table 11-2 Effect of the Operating Mode of the CPU and the Supply Voltage L+ on the Analog Input Values Operating Mode of the CPU POWER ON POWER ON POWER OFF RUN STOP - Supply Voltage L+ at the Analog Module L+ applied pp Input Value of the Analog Module S7 Number Format S5 Number Format Process value Process value 7FFFH until the conclusion of the 1st conversion after the parameterization of the module. 7FFFH until the conclusion of the 1st conversion after the parameterization of the module. L+ not applied 7FFFH 7FFFH L+ applied pp Process value Process value 7FFFH until the conclusion of the 1st conversion after the parameterization of the module. 7FFFH until the conclusion of the 1st conversion after the parameterization of the module. L+ not applied 7FFFH 7FFFH L+ applied - - L+ not applied - - ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 11-7 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.5 Conversion and Cycle Times of the Analog Input Channels In this section, you will find the definitions and interrelationships of the conversion time and cycle time for analog input modules. Conversion time The conversion time consists of the basic conversion time and additional processing times of the module. The basic conversion time depends directly on the conversion process (integrated process, successive approximation) of the analog input channel. In integrating conversion processes, the integration time is included directly with the conversion time. The integration time is dependent on the interface frequency suppression. Cycle Time in a Module Analog/digital conversion and transfer of the digitized measured values to the SC bus are sequential. In other words, the analog input channels are converted one after the other. The cycle time (i.e. the time until another analog input value is converted) is the sum of the conversion times of the activated analog input channels of an analog input module (see Chapter 12). You should activate unused analog input channels to reduce the cycle time. Cycle Time to the System The transfer of the digitized measured values to the system depends on the interface used and the degree of expansion of the Smart Connect. If you are using an ET 200L-SC with analog SC modules, you must allow the following times for the transmission of the digitized measured values: 12 ms for each analog module An additional 10 ms for each 2 AI TC SC module for which you have set the reference temperature transfer parameter (dynamically or from the dynamic reference temperature module on slot A) The total cycle time thus depends on the cycle time in the SC modules (see Chapter 12) plus the cycle times to the system, as described above. 11-8 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.6 Connecting Thermocouples Thermocouples are used to measure temperature.There are various types of thermocouple, which differ with regard to their temperature range and output voltage, depending on the material of their wires. Structure of Thermocouples A thermocouple assembly consists of: The thermocouple itself (sensor) The required built-in and connected components. The thermocouple itself consists of two wires made of different metals or metal alloys, the ends of which are soldered or welded together. Thermocouples are categorized into different types (e.g. R, J, K) according to the combination of materials used. The measurement principle is the same for all thermocouple types. Measurement point Thermocouple with plus and minus components Connecting point Equalizing conductor Reference junction Supply conductor (Cu) Trimming resistor Measurement point for thermal e.m.f. C Figure 11-1 Structure of Thermocouples How Thermocouples Work If the measurement point is subjected to a different temperature to the free end of the thermocouple, a potential difference develops between the free ends, which is referred to as the thermal e.m.f. The thermal e.m.f. depends on the difference between the temperature of the measurement point and the temperature at the free ends of the reference junction, as well as the combination of materials used in the thermocouple. A thermocouple always measures a temperature difference, so to determine the temperature of a measurement point the free ends at a reference junction must be kept at a known temperature. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 11-9 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature Table 11-3 You have various options for measuring the reference junction temperature in order to obtain an absolute temperature value from the temperature difference between the reference junction and the measurement point. Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature Option Notes Reference Junction Parameters No compensation When you only want to measure the tempera- None ture difference between the measurement point and the reference junction. Use of a compensating box in the supply conductors of a single thermocouple You have already measured and compensated None the reference junction temperature using a compensating box looped into the supply conductors of a single thermocouple. No further processing on the part of the module is required. Use of a resistance thermometer to measure the reference junction temperature (recommended method) You can measure the reference temperature Dynamic reference temusing a resistance thermometer (platinum), perature module on A and have the module calculate it for any thermocouple of this terminal block. Constant reference junction temperature (thermostat, ice bath) If the reference junction temperature is constant and known, you can specify this value in the dynamic parameters. Distribution of thermocouples with the same reference junction across several modules Use a resistance measurement module with a Dynamic reference temconnected dynamic reference temperature perature module, which measures the reference junction temperature, and set the parameters of the reference junctions of the thermocouples as described above (dynamic reference temperature module on A). Read the climatic temperature into the CPU, and pass the value via SFC55 to the other module. 11-10 Dynamic reference temperature ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Connecting Thermocouples Connect the thermocouple to the inputs of the modules either directly or via equalizing conductors. Each channel, independently of the other channel, can use any thermocouple type supported by the analog input module. Slot A Slot B Slot C AI TC 1L+ 2L+ A1 M+ 1M 2M A3 M- A2 B1 B2 C1 C2 A4 B3 B4 C3 C4 M+ M- +24V M Figure 11-2 Connecting Insulated Thermocouples Without Compensation, With Internal Compensation, or Use of the Reference Temperature (Example TB 16SC) ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 11-11 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Non-Insulated Thermocouples If you use non-insulated thermocouples, you must be careful to comply with the permitted common-mode voltage. Extension to a Reference Junction The thermocouples can be extended from their connecting point via equalizing conductors to a point with as constant a temperature as possible (reference junction). The equalizing conductors are made of the same material as the wires of the thermocouple. The supply conductors are of copper. In this case, internal compensation must not be set. Ensure that the polarity of the connection is correct, since otherwise serious measurement errors occur. Equalizing Circuit The effect of temperature fluctuations on the reference junction can be compensated for by an equalizing circuit (e.g. by means of a compensating box for a reference junction outside the terminal block or by means of internal compensation for a reference junction in the terminal block). In this case, the equalizing conductors must lead to the terminal block. Use of a Compensating Box The effect of temperature on the reference junction of a thermocouple (e.g. terminal box) can be equalized by means of a compensating box. The compensating box contains a bridge circuit, which is compensated for a specified reference junction temperature (compensating temperature). The connections for the ends of the equalizing conductor of the thermocouple form the reference junction. If the actual reference temperature differs from the compensating temperature, the temperature-dependent bridge resistance changes. The result is a positive or negative compensation voltage, which is added to the thermal e.m.f. To compensate the analog input modules, compensating boxes with the reference junction temperature of 0 _C must be used. Note: S The compensating box must be supplied potential-free. S The power supply unit must have sufficient interference filtering (e.g. by means of a grounded shielding winding). 11-12 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Compensation by Measurement of the Reference Junction Temperature 1L+ If all thermocouples connected to the inputs of the analog modules of a terminal block have the same reference junction, compensate them as follows: 2L+ Slot B AI TC A1 M+ 1M Slot A AI RTD 2M A2 IC+ A3 M- B1 M+ A4 IC- Slot C B2 C1 C2 B4 C3 C4 M+ B3 M- M- * * +24V M * only for an ungrounded thermocouple Figure 11-3 Connecting Insulated Thermocouples of the Same Type with External Compensation, via a Resistance Thermometer Connected to the Resistance Measurement Module, to Slot A of the Terminal Block (Example TB 16SC) Connect the resistance thermometer to the module on slot A. Note the parameterization of the reference junction for each thermocouple channel. Abbreviations In Figures 11-2 and 11-3, the abbreviations have the following meanings: IC +: Constant current line (positive) IC-: Constant current line (negative) M +: Measurement line (positive) M-: Measurement line (negative) ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 11-13 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.7 Connecting Non-Isolated Voltage Sensors Voltage Sensors Figure 11-4 shows how to connect voltage sensors to an analog input module. Slot A Slot B Slot C AI "10V/1...5V 1L+ 2L+ A1 M+ 1M 2M B1 B2 C1 C2 A4 B3 B4 C3 C4 M+ A3 M- A2 M- +24V M U U Figure 11-4 Connecting Voltage Sensors (Example TB 16SC) 4-wire measuring transducers with voltage output are connected like voltage sensors. 11-14 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.8 Connecting Current Sensors Supply Voltage of the Sensors You can only connect 4-wire measuring transducers or 2-wire measuring transducers with external supply voltage to the modules. Connecting 4-Wire Measuring Transducers Figure 11-5 shows you how to connect current sensors as 4-wire measuring transducers to analog input modules. Slot A Slot B Slot C AI 4...20 mA/ "20mA 1L+ 2L+ A1 M+ 1M 2M B1 B2 C1 C2 A4 B3 B4 C3 C4 M+ A3 M- A2 M- +24V M UH P 4-wire measuring transducer + - P Sensor, e.g. pressure gauge + 4-wire measuring - transducer UH U H = auxiliary power Figure 11-5 Connecting 4-Wire Measuring Transducers (Example TB 16SC) ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 11-15 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Connecting 2-Wire Measuring Transducers Figure 11-6 shows you how to connect 2-wire measuring transducers with an external power supply to current input modules. Slot A Slot B Slot C AI 4...20 mA/ 1L+ 2L+ A1 M+ 1M 2M A2 B1 B2 C1 C2 A4 B3 B4 C3 C4 M+ A3 M- M- M M +24V M +24V + P - 2-wire measuring transducer +24V + P - 2-wire measuring transducer Figure 11-6 Connecting 2-wire measuring transducers (Example TB 16SC) 11-16 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.9 Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors The resistance thermometers and resistors are measured by means of a 4-conductor system. A constant current is fed via terminals IC + and IC - to the resistance thermometers and resistors. The resulting voltage at the resistance thermometer and resistor is measured via terminals M + and M -. Very precise measurement results are thus obtained at the 4-conductor connection. 4-Conductor Connection Figure 11-7 shows how to implement the 4-conductor connection for resistance thermometers/resistors. Slot A Slot B Slot C AI RTD 1L+ 2L+ A1 M+ 1M 2M A3 M- A2 B1 B2 C1 C2 A4 B3 B4 C3 C4 IC+ IC- +24V M Figure 11-7 4-Conductor Connection for Resistance Thermometers and Resistors (Example TB 16SC) ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 11-17 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.10 Floating Measuring Sensors Floating Measuring Sensors 11-18 In the case of floating measuring sensors, potential differences can occur between the individual measuring sensors and in comparison to M. These potential differences can also be caused by malfunctions or the spatial distribution of the measuring sensors. Ensure that UCM does not exceed the permitted value (e.g. by using an equalizing conductor). ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.11 Wiring Unused Inputs of Analog Input Modules To avoid malfunctions, you should deactivate unused channels of analog input modules using the configuration tool and wire as follows: In the case of analog input modules for voltage, current and thermocouples: Insert a bridge between M+ and M-, and connect it to the ground (M) of the terminal block. In the case of analog input modules for resistance thermometers: Insert a bridge between M+ and M-, and connect it to the ground (M) of the terminal block. IC+ and IC- remain unwired. In the case of the 2 AI HS I analog input module (6ES7 123-1GB50-0AB0): Leave the inputs of the unused channel unwired. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 11-19 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.12 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules This section contains an overview of the parameters of the analog output modules. The modules use a subset of the parameters and value ranges listed below, depending on their functionality. Tool for Parameterization The parameterization tools are described in Chapter 4. Parameters of the Analog Output Modules The table 11-4 shows which parameters are used by the analog output modules. Table 11-4 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules Parameters The following settings are possible: Measurement range deactivated (yes/no) Voltage range 1 ... 5 V 10 V Current range 0 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 11-20 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.13 Notes on the Parameters of the Analog Output Modules Output Type/Output Range You specify the output type by selecting the corresponding module type. For each module type, you have the option of entering an output range of the parameters or value ranges listed below. Table 11-5 Output Type Output Types/Output Ranges of the Analog Output Modules Output Range Voltage 1 ... 5 V 10 V Current 0 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA Notes Wire the S+ and S- sense inputs of the modules directly to the load to be driven in order to compensate for line effects. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 11-21 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.14 Default Parameters of the Analog Output Modules Default Parameters If you have not set the parameters of the corresponding module using the specified software (Chapter 4), the default settings apply to all output channels after a restart. Specifically, this means: Table 11-6 Default Parameters of the Analog Output Modules Default Value Parameter Output type Each module is intended for a specific output type. Output Range 11-22 Module type for voltage " 10 V Module type for current 4 ... 20 mA ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.15 Behavior of the Analog Output Modules Introduction Table 11-7 This section describes the following: The effect of the load power supply of the analog modules and the operating modes of the CPU on the analog output values The behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog values in the relevant value range The effect of errors on the analog modules Effect of the Operating Mode of the CPU and the Supply Voltage L+ on the Analog Output Values Operating Mode of the CPU POWER ON RUN Supply Voltage L+ at the Analog Module L+applied pp Output Value of the Analog Output Module S7 Number Format S5 Number Format CPU values CPU values By the conclusion of the 1st conversion ... By the conclusion of the 1st conversion ... after power on, a signal of after power on, a signal of 0 mA or 0 V is output. POWER ON POWER OFF STOP - 0 mA or 0 V is output. after parameterization, a after parameterization, a signal of 0 mA or 0 V is output. signal of 0 mA or 0 V is output. L+ not applied 0 mA / 0 V 0 mA / 0 V L+ applied pp 0 mA / 0 V 0 mA / 0 V 0 mA / 0 V 0 mA / 0 V L+ not applied 0 mA / 0 V 0 mA / 0 V L+applied 0 mA / 0 V 0 mA / 0 V L+ not applied 0 mA / 0 V 0 mA / 0 V ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 11-23 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.16 Conversion, Cycle, Settling and Response Times of the Analog Output Modules In this section, you will find the definition and interrelationships of the relevant times for the analog output modules. Conversion Time The conversion time of the analog output modules includes transferring the digitized output values from internal memory after a message ends, and digital/analog conversion. Cycle Time in a Module The analog output modules are single-channel, so the internal cycle time corresponds to the conversion time described above. Cycle Time of the System The data in the analog modules is transmitted sequentially by means of the appropriate interface. The cycle time (i.e. the time that elapses before an analog module is addressed again) depends on the interface used and the number of parameterized analog modules. 11-24 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Analog Output Module Settling Time The settling time (t2 to t3), which is the time from when the converted value is applied to when the specified value is obtained at the analog output, depends on the load. Distinctions must be drawn between ohmic, capacitive and inductive load. Response Time The response time (t1 to t3), which is the time from when the digital output values apply in the internal memory of the appropriate interface to when the specified value is reached at the analog output, is, in the worst case, the sum of the cycle time and the settling time. The worst case is when the analog channel is converted just before transfer of a new output value to the interface, and is only transferred again after transfer and conversion of the other channels (cycle time). Figure 11-8 shows the response time of the analog output channels. tA tE tZ t2 t1 t3 tA = response time tZ = cycle time, which corresponds to n transfer time +1 conversion time (n = activated modules) tE = settling time t1 = new digitized output value applies t2 = output value accepted and converted t3= specified output value Figure 11-8 Response Time of the Analog Output Channels ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 11-25 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.17 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs In the figures below, the abbreviations have the following meanings: QI+: Output current QV+: Output voltage S +: Sensor line (positive) S -: Sensor line (negative) QV-/QI-: Return line for load (ground connection) RL: Load resistance The figures below show you how to connect loads and actuators to the current or voltage outputs of the analog output modules. Connecting Loads to a Current Output Figure 11-9 shows an example of the wiring on an electronic module. Slot B Slot A Slot C AO 4...20 mA/ 0...20mA 1L+ 2L+ A1 A2 B1 B2 C1 C2 A3 A4 B3 B4 C3 C4 QI+ 1M 2M QI- +24V M RL Figure 11-9 Connecting Loads/Actuators to a Current Output (Example TB 16SC) 11-26 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output If you connect the load to the voltage output via a 4-wire circuit, high accuracy is obtained. Slot A Slot B Slot C AO "10V/1..5V 1L+ 2L+ A1 QV+ 1M 2M B1 B2 C1 C2 A4 B3 B4 C3 C4 S + A3 QV- A2 S- +24V M RL Figure 11-10 Connecting Loads/Actuators to a Voltage Output via a 4-Wire Circuit (Example TB 16SC) The sensor lines (S +, S -) must be connected directly to the load. The voltage is thus measured and adjusted directly on the load. You can also use only QV+ and QV- by bridging QV+ with S+ and QV- with S- on the terminal block. This entails a loss of accuracy. In this case, the line resistances are not compensated. S + and S - must not remain unwired. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 11-27 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.18 Wiring Unused Analog Output Modules To avoid faults, you must wire unused channels of analog output modules as follows: In the case of analog output modules for voltage: Insert a bridge between QV+ and S+ and between QV- and S- . In the case of analog output modules for current: No wiring is required. 11-28 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.19 Analog Value Representation in S7 Number Format In this section, the analog values are shown in S7 number format for all measurement ranges or output ranges that you can use with the SC analog modules. All modules use the same analog value representation, but their resolution varies. Analog Value Representation with 16-Bit Resolution Bit 15 Value of bits 215 The digitized analog value is the same for input and output values with the same rated range. Analog values are represented as fixed-point numbers in two's complement form. The assignment is as follows: 14 214 13 213 12 11 212 10 211 9 210 29 8 7 28 6 27 5 26 4 25 3 24 2 23 1 22 0 21 20 Resolution Less Than 16 Bits If the resolution of an analog module is less than 16 bits, the analog value is stored on the module with left justification. "0" is written to the unused lowvalue positions. Example In the following example, you see how "0" is written to the unused positions when the resolution is low. Bit pattern of a 14-bit and a 12-bit analog value Resolution Analog value Bit number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 14-bit analog value 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 12-bit analog value 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 11-29 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.20 Analog Measurement Ranges for Input Channels in S7 Number Format Input Ranges Table 11-8 Units The input ranges contained in Tables 11-8 to 11-10 are defined in two's complement representation: Bipolar Input Ranges Measured Value in % 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Range g 32767 u117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow Overrange g Data Word 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - 27648 -1 - 100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 27649 100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - 32512 - 117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 32768 t- 117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 11-9 Units g Rated range Underrange g Underflow Unipolar Input Ranges Measured Value in % Range g 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 32767 u117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow Overrange g Data Word 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - 4864 -1 - 17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 32768 t- 17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11-30 Rated range Underrange g Underflow ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Table 11-10 Units Life-Zero Input Ranges Measured Value in % 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Range g 32767 u117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow 32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange g 27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Data Word 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - 4864 - 17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 32767 t- 17.593 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -1 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Rated range Underrange g Open circuit 11-31 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.21 Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Modules in S7 Number Format The tables in this section contain the measurement representations for the individual measurement ranges of the analog input modules. The table values apply to all modules with the corresponding measurement ranges. How to Read the Measurement Tables The following tables contain the digitized analog values for the various measurement ranges. Since the binary representation of the analog values is always the same, the following tables contain only the measurement ranges against the units. For the corresponding binary representation of the measured values, see the tables in Section 11.20. Voltage Measurement Range +10 V and +80 mV 11-32 Measured Value in % System Voltage Measurement Range Dec. Hex. 10 V 80 mV u117.589 % 32767 7FFF u11.759V 117.589 % 32511 7EFF 11.759 V 94.1 mV 27649 6C01 100.000 % 27648 6C00 10 V 80 mV 0.003617 % 1 1 361.7 V 2.89 V 0% 0 0 0V 0V - 0.003617 % -1 FFFF -361.7 V - 2.89 V - 100.000 % - 27648 9400 - 10 V - 80 mV - 27649 93FF - 117.593 % - 32512 8100 -11.759 V t 117.593 % -32768 8000 t-11.759V Overflow Overrange g Rated range Underrange g -94.1 mV t-94.1mV Underflow ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Voltage Measurement Range 1...5 V Current Measurement Range " 20 mA Measured Value in % System Voltage Measurement Range Dec. Hex. 1 ... 5 V u117.589 % 32767 7FFF u5.704 V Overflow 117.589 % 32511 7EFF 5.704 V Overrange 27649 6C01 100.000 % 27648 6C00 5V Rated range 0.003617 % 1 1 1 V + 144.7 V 0% 0 0 1V -1 FFFF -17.593 % - 4864 ED00 0.296 V t-17.593 % 32767 7FFF t Measured Value in % Underrange 0.296 V System Open circuit Current Measurement Range Dec. Hex. 20 mA u117.589 % 32767 7FFF u23.52 mA Overflow 117.589 % 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overrange g 27649 6C01 100.000 % 27648 6C00 20 mA Rated range 0.003617 % 1 1 723.4 nA 0% 0 0 0 mA - 0.003617 % -1 FFFF - 723.4 nA - 100.000 % - 27648 9400 - 20 mA - 27649 93FF - 117.593 % - 32512 8100 - 23.52 mA t-117.593 % - 32768 8000 t- 23.52 mA ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Underrange g Underflow 11-33 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Current Measurement Range 4... 20 mA Resistance-Type Sensor 0...600 W Measured Value in % System Current Measurement Range Dec. Hex. 4 ... 20 mA u117.589 % 32767 7FFF u22.81 mA Overflow 117.589 % 32511 7EFF 22.81 mA Overrange g 27649 6C01 100.000 % 27648 6C00 20 mA Rated range 0.003617 % 1 1 4 mA + 578.7 nA 0% 0 0 4 mA -1 FFFF - 17.593 % - 4864 ED00 1.185 mA t- 17.593 % 32767 7FFF t1.185 mA Measured Value in % Underrange g System Open circuit Resistance-Type Sensor Dec. Hex. 600 u117.589 % 32767 7FFF u705.53 W Overflow 117.589 % 32511 7EFF 705.53 W Overrange g 27649 6C01 100.000 % 27648 6C00 0.003617 % 1 1 21.70 mW 0% 0 0 0W -1 FFFF * - 17.593 % - 4864 ED00 * t- 17.593 % - 32768 8000 600 W * Rated range Underrange Underflow *Polarity reversal of IC+, IC 11-34 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Analog Value Representation for Temperature Sensors The following two tables show the analog value representation for temperature sensors of various types in various temperature ranges. System Temperature Range for Thermoresistors Climatic (1 Digit = 0.01 oC) Dec. Hex. 32767 7FFF Pt100 Pt100 Ni100 Overflow *155 1000 Standard (1 Digit = 0.1 oC) oC *1000 oC *295 oC 130 oC 850 oC 250 oC 10 oC 100 oC 100 oC 1 1 0.01 oC 0.1 oC 0.1 oC 0 0 0.00 oC 0.0 oC 0.0 oC -1 FFFF - 0.01 oC - 0.1 oC - 0.1 oC - 120 oC - 200 oC - 60 oC Overrange g Rated range g Underrange g *- 145 oC -32768 * *-243 oC 8000 *- 105 oC Underflow Overrange and underrange: In the overrange and underrange, the gradient of the characteristic curve as it leaves the linearized rated range is retained. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 11-35 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters System Temperature Range for Thermocouples Standard (1 Digit = 0.1 oC) Dec. Hex. 32767 7FFF 10000 Type R Type J Type K Overflow oC *1622 oC *2019 oC *1450 1769 oC 1200 oC 1372 oC 1000 oC 1000 oC 1000 oC 1 1 0.1 oC 0.1 oC 0.1 oC 0 0 0.0 oC 0.0 oC 0.0 oC -1 FFFF - 0.1 oC -0.1 oC - 0.1 oC - 50 oC - 210 oC - 270 oC Overrange g Rated range g Underrange g *- 170 - 32768 * 8000 oC *- 330 oC *- 390 oC Underflow Overrange and underrange: In the overrange and underrange, the gradient of the characteristic curve as it leaves the linearized rated range is retained. 11-36 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c S C A n a l o g E l e c t 11.22 Analog Output Ranges for Output Channels in S7 Number Format O u t R p a u n t The g output e sranges shown in the following tables are defined for the analog output modules. Table 11-11 Bipolar Output Ranges Units 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Output p Value in % w32512 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x 0% Overflow Overrange g Data Word 32511 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 117.589 27649 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 100.004 27648 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100.000 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - 27648 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 100.000 - 27649 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 100.004 - 32512 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 117.593 v 32513 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x 0% Table 11-12 Range g Rated range g - 0.003617 Underrange g Underflow Unipolar Output Ranges Units 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Output p Value in % w32512 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x 0% Overflow Overrange g Data Word 32511 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 117.589 27649 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 100.004 27648 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100.000 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - 32512 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 50 1 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x 0.000 v 3 21 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 0 Range g Rated range Restricted to rated range lower limit, 0 V % U n d 11-37 e o r r f 0 l o w SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Table 11-13 Life-Zero Output Ranges Units 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Output p Value in % w 32512 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x 0% Overflow 32511 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 117.589 Overrange g 27649 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 100.004 27648 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100.000 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - 0.003617 - 6912 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 25.000 - 6913 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data Word 215 - 32512 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 v - 32513 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x 11-38 Range g Rated range Underrange g - 25.000 Restricted to overrange lower limit, 0 V or 0 mA - 25 % Underflow ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.23 Analog Value Representation for Output Modules in S7 Number Format The tables in this section contain the measurement representations for the individual measurement ranges of the analog output modules. The table values apply to all modules with the corresponding measurement ranges. How to Read the Measurement Tables Voltage Range 10 V The following tables contain the digitized analog values for the various measurement ranges. Since the binary representation of the analog values is always the same, the following tables contain only the measurement ranges against the units. Measured Value in % System Voltage Range Dec. Hex. 10 V 118.5149 % 32767 7FFF 0.00 V 117.593 % 32512 7F00 0.00 V 117.589 % 32511 7EFF 11.76 V Overrange 27649 6C01 100 % 27648 6C00 10 V Rated range 0.003617 % 1 1 361.7 V 0% 0 0 0V - 0.003617 % -1 FFFF - 361.7 V - 100 % - 27648 9400 - 10 V - 27649 93FF Underrange 117.593 % - 32512 8100 - 11.76 V -117.596% - 32513 80FF 0.00 V - 118.519 % - 32768 8000 0.00 V ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Overflow, no voltage g and no current Underflow, no voltage g and no current 11-39 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Voltage Range 1...5 V Measured Value in % Voltage Range Dec. Hex. 1 ... 5 V 118.5149 % 32767 7FFF 0.00 V 117.593 % 32512 7F00 0.00 V 117.589 % 32511 7EFF 5.70 V Overrange g 27649 6C01 100 % 27648 6C00 5V Rated range 0.003617 % 1 1 1V+144.7V 0% 0 0 1V -1 FFFF 1V-144.7V - 6912 E500 0V - 6913 E4FF 0.00 V 117.593 % - 32512 8100 0.00 V - 117.596 % - 32513 80FF 0.00 V - 118.519 % - 32768 8000 0.00 V - 25 % Current range 0...20 mA and 4...20 mA System Overflow, no voltage g and no current Underrange g Impossible; p output p value restricted to 0 V Underflow, no voltage g and no current Current range Dec. Hex. 0 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 118.5149 % 32767 7FFF 0.00 mA 0.00 mA 117.593 % 32512 7F00 Overflow, no voltage and no current 117.589 % 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange g 27649 6C01 100 % 27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Rated range 0.003617 % 1 1 723.4 nA 4mA+578.7 nA 0% 0 0 0 mA 4 mA -1 FFFF 0 mA 4mA-578.7 nA - 6912 E500 0 mA 0 mA - 6913 E4FF 0 mA 0 mA - 117.593 % - 32512 8100 0 mA 0 mA - 117.596 % - 32513 80FF 0 mA 0 mA - 118.519 % - 32768 8000 0 mA 0 mA - 25 % 11-40 System Underrange g Impossible; output value restricted to 0 mA Underflow, no voltage and no current ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.24 Analog Value Representation in S5 Number Format In this section, the differences between the analog value representation in S5 number format and S7 number format are explained. The measurement and output ranges are always represented with left justification, with the exception of temperature ranges. Temperature ranges (PT100, Ni100, thermocouples) refer to bit 3, with right justification. Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Value 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 x F U Bits U, F and x are reserved for diagnostic functions: Bit Meaning Bit 20 = U Overflow bit Bit 21 =F Fault (open circuit) Bit 22 =x Not used The individual measurement ranges are represented as follows: Table 11-14 Measurement Ranges for Analog Electronic Modules Representation of the Measurement Ranges for Analog Inputs Measurement range 80 mV 10 V 20 mA Representation in S5 Number Format Representation in S7 Number Format - 2048...+2048 -27648...+27648 1...5 V; 4...20 mA 512...+2560 0...+27648 PT100 Standard 0.5 oC/digit 0.1 oC/digit -100...+850 oC -200...+1700 - 200...+850 oC PT100 climatic - 2000...+8500 0.05 oC/digit 0.01 oC/digit - 120...+130 oC - 2400...+2600 -12000...+13000 Ni100 standard 0.5 oC/digit 0.1 oC/digit - 120...+500 -600...+2500 0...+2048 0...+27648 - 60...+250 oC Resistor 0...600 W Thermocouple type J 1 oC/digit 0.1 oC/digit - 210...+1200 oC -200...+1200 oC - 2100...+12000 -200...+1200 1 oC/digit Thermocouple type K - 270...+1372 -100...+1369 oC 0.1 oC/digit oC oC - 2700...+13720 -100...+1369 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c oC 11-41 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Table 11-14 Representation of the Measurement Ranges for Analog Inputs Measurement range Representation in S5 Number Format Representation in S7 Number Format 1 oC/digit 0.1 oC/digit - 50...+1769 -500...+17690 Thermocouple type R - 50...+1769 oC Table 11-15 Representation of the Measurement Rangesfor Analog Outputs Output Range 10 V Representation in S5 Number Format Representation in S7 Number Format -1024...+1024 - 27648...+27648 0...1024 0...+27648 1...5 V 0...20 mA 4...20 mA Overrange 117.59% (as S7) Overflow value Greatest overrange value +1 Underflow value Greatest underrange value -1 In both cases, the 0 (overflow) bit is set for inputs. 11-42 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.25 Analog Measurement Ranges for Input Channels in S5 Number Format Input Ranges Table 11-16 Units The input ranges contained in Tables 11-16 to 11-18 are defined in two's complement representation: Bipolar Input Ranges Measured Value in % 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 x F U Range g 2409 u117.578 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Overflow 2408 117.578 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Overrange g 2049 100.05 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2048 100.000 Data Word 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.0488 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0.0488 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 - 2048 -1 - 100.000 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 2049 - 100.05 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 - 2408 - 117.578 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 2409 t- 117.578 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 Table 11-17 Units 2409 2408 2049 2048 Underrange g Underflow Unipolar Input Ranges Measured Value in % 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 * F U u117.578 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Overflow 117.578 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Overrange g 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100.05 100.000 Range g Data Word 1 0.0488 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0.0488 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 -1 g Rated range - 360 - 17.593 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 361 t- 17.593 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Rated range Overrange g Underflow 11-43 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Table 11-18 Units Life-Zero Input Ranges Measured Value in % Range g Data Word 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 x F U 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Overflow Overrange g 2921 117.578 0 1 2920 117.578 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2561 100.05 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2560 100.000 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 513 0.0488 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 512 0.000 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0488 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 151 511 - 17.593 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 4095 v-17.593 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 11-44 Rated range Underrange g Open circuit ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.26 Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Modules in S5 Number Format The tables in this section contain the measurement representations for the individual measurement ranges of the analog input modules. The table values apply to all modules with the corresponding measurement ranges. How to Read the Measurement Tables Voltage Measurement Range 10 V and 80 mV The following tables contain the digitized analog values for the various measurement ranges. Since the binary representation of the analog values is always the same, the following tables contain only the measurement ranges against the units. Measured Value in % System Voltage Measurement Range Dec. 10 V 80 mV u117.589 % 2409 u11.769 V w94.1 mV Overflow 117.589 % 2408 11.758 V 94.06 mV Overrange g 10 V 80 mV 2049 100.000 % 2048 0.0488 % 1 4.9 mV 39 V 0% 0 0V 0V -0.0488 % -1 -4.9 mV -39 V - 100.000 % - 2048 - 10 V - 80 mV Underrange g - 2049 Voltage Measurement Range 1...5 V Rated range - 117.593 % - 2408 - 11.759 V - 94.06 mV t- 117.593 % - 2409 t11.759 V v- 94.1 mV Measured Value in % System Underflow Voltage Measurement Range Dec. 1 ... 5 V u117.589 % 2921 w5.704 V Overflow 117.589 % 2920 5.704 V Overrange g 100.05 % 2561 100.000 % 2560 5V Rated range 0.0488 % 513 1 V + 1.95 mV 0 512 1V - 0.0488 % 511 - 17.593 % 151 0.296 V t- 17.593 % 4095 t0.296 V Underrange ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Open circuit 11-45 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Current Measurement Range 20 mA Measured Value in % System Current Measurement Range Dec. 20 mA u117.589 % 2409 u23.52 mA Overflow 117.589 % 2408 23.52 mA Overrange g Rated range 2049 100.000 % 2048 20 mA 0.0488 % 1 9.766 A 0% 0 0 mA -0.0488 % -1 -9.766 A - 100.000 % - 2048 - 20 mA Underrange g - 2049 Current Measurement Range 4...20 mA - 117.593 % - 2408 - 23.52 mA t- 117.593 % - 2409 t- 23.52 mA Measured Value in % System Underflow Current Measurement Range Dec. 4 ... 20 mA u117.589 % 2921 u22.81 mA Overflow 117.589 % 2920 22.81 mA Overrange g Rated range 2561 100.000 % 2560 20 mA 0.0488 % 513 4 mA + 7.813 A 0% 512 4 mA - 0.0488 % 11-46 Underrange g 511 - 17.593 % 151 1,185 mA t- 17.593 % 4095 t1,185 mA Open circuit ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Resistance-Type Sensor 600 W Measured Value in % System Resistance-Type Sensor Dec. 600 u117.589 % 2409 u705.53 W Overflow 117.578 % 2408 705.53 W Overrange g 2049 600 W 100.000 % 2048 0.0488 % 1 0.293 W 0% 0 0W -1 * - 17.593 % -360 * t- 17.593 % -361 * * Rated range Underrange Underflow Polarity reversal of constant current IC+, IC- ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 11-47 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Analog Value Representation for Temperature Sensors The following two tables show the analog value representation for temperature sensors of various types in various temperature ranges. ... for Resistance Thermometers System Temperature Range Climatic (1 Digit = 0.05 oC) Dec. 3101 Pt100 u 155 Standard (1 Digit = 0.5 oC) Pt100 Ni100 oC Overflow u 1000 2001 oC u295 oC 591 *155 oC *1000 oC *295 oC 130 oC 850 oC 250 oC 10 oC 100 oC 100 oC 1 0.05 oC 0.5 oC 0.5 oC 0 0.00 oC 0.0 oC 0.0 oC - 120 oC 100 oC 60 oC 200 Overflow Overrange g Rated range Underrange g *- 145 oC *- 243 oC t- 105 oC 211 * 11-48 Underflow t- 243 oC 487 2901 *- 105oC t- 145 oC Overrange and underrange: In the overrange and underrange, the gradient of the characteristic curve as it leaves the linearized rated range is retained. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters System Temperature Range Standard (1 Digit = 1 oC) Dec. 2020 Type R u 2019 Type J Type K oC Overflow u 1622 1623 u 1450 1451 *2019 oC oC oC 1450 oC 1622 oC 1769 oC 1200 oC 1372 oC 1000 oC 1000 oC 1000 oC 1 1 oC 1 oC 1 oC 0 0.0 oC 0.0 oC 0.0 oC -1 - 1 oC - 1 oC - 1 oC - 50 oC - 210 oC - 270 oC Overrange g Rated range Underrange g *- 170 - 171 - 331 - 390 * oC - 330 oC - 390 oC t- 170 oC Underflow t- 330 oC t- 390 oC Overrange and underrange: In the overrange and underrange, the gradient of the characteristic curve as it leaves the linearized rated range is retained. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 11-49 S C A n a l o g E l e c t r o n i c M o d u l e s - 11.27 Analog Output Ranges for Output Channels in S5 Number Format O s ranges shown in the following tables are defined for the analog t Rp a u n t gThe eoutput output modules. u Table 11-19 Bipolar Output Ranges Units 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 x x x x Output p Value in % w1205 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 x x x x 0% 1204 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 x x x x 117.578 1025 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x 100.097 1024 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 100.000 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x 0.097 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 0.000 Data Word -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x 0.097 - 1024 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 100.000 - 1025 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x 100.097 - 1204 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 x x x x - 117.578 v 1205 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 x x x x Range g Overflow Overrange g Rated range g Underrange g 0% Underflow x=irrelevant Table 11-20 Unipolar Output Ranges Units 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 x x x x Output p Value in % w1205 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 x x x x 0% 1204 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 x x x x 117.578 1025 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x w100.097 1024 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 100.000 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x 0.0971 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 0.000 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x Data Word Overflow Overrange g Rated range Restricted to rated range lower limit, 0 V 0.000 - 1204 1 v- 11-50 1 12 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 x x x x 00 5 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 x x x x 0 Range g % U n x = d e i ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c r o r r f r 0 m l o e l A w e v SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Table 11-21 Life-Zero Output Ranges Units 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 x x x x Output p Value in % w 1205 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 x x x x 0% Overflow 1204 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 x x x x 117.578 Overrange g 1025 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x 100.097 1024 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 100.000 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 0.097 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 0.000 Data Word 211 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x 0.097 - 256 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x - 25.000 - 257 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x - 1204 1 v -1205 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 x x x x 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 x x x x Range g Rated range Underrange g - 25.000 Restricted to overrange lower limit, 0 V or 0 mA - 25 % Underflow x=irrelevant ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 11-51 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11.28 Analog Value Representation for Output Modules in S5 Number Format The tables in this section contain the measurement representations for the individual measurement ranges of the analog output modules. The table values apply to all modules with the corresponding measurement ranges. How to Read the Measurement Tables The following tables contain the digitized analog values for the various measurement ranges. Analog Value Representation The following tables show the analog value representation for output channels in various voltage ranges. Since the binary representation of the analog values is always the same, the following tables contain only the measurement ranges against the units. Voltage Range 10 V System Voltage Range Dec. 10 V u 117.578 % u1204 0.00 V Overflow, no voltage and no current 117.578 % 1204 11.76 V Overrange g 1025 100 % 1024 10 V 0.097 % 1 9.76 mV 0% 0 0V -0.097 % -1 - 9.76 mV - 100 % - 1024 - 10 V - 1025 11-52 Rated range Underrange - 117.578 % - 1204 - 11.76 V u-117.578 % u-1204 0.00 V Underflow, no voltage and no current ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters Voltage Range 1...5 V System Voltage Range Dec. 1 ... 5 V u 117.578 % 1205 0V Overflow, no voltage and no current 117.578 % 1204 5.70 V Overrange g 1025 100 % 1024 5V 0.0976 % 1 1V + 3.9 mV 0% 0 1V -1 1 V - 3.9 mV - 256 *0 V - 257 0V t-1205 0V - 25 % t-117.578 % Current range 0...20 mA and 4...20 mA System Rated range Underrange g Impossible; output p p value restricted to 0 V Current Measurement Range Dec. 0 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA u117.578 % u1204 0.00 mA 0.00 mA Overflow, no voltage and no current 117.578 % 1204 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange g 1025 100 % 1024 20 mA 20 mA 0.0976 % 1 19.5 A 4mA+15.6 A 0% 0 0 mA 4 mA -0.0976 % -1 0 mA - 25 % - 256 0 mA 0 mA - 257 0 mA 0 mA - 117.578 % -1204 0 mA 0 mA t- 117.578% t-1205 0.00 mA 0.00 mA ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Rated range Underrange g Impossible; output value restricted to 0 mA Underflow, no voltage and no current 11-53 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Parameters 11-54 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 12 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Contents of the Chapter Order Numbers Section Topic Page 12.1 Analog Electronic Module 2 AI U 12-2 12.2 High Speed Analog Electronic Module 2 AI HS U 12-8 12.3 Analog Electronic Module 2 AI I (...123-1GB00-...) 12-14 12.4 Analog Electronic Module 2 AI I (...123-1GB10-...) 12-20 12.5 High-Speed Analog Electronic Module 2 AI HS I (0/4-20 mA, 4-Wire Measuring Transducer) 12-26 12.6 High-Speed Analog Electronic Module 2 AI HS I (4-20 mA, 2-Wire Measuring Transducer) 12-32 12.7 Analog Electronic Module 2 AI TC 12-38 12.8 Analog Electronic Module 1 AI RTD 12-44 12.9 Analog Electronic Module 1 AO U 12-50 12.10 Analog Electronic Module 1 AO I 12-54 Product Name Order Number Analog Electronic Module 2 AI U 6ES7 123-1FB00-0AB0 High-Speed Analog Electronic Module 2 AI HS U 6ES7 123-1FB50-0AB0 Analog Electronic Module 2 AI I 6ES7 123-1GB00-0AB0 6ES7 123-1GB10-0AB0 HighSpeed Analog Electronic Module 2 AI HS I 6ES7 123-1GB60-0AB0 (0/4-20 mA, 4-Wire Measuring Transducer) HighSpeed Analog Electronic Module 2 AI HS I 6ES7 123-1GB50-0AB0 (4-20 mA, 2-Wire Measuring Transducer) Analog Electronic Module 2 AI TC 6ES7 123-1JB00-0AB0 Analog Electronic Module 1 AI RTD 6ES7 123-1JA00-0AB0 Analog Electronic Module 1 AO U 6ES7 124-1FA00-0AB0 Analog Electronic Module 1 AO I 6ES7 124-1GA00-0AB0 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 12-1 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data 12.1 Analog Electronic Module 2 AI U Order Number 6ES7 123-1FB00-0AB0 Characteristics The 2 AI U analog electronic module is an analog input module with the following characteristics: 2 inputs for voltage measurement Input ranges " 10 V and 1...5 V 13/12-bit resolution Input range selection Isolated from the SC bus Permissible common-mode voltage of AC 2 VSS Front Elevation/ Side Elevation The figure below shows the front elevation and the side elevation of the input module. The block diagram is shown on the front of the input module. In the operating state, the block diagram is covered by the labeling strip. Front elevation Side elevation The used terminals are shaded gray. A1 A2 A3 A4 Slot 1 is shown. Figure 12-1 Front and Side Elevations of the 2 AI U Analog Electronic Module 12-2 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 12-2 shows the block diagram of the 2 AI U analog electronic module. 1 M0+ V ADC 3 M0- 2 M1+ V Isolation SC bus 4 M1- Logic and interface circuit L+ Internal supply M Figure 12-2 Block Diagram of the 2 AI U Analog Electronic Module ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 12-3 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Parameters Table 12-1 The 2 AI U electronic module uses the following parameters: Static Parameters of the 2 AI U Electronic Module Parameters Measurement type Measurement range (voltage) Value Range Default Parameters deactivated Scope Channel Voltage Voltage " 10 V " 10 V Channel 50 Hz Module None Channel SIMATIC S7 Channel 1 ... 5 V Interference frequency sup- 50 Hz (integration time 60 pression ms) 60 Hz (integration time 50 ms) Smoothing None Weak Medium Strong Format SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC S5 Default Parameters 12-4 If you have not set the parameters of the 2 AI U electronic module using the specified software (see Chapter 4), the default settings apply to both input channels after a restart (see Table 12-1). ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Time Response of the Digital First-Order Low-Pass Filter Calculation of the Time Response The smoothing is adjustable in 4 steps. Smoothing factor k multiplied by the cycle time of the electronic module corresponds to the time constant of the smoothing filter. Smoothing factor: k: None 1 Weak 8 Medium 64 Strong 128 You can calculate the time response for any jump of the input value x and the smoothing factor k by using the following formula: x ) (k - 1) yn-1 yn : + n k yn = value passed to the system in the current cycle n Jump Response Figure 12-3 shows the jump response for various smoothing factors, depending on the number of module cycles. Jump Response 1 0.63 0.5 0 100 200 300 400 Module cycles k=8 k = 64 k = 128 Figure 12-3 Jump response ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 12-5 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Technical Data The technical data of the 2 AI U electronic module is listed below. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W H D (mm) Weight Interference Suppression, Limits of Error 106451 Interference voltage suppression for f=n x (f1"1%) (f1=interference frequency; n=1,2...) approx. 20 g Module-Specific Data Number of inputs Common-mode interference Series-mode interference 2 Line length Shielded (peak value of interference < >70 dB rated value of input range) max. 200 m Protection of the electronic mod- external protective ule against surge stress device in the power to IEC801-5 supply and signal lines required Number of times the electronic module can be plugged into a TB 16 SC max. 20 Rated supply voltage of the elecDC 24 V tronics L+ Reversed polarity protection yes Galvanic isolation Between channels and SC no Between channels and power supply of electronics Between channels at 50 Hz/60 Hz >50 dB Operational limit (in entire temperature range, relative to rated input range) " 1.0% 0.7% Temperature error (relative to rated input range) " 0.01%/K Linearity error (relative to rated input range) " 0.05% Repeatability in settled state at 25C, (relative to rated input range) " 0.1% Statuses, Interrupts, Diagnostics no Interrupts no none Diagnostic functions Permissible potential difference Between inputs and ground (VCM) Crosstalk between inputs Basic error limit (operational limit at 25C, relative to rated in" put range) Voltages, Currents, Potentials bus >90 dB DC 2 V/ AC 2 VSS Fault display on module no Readable diagnostic function no Power input From supply voltage L+ max. 30 mA Power loss of the module typ. 0.6 W 12-6 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Analog value formation Measurement principle Sensor Selection Data integrative Integration and conversion time/ resolution per channel Parameterized yes Integration time in ms 60 50 Conversion time in ms 65 55 Resolution (incl. overrange/ representation in two's complement) Input ranges (rated values)/input resistance "10 V/100kW 1...5 V/100kW Permitted input voltage For voltage input (destruction limit) max.20 V permanent; 75 V for max. 1 s (pulse duty factor 1:20) Connection of sensors For voltage measurement Characteristic curve linearization no - S7 format/S5 format "10 V/13 bits Temperature compensation no Smoothing of measured values yes; set by parameters in 4 steps by digital filtering 1...5 V/12 bits Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz possible 50 60 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Step None Weak Medium Strong Time constant 1x cycle time 8x cycle time 64x cycle time 128x cycle time 12-7 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data 12.2 High-Speed Analog Electronic Module 2 AI HS U Order Number 6ES7 123-1FB50-0AB0 Characteristics The 2 AI HS U high-speed analog electronic module is an analog input module with the following characteristics: 2 inputs for voltage measurement Input ranges " 10 V 12-bit resolution Isolated from the SC bus Permissible common-mode voltage of AC 2 VSS Front Elevation/ Side Elevation The figure below shows the front elevation and the side elevation of the twochannel input module. The circuit shematic is shown on the front elevation of the input module. In its operative state the circuit schematic is covered by the labeling strip. Front elevation 2 Side elevation AI HS U 6ES7123-1FB50-0AB0 The used terminals are shaded gray. A1 A2 A3 A4 Slot 1 is shown. Figure 12-4 Front and Side Elevations of the 2 AI HS U High Speed Analog Electronic Module 12-8 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 12-5 shows the block diagram of the 2 AI HS U high speed analog electronic module. 1 M0+ V ADC 3 M0- 2 M1+ Isolation V 4 M1- SC bus Logic and interface circuit L+ Internal supply M Figure 12-5 Block Diagram of the 2 AI HS U High-Speed Analog Electronic Module ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 12-9 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Parameters Table 12-2 The 2 AI HS U electronic module uses the following parameters: Static Parameters of the 2 AI HS U HighSpeed Electronic Module Value Range Parameters Measurement type Default Parameters Deactivated Scope Channel Voltage Voltage Measurement range (voltage) " 10 V " 10 V Channel Smoothing None None Channel SIMATIC S7 Channel Weak Medium Strong Format SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC S5 Default Parameters 12-10 If you have not set the parameters of the 2 AI HS U electronic module using the specified software (Chapter 4), the default settings of all parameters apply to both input channels after a restart (see Table 12-2). ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Time Response of the Digital First-Order Low-Pass Filter Calculation of the Time Response The smoothing is adjustable in 4 steps. Smoothing factor k multiplied by the cycle time of the electronic module corresponds to the time constant of the smoothing filter. Smoothing factor: k: None 1 Weak 8 Medium 64 Strong 128 You can calculate the time response for any jump of the input value x and the smoothing factor k by using the following formula: x ) (k - 1) yn-1 yn : + n k yn = value passed to the system in the current cycle n Jump Response Figure 12-3 shows the jump response for various smoothing factors, depending on the number of module cycles. Jump Response 1 0.63 0.5 0 100 k=8 k = 64 k = 128 200 300 400 Module cycles Figure 12-6 Jump response ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 12-11 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Technical Data The technical data of the 2 AI HS U high speed electronic module is listed below. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W H D (mm) Weight Interference Suppression, Limits of Error 106451 Interference voltage suppression for f=n x (f1"1%) (f1=interference frequency; n=1,2...) approx. 20 g Module-Specific Data Number of inputs Common-mode interference Series-mode interference 2 Line length Shielded max. 200 m Protection of the electronic mod- external protective ule against surge stress device in the power to IEC801-5 supply and signal lines required Number of times the electronic module can be plugged into a TB 16IM-SC Voltages, Currents, Potentials Reversed polarity protection yes Temperature error (relative to rated input range) " 0.01%/K no Linearity error (relative to rated input range) " 0.05% no Statuses, Interrupts, Diagnostics Permissible potential difference Interrupts Between inputs and DC 2 V/ AC 2 VSS Power input From supply voltage L+ max. 30 mA Power loss of the module typ. 0.6 W 12-12 " 1.0% no Between channels and power ground (VCM ) >50 dB " 0.1% Between channels and SC Between channels at 50 Hz/60 Hz Repeatability in settled state at 25C, (relative to rated input range) Galvanic isolation supply of electronics Crosstalk between inputs Basic error limit (operational limit at 25C, relative to rated in" 0.7% put range) Rated supply voltage of the elecDC 24 V tronics L+ bus (peak value of interference < >70 dB (with rated value of input range) smoothing factor k = 128) Operational limit (in entire temperature range, relative to rated input range) max. 20 >50 dB none Diagnostic functions no Fault display on module Readable diagnostic function no ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Analog value formation Measurement principle Sensor Selection Data instantaneous value encoding Input ranges (rated values)/input resistance Parameterized Time constant of the input no Permitted input voltage For voltage input (destruction limit) 300 " 20 % Conversion time in ms Resolution (incl. overrange/ Connection of sensors 2 Conversion time/resolution per channel filter in s representation in two's complement) - S7 format/S5 format "10 V/approx. 100kW max.20 V permanent; 75 V for max. 1 s (pulse duty factor 1:20) For voltage measurement possible Characteristic curve linearization no Temperature compensation no Smoothing of measured values yes; set by parameters in 4 steps by digital filtering "10 V/12 bits incl. sign Step None Weak Medium Strong ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Time constant 1x cycle time 8x cycle time 64x cycle time 128x cycle time 12-13 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data 12.3 Analog Electronic Module 2 AI I (...123-1GB00...) Order Number 6ES7 123-1GB00-0AB0 Characteristics The 2 AI I analog electronic module is an analog input module with the following characteristics: 2 inputs for current measurement Input ranges " 20 mA and 4...20 mA 13/12-bit resolution Input range selection Isolation from the SC bus Permissible common-mode voltage of AC 2 VSS Front Elevation/ Side Elevation The figure below shows the front elevation and the side elevation of the twochannel input module. The circuit shematic is shown on the front elevation of the input module. In its operative state the circuit schematic is covered by the labeling strip. Front elevation Side elevation The used terminals are shaded gray. A1 A2 A3 A4 Slot 1 is shown. Figure 12-7 Front and Side Elevations of the 2 AI I Analog Electronic Module 12-14 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 12-8 shows the block diagram of the 2 AI I analog electronic module. 1 M0+ A ADC 3 M0- 2 M1+ Galvanic isolation SC bus A 4 M1- Logic and interface circuit L+ Internal supply M Figure 12-8 Block Diagram of the 2 AI I Analog Electronic Module ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 12-15 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Parameters Table 12-3 The 2 AI I electronic module uses the following parameters: Static Parameters of the 2 AI I Electronic Module Value Range Parameter Measurement type Default Parameters Deactivated Scope Channel Current (4-wire measuring transducer) Current (4-wire measuring transducer) Measurement range (4-wire 4...20 mA measuring transducer) " 20 mA 4...20 mA Channel Interference frequency sup- 50 Hz (integration time 60 pression ms) 50 Hz Module None Channel SIMATIC S7 Channel 60 Hz (integration time 50 ms) Smoothing None Weak Medium Strong Format SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC S5 Default Parameters 12-16 If you have not set the parameters of the 2 AI I electronic module using the specified software (see Chapter 4), the default settings apply to both input channels after a restart (see Table 12-3). ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Time Response of the Digital First-Order Low-Pass Filter Calculation of the Time Response The smoothing is adjustable in 4 steps. Smoothing factor k multiplied by the cycle time of the electronic module corresponds to the time constant of the smoothing filter. Smoothing factor: k: None 1 Weak 8 Medium 64 Strong 128 You can calculate the time response for any jump of the input value x and the smoothing factor k by using the following formula: x ) (k - 1) yn-1 yn : + n k yn = value passed to system in cycle n Jump Response Figure 12-9 shows the jump response for various smoothing factors, depending on the number of module cycles. Jump Response 1 0.63 0.5 0 100 k=8 k = 64 k = 128 200 300 400 Module cycles Figure 12-9 Jump Response ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 12-17 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Technical Data The technical data of the 2 AI I electronic module is listed below. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W H D (mm) Weight Interference Suppression, Limits of Error 106451 Interference voltage suppression for f=n x (f1"1%) (f1=interference frequency; n=1,2...) approx. 20 g Module-Specific Data Number of inputs Common-mode interference Series-mode interference 2 Line length Shielded (peak value of interference < >70 dB rated value of input range) max. 200 m Protection of the electronic mod- external protective ule against surge stress device in the power to IEC801-5 supply and signal lines required Number of times the electronic module can be plugged into a TB 16 SC max. 20 Rated supply voltage of the elecDC 24 V tronics L+ Reversed polarity protection yes Galvanic isolation Between channels and SC no Between channels and power supply of electronics Between channels at 50 Hz/60 Hz >50 dB Operational limit (in entire temperature range, relative to rated input range) " 1.0% Temperature error (relative to rated input range) " 0.01%/K Linearity error (relative to rated input range) " 0.05% Repeatability in settled state at 25C, (relative to rated input range) " 0.1% Statuses, Interrupts, Diagnostics no Interrupts no none Diagnostic functions Permissible potential difference Between inputs and ground (VCM) Crosstalk between inputs Basic error limit (operational limit at 25C, relative to rated in" 0.8% put range) Voltages, Currents, Potentials bus >90 dB DC 2 V/ AC 2 VSS Fault display on module no Readable diagnostic function no Power input From supply voltage L+ max. 30 mA Power loss of the module typ. 0.6 W 12-18 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Analog value formation Measurement principle Sensor Selection Data integrative Integration and conversion time/ resolution per channel Parameterized yes Integration time in ms 50 60 Conversion time in ms 55 65 Resolution (incl. overrange/ representation in two's complement) Input ranges (rated values)/input resistance "20 mA/50 W 4...20 mA/50 W Permissible input current For current input (destruction limit) 40 mA, permanent Connection of sensors For voltage measurement - "20 mA 13 bits - 4...20 mA 12 bits - As 2-wire measuring transducer possible; with external measuring transducer feed - As 4-wire measuring transducer possible Characteristic curve linearization no Temperature compensation no Smoothing of measured values yes; set by parameters in 4 steps by digital filtering Step None Weak Medium Strong ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Time constant 1x cycle time 8x cycle time 64x cycle time 128x cycle time 12-19 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data 12.4 Analog Electronic Module 2 AI I (...123-1GB10-...) Order Number 6ES7 123-1GB10-0AB0 Characteristics The 2 AI I analog electronic module is an analog input module with the following characteristics: 2 inputs for current measurement Input ranges " 20 mA and 4...20 mA 13/12-bit resolution Basic error 0.1 %; operating error 0.3 % Input range selection Isolation from the SC bus Permissible common-mode voltage of AC 2 VSS Front Elevation/ Side Elevation The figure below shows the front elevation and the side elevation of the twochannel input module. The circuit shematic is shown on the front elevation of the input module. In its operative state the circuit schematic is covered by the labeling strip. Front elevation Side elevation The used terminals are shaded gray. A1 A2 A3 A4 Slot 1 is shown Figure 12-10 Front and Side Elevations of the 2 AI I Analog Electronic Module 12-20 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 12-8 shows the block diagram of the 2 AI I analog electronic module. 1 M0+ A ADC 3 M0- 2 M1+ Galvanic isolation SC bus A 4 M1- Logic and interface circuit L+ Internal supply M Figure 12-11 Block Diagram of the 2 AI I Analog Electronic Module ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 12-21 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Parameters Table 12-4 The 2 AI I electronic module uses the following parameters: Static Parameters of the 2 AI I Electronic Module Value Range Parameter Measurement type Default Parameters Deactivated Scope Channel Current (4-wire measuring transducer) Current (4-wire measuring transducer) Measurement range (4-wire 4...20 mA measuring transducer) " 20 mA 4...20 mA Channel Interference frequency sup- 50 Hz (integration time pression 60 ms) 50 Hz Module None Channel SIMATIC S7 Channel 60 Hz (integration time 50 ms) Smoothing None Weak Medium Strong Format SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC S5 Default Parameters 12-22 If you have not set the parameters of the 2 AI I electronic module using the specified software (see Chapter 4), the default settings apply to both input channels after a restart (see Table 12-3). ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Time Response of the Digital First-Order Low-Pass Filter Calculation of the Time Response The smoothing is adjustable in 4 steps. Smoothing factor k multiplied by the cycle time of the electronic module corresponds to the time constant of the smoothing filter. Smoothing factor: k: None 1 Weak 8 Medium 64 Strong 128 You can calculate the time response for any jump of the input value x and the smoothing factor k by using the following formula: x ) (k - 1) yn-1 yn : + n k yn = value passed to system in cycle n Jump Response Figure 12-9 shows the jump response for various smoothing factors, depending on the number of module cycles. Jump Response 1 0.63 0.5 0 100 k=8 k = 64 k = 128 200 300 400 Module cycles Figure 12-12 Jump Response ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 12-23 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Technical Data The technical data of the 2 AI I electronic module is listed below. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W H D (mm) Weight Interference Suppression, Limits of Error 106451 Interference voltage suppression for f=n x (f1"1%) (f1=interference frequency; n=1,2...) approx. 20 g Module-Specific Data Number of inputs Common-mode interference Series-mode interference 2 Line length Shielded (peak value of interference < >70 dB rated value of input range) max. 200 m Protection of the electronic mod- external protective ule against surge stress device in the power to IEC801-5 supply and signal lines required Number of times the electronic module can be plugged into a TB 16 SC max. 20 Rated supply voltage of the elecDC 24 V tronics L+ Reversed polarity protection yes Galvanic isolation Between channels and SC no Between channels and power supply of electronics Between channels at 50 Hz/60 Hz >50 dB Operational limit (in entire temperature range, relative to rated input range) " 0.3% Temperature error (relative to rated input range) " 0.01%/K Linearity error (relative to rated input range) " 0.05% Repeatability in settled state at 25C, (relative to rated input range) " 0.06% Statuses, Interrupts, Diagnostics no Interrupts no none Diagnostic functions Permissible potential difference Between inputs and ground (VCM) Crosstalk between inputs Basic error limit (operational limit at 25C, relative to rated in" 0.1% put range) Voltages, Currents, Potentials bus >90 dB DC 2 V/ AC 2 VSS Fault display on module no Readable diagnostic function no Power input From supply voltage L+ max. 30 mA Power loss of the module typ. 0.6 W 12-24 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Analog value formation Measurement principle Sensor Selection Data integrative Integration and conversion time/ resolution per channel Parameterized yes Integration time in ms 50 60 Conversion time in ms 55 65 Resolution (incl. overrange/ representation in two's complement) Input ranges (rated values)/input resistance "20 mA/50 W 4...20 mA/50 W Permissible input current For current input (destruction limit) 40 mA, permanent Connection of sensors For voltage measurement - "20 mA 13 bits - 4...20 mA 12 bits - As 2-wire measuring transducer possible; with external measuring transducer feed - As 4-wire measuring transducer possible Characteristic curve linearization no Temperature compensation no Smoothing of measured values yes; set by parameters in 4 steps by digital filtering Step None Weak Medium Strong ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Time constant 1x cycle time 8x cycle time 64x cycle time 128x cycle time 12-25 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data 12.5 High-Speed Analog Electronic Module 2 AI HS I (0/4-20 mA, 4-Wire Measuring Transducer) Order Number 6ES7 123-1GB60-0AB0 Characteristics The 2 AI HS I high-speed analog electronic module is an analog input module with the following characteristics: 2 inputs for current measurement Input ranges 0/4...20 mA 12 bit resolution Input range selection Isolation from the SC bus Permissible common-mode voltage AC 2 VSS Front Elevation/ Side Elevation The figure below shows the front elevation and the side elevation of the twochannel input module. The circuit shematic is shown on the front elevation of the input module. In its operative state the circuit schematic is covered by the labeling strip. Front elevation 2 HS Side elevation AI I 6ES7123-1GB60-0AB0 The used terminals are shaded gray. A1 A2 A3 A4 Slot 1 is shown. Figure 12-13 Front and Side Elevations of the 2 AI HS I High-Speed Analog Electronic Module (0/4-20mA, 4-Wire Measuring Transducer) 12-26 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 12-14 shows the block diagram of the 2 AI HS I high-speed analog electronic module (0/4-20mA, 4-wire measuring transducer). 1 M0+ A ADC 3 M0- 2 M1+ Galvanic isolation A 4 M1- Logic and interface circuit SC bus L+ Internal supply M Figure 12-14 Block Diagram of the 2 AI HS I High-Speed Analog Electronic Module (0/4-20mA, 4-Wire Measuring Transducer) Note The current limitation applies to both measuring transducers of the 2 AI HS I analog electronic module. If a short circuit occurs at one measuring transducer and thus activates current limitation, the second measuring transducer does not indicate a valid value. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 12-27 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Parameters Table 12-5 The 2 AI HS I electronic module uses the following parameters: Static Parameters of the 2 AI HS I Electronic Module Parameter Measurement type Value Range Default Parameters Deactivated Scope Channel Current (4-wire measuring transducer) Current (4-wire measuring transducer) Measurement range (4-wire 4...20 mA measuring transducer) " 20 mA 4...20 mA Channel Smoothing None Channel SIMATIC S7 Channel None Weak Medium Strong Format SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC S5 Default Parameters 12-28 If you have not set the parameters of the 2 AI HS I electronic module using the specified software (see Chapter 4), the default settings of all parameters apply to both input channels after a restart (see Table 12-3). ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Time Response of the Digital First-Order Low-Pass Filter Calculation of the Time Response The smoothing is adjustable in 4 steps. Smoothing factor k multiplied by the cycle time of the electronic module corresponds to the time constant of the smoothing filter. Smoothing factor: k: None 1 Weak 8 Medium 64 Strong 128 You can calculate the time response for any jump of the input value x and the smoothing factor k by using the following formula: x ) (k - 1) yn-1 yn : + n k yn = value passed to system in current cycle n Jump Response Figure 12-9 shows the jump response for various smoothing factors, depending on the number of module cycles. Jump Response 1 0.63 0.5 0 100 k=8 k = 64 k = 128 200 300 400 Module cycles Figure 12-15 Jump Response ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 12-29 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Technical Data The technical data of the 2 AI HS I electronic module is listed below. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W H D (mm) Weight Interference Suppression, Limits of Error 106451 Interference voltage suppression for f=n x (f1"1%) (f1=interference frequency; n=1,2...) approx. 20 g Module-Specific Data Number of inputs Common-mode interference Series-mode interference 2 Line length Shielded max. 200 m Protection of the electronic mod- external protective ule against surge stress device in the power to IEC801-5 supply and signal lines required Number of times the electronic module can be plugged into a TB 16IM-SC max. 20 Reversed polarity protection yes Galvanic isolation Between channels and SC no Between channels and power no supply of electronics Between channels DC 2 V/ AC 2 VSS From supply voltage L+ max. 30 mA Power loss of the module typ. 0.6 W " 1.0% Temperature error (relative to rated input) " 0.01%/K Linearity error (relative to rated input range) " 0.05% Repeatability in settled state at 25C, (relative to rated input range) " 0.1% Interrupts Power input > 50 dB Statuses, Interrupts, Diagnostics Between inputs and 12-30 at 50 Hz/60 Hz no Permissible potential difference ground (VCM ) Crosstalk between inputs Basic error limit (operational limit at 25C, relative to rated in" 0.7% put range) Rated supply voltage of the elecDC 24 V tronics L+ bus (peak value of interference < >70 dB (with rated value of input range) smoothing factor k = 128) Operational limit (in entire temperature range, relative to rated input range) Voltages, Currents, Potentials >50 dB none Diagnostic functions no Fault display on module Readable diagnostic function no ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Analog value formation Measurement principle Instantaneous value encoding Sensor Selection Data Input ranges (rated values)/input resistance "20 mA/approx. 50 W 4...20 mA/approx. 50 W Permitted input current For current input (destruction limit) 35 mA, permanent; 150mA for max. 1s; (pulse duty factor 1:20) Conversion time/resolution per channel Parameterized Time constant of the input no typ. 1 ms filter Conversion time in ms Resolution (incl. overrange/ 1 Connection of sensors For current measurement representation in two's complement) - - "20 mA 12 bits incl. sign - 4...20 mA 11 bits As 4-wire measuring transducer possible Characteristic curve linearization no Temperature compensation no Smoothing of measured values yes; set by parameters in 4 steps by digital filtering Step None Weak Medium Strong ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Time constant 1x cycle time 8x cycle time 64x cycle time 128x cycle time 12-31 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data 12.6 High-Speed Analog Electronic Module 2 AI HS I (4-20 mA, 2-Wire Measuring Transducer) Order Number 6ES7 123-1GB50-0AB0 Characteristics The 2 AI HS I high-speed analog electronic module is an analog input module with the following characteristics: 2 inputs for current measurement Input ranges 4...20 mA 12 bit resolution Short circuit-proof supply of the measuring transducers Isolation from the SC bus Front Elevation/ Side Elevation Common-mode voltage irrelevant The figure below shows the front elevation and the side elevation of the twochannel input module. The circuit shematic is shown on the front elevation of the input module. In its operative state the circuit schematic is covered by the labeling strip. Front elevation Side elevation 2 AI HS I 6ES7123-1GB50-0AB0 TR TR The used terminals are shaded gray. A1 A2 A3 A4 Slot 1 is shown. Figure 12-16 Front and Side Elevations of the 2 AI HS I High-Speed Analog Electronic Module (4-20mA, 2-Wire Measuring Transducer) 12-32 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 12-17 shows the block diagram of the 2 AI HS I high-speed analog electronic module (4-20mA, 2-wire measuring transducer). 1 M0+ TR ADC 3 M0- 2 M1+ Galvanic isolation SC bus TR 4 M1- Logic and interface circuit Current limitation L+ Internal supply M Figure 12-17 Block Diagram of the 2 AI HS I High-Speed Analog Electronic Module (4-20mA, 2-Wire Measuring Transducer) ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 12-33 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Parameters Table 12-6 The 2 AI HS I high-speed electronic module (4-20mA, 2-wire measuring transducer) uses the following parameters: Static Parameters of the 2 AI HS I Electronic Module (4-20mA, 2-Wire Measuring Transducer) Value Range Parameter Measurement type Default Parameters Deactivated Scope Channel Current (2-wire measuring transducer) Current (2-wire measuring transducer) Measurement range (4-wire 4...20 mA measuring transducer) 4...20 mA Channel Smoothing None Channel SIMATIC S7 Channel None Weak Medium Strong Format SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC S5 Defaultparameter 12-34 If you have not set the parameters of the 2 AI HS I high-speed electronic module (4-20mA, 2-wire measuring transducer) using the specified software (see Chapter 4), the default settings for all parameters apply to both input channels after a restart (see Table 12-6). ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Time Response of the Digital First-Order Low-Pass Filter Calculation of the Time Response The smoothing is adjustable in 4 steps. Smoothing factor k multiplied by the cycle time of the electronic module corresponds to the time constant of the smoothing filter. Smoothing factor: k: None 1 Weak 8 Medium 64 Strong 128 You can calculate the time response for any jump of the input value x and the smoothing factor k by using the following formula: x ) (k - 1) yn-1 yn : + n k yn = value passed to the system in the current cycle n Jump Response Figure 12-18 shows the jump response for various smoothing factors, depending on the number of module cycles. Jump Response 1 0.63 0.5 0 100 k=8 k = 64 k = 128 200 300 400 Module cycles Figure 12-18 Jump response ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 12-35 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Technical Data The technical data of the 2 AI HS I high-speed electronic module (4-20mA, 2-wire measuring transducer) is listed below. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W H D (mm) Weight Interference Suppression, Limits of Error 106451 Interference voltage suppression for f=n x (f1"1%) (f1=interference frequency; n=1,2...) approx. 20 g Module-Specific Data Number of inputs Common-mode interference Series-mode interference 2 >70 dB (with (peak value of interference < smoothing factor k = 128) rated value of input range) Line length Shielded max. 200 m Protection of the electronic mod- external protective ule against surge stress device in the power to IEC801-5 supply and signal lines required Number of times the electronic module can be plugged into a TB 16IM-SC max. 20 Rated supply voltage of the elecDC 24 V tronics L+ Reversed polarity protection yes Galvanic isolation Between channels and SC no Between channels and power supply of electronics Between channels Crosstalk between inputs at 50 Hz/60 Hz Operational limit (in entire temperature range, relative to rated input range) >50 dB " 1,0% Basic error limit (operational limit at 25C, relative to rated in" 0.7% put range) Voltages, Currents, Potentials bus >50 dB Temperature error (relative to rated input range) " 0.01%/K Linearity error (relative to rated input range) " 0.05% Repeatability in settled state at 25C, (relative to rated input range) " 0.1% Statuses, Interrupts, Diagnostics no Interrupts no none Permissible potential difference Diagnostic functions Between inputs and no Fault display on module Readable diagnostic function no ground (VCM ) DC 2 V/ AC 2 VSS Power input From supply voltage L+ max. 30 mA Power loss of the module typ. 0.6 W Sustained short-circuit current from M0+/ M1+ against M to 100mA 12-36 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Analog value formation Measurement principle instantaneous value encoding Input ranges (rated values)/input resistance 4...20 mA/approx. 50 W no Permitted input current For current input (destruction limit) 35 mA, permanent; 150mA for max. 1s; (pulse duty factor 1:20) typ. 1 ms Connection of sensors 1 For current measurement Conversion time/resolution per channel Parameterized Time constant of the input filter Conversion time in ms Resolution (incl. overrange/ representation in two's complement) - 4...20 mA Sensor Selection Data 12 bits - As 2-wire measuring transducer possible - Load of the 2-wire measuring transducer up to 750 W Characteristic curve linearization no Temperature compensation no Smoothing of measured values yes; set by parameters in 4 steps by digital filtering Step None Weak Medium Strong ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Time constant 1x cycle time 8x cycle time 64x cycle time 128x cycle time 12-37 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data 12.7 Analog Electronic Module 2 AI TC Order Number 6ES7 123-1JB00-0AB0 Characteristics The 2 AI TC analog electronic module is an analog input module with the following characteristics: 2 inputs for thermocouples or voltage measurement Input ranges for thermocouples of type R, J or K or voltage measurement "80 mV 0.1C/digit or 14-bit resolution Input range selection Linearization of sensor characteristic curves Isolation from the SC bus Permissible common-mode voltage of AC 2 VSS Front Elevation/ Side Elevation The figure below shows the front elevation and the side elevation of the input module. The block diagram is shown on the front of the input module. In the operating state, the block diagram is covered by the labeling strip. Front elevation Side elevation LED Channel 1 LED Channel 2 The used terminals are shaded gray. A1 A2 A3 A4 Slot 1 is shown. Figure 12-19 Front and Side Elevations of the 2 AI TC Analog Electronic Module 12-38 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 12-20 shows the block diagram of the 2 AI TC analog electronic module 1 M0+ ADC 3 M0- 2 M1+ Galvanic isolation SC bus 4 M1- Logic and interface circuit L+ Internal supply M Figure 12-20 Block Diagram of the 2 AI TC Analog Electronic Module ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 12-39 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Parameters Table 12-7 The 2 AI TC electronic module uses the following parameters: Static Parameters of the 2 AI TC Electronic Module Parameter Value Range Measurement type Default Parameters Wirkungsbereich Deactivated Channel Voltage Voltage Measurement range (voltage) " 80 mV " 80 mV Channel Thermocouple with linearization Type R Type K Channel 50 Hz Module None Channel Type J Type K Interference frequency sup- 50 Hz (integration time 60 pression ms) 60 Hz (integration time 50 ms) Smoothing None Weak Medium Strong Reference junction None Module Dynamic reference temperature on the AI RTD electronic module at slot A Dynamic reference temperature Format SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC S7 Module SIMATIC S5 Table 12-8 Dynamic Parameters of the 2 AI TC Electronic Module SIMATIC S7 Value Range Parameter Reference temperature in 0.01 C In 0.01C SIMATIC S5 Value Range In 0.05C - 14500... + 15500 - 2900... + 3100* *The following applies to the SIMATIC S5 value range: Bit 15 14 8 7 6 5 Reference temperature Default Parameters 12-40 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 If you have not set the parameters of the 2 AI TC electronic module using the specified software (see Chapter 4), the default settings apply to both input channels after a restart (see Table 12-7). ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Time Response of the Digital First-Order Low-Pass Filter Calculation of the Time Response The smoothing is adjustable in 4 steps. Smoothing factor k multiplied by the cycle time of the electronic module corresponds to the time constant of the smoothing filter. Smoothing factor: k: None 1 Weak 8 Medium 64 Strong 128 You can calculate the time response for any jump of the input value x and the smoothing factor k by using the following formula: x ) (k - 1) yn-1 yn : + n k yn = value passed to system in cycle n Jump Response Figure 12-21 shows the jump response for various smoothing factors, depending on the number of module cycles. Jump Response 1 0.63 0.5 0 100 200 300 400 Module cycles k=8 k = 64 k = 128 Figure 12-21 Jump Response ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 12-41 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Technical Data The technical data of the 2 AI TC electronic module is listed below. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W H D (mm) Weight Interference Suppression, Limits of Error 106451 Interference voltage suppression for f=n x (f1"1%) (f1=interference frequency; n=1,2...) approx. 20 g Module-Specific Data Number of inputs Common-mode interference Series-mode interference 2 Line length Shielded (peak value of interference < >70 dB rated value of input range) max. 50 m Protection of the electronic mod- external protective ule against surge stress device in the power to IEC801-5 supply and signal lines required Number of times the electronic module can be plugged into a TB 16 SC >90 dB max. 20 Crosstalk between inputs at 50 Hz/60 Hz >50 dB Operational limit (in entire temperature range, relative to rated input range) " 1.0% Basic error limit (operational limit at 25C, relative to rated in- " 0.8% put range) Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated supply voltage of the elecDC 24 V tronics L+ Reversed polarity protection yes Temperature error (relative to rated input range) " 0.01%/K Galvanic isolation Linearity error (relative to rated input range) " 0.05% Repeatability in settled state at 25C, (relative to rated input range) " 0.1% Between channels and SC bus no Between channels and power supply of electronics Between channels no Statuses, Interrupts, Diagnostics no Interrupts Permissible potential difference Diagnostic functions Between inputs and ground (VCM ) DC 2 V/ AC 2 VSS Power input From supply voltage L+ max. 30 mA Power loss of the module typ. 0.6 W 12-42 none Fault display on module no Readable diagnostic function no ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Analog value formation Measurement principle Sensor Selection Data integrative Integration and conversion time/resolution per channel Parameterized Integration time in ms Conversion time in ms Input ranges (rated values)/input resistance " 80 mV/>1MW Type J/1200C/>1MW Type K/1372C/> 1 MW Type R/1769C/> 1 MW Permitted input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) max.10 V permanent; 25 V for max. 1 s yes 50 60 55 65 Resolution (incl. overrange/representation in two's complement) Connection of sensors S7 format "80mV Type J Type K Type R (pulse duty factor 1:20) 14 bit 0.1C/digit 0.1C/digit 0.1C/digit For voltage measurement possible Characteristic curve linearization yes; parameterized Type J, K, R to IEC 584 Temperature compensation yes; parameterized S5 format "80mV Type J Type K Type R 13 bit 1C/digit 1C/digit 1C/digit Internal temperature com External temperature com- possible; one compen- Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz 50 not possible pensation 60 pensation by means of a compensating box looped into the measuring circuit sating box per channel Smoothing of measured values yes; set by parameters in 4 steps by digital filtering Step None Weak Medium Strong ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Time constant 1x cycle time 8x cycle time 64x cycle time 128x cycle time 12-43 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data 12.8 Analog Electronic Module 1 AI RTD Order Number 6ES7 123-1JA00-0AB0 Characteristics The 1 AI RTD analog electronic module is an analog input module with the following characteristics: 1 input for a resistance thermometer or resistance measurement 0.01C/digit or 14-bit resolution Input ranges for the Pt100 climatic range, Pt100 standard range, Ni100 standard range or 0... 600 W Input range selection Linearization of sensor characteristic curves Isolation from the SC bus Permissible common-mode voltage of AC 2 VSS Front Elevation/ Side Elevation The figure below shows the front elevation and the side elevation of the input module. The block diagram is shown on the front of the input module. In the operating state, the block diagram is covered by the labeling strip. Front elevation Side elevation The used terminals are shaded gray. A1 A2 A3 A4 Slot 1 is shown. Figure 12-22 Front and Side Elevations of the 1 AI RTD Analog Electronic Module 12-44 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 12-23 shows the block diagram of the 1 AI RTD analog electronic module 1 M+ ADC 3 M- 2 IC+ Galvanic isolation SC bus 4 IC- Logic and interface circuit L+ Internal supply M Figure 12-23 Block Diagram of the 1 AI RTD Analog Electronic Module ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 12-45 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Parameters Table 12-9 The 1 AI RTD electronic module uses the following parameters: Static Parameters of the 2 AI RTD Electronic Module Parameter Value Range Measurement type Default Parameters Deactivated Scope Channel Resistance 0...600 W Resistance 0...600 W Temperature measurement with thermal resistance Measurement range Resistance measurement with 4-conductor connection Temperature measurement with thermal resistance Interference frequency suppression Pt100 standard range Channel 50 Hz Channel None Channel SIMATIC S7 Channel Resistance 0...600 W Pt100 climatic range Pt100 standard range Ni100 standard range 50 Hz (integration time 60 ms) 60 Hz (integration time 50 ms) Smoothing None Weak Medium Strong Format SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC S5 Default Parameters 12-46 If you have not set the parameters of the 1 AI RTD electronic module using the specified software (see Chapter 4), the default settings apply to both input channels after a restart (see Table 12-9). ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Time Response of the Digital First-Order Low-Pass Filter Calculation of the Time Response The smoothing is adjustable in 4 steps. Smoothing factor k multiplied by the cycle time of the electronic module corresponds to the time constant of the smoothing filter. Smoothing factor: k: None 1 Weak 8 Medium 64 Strong 128 You can calculate the time response for any jump of the input value x and the smoothing factor k by using the following formula: x ) (k - 1) yn-1 yn : + n k yn = value passed to system in cycle n Jump Response Figure 12-24 shows the jump response for various smoothing factors, depending on the number of module cycles. Jump Response 1 0.63 0.5 0 100 200 300 400 Module cycles k=8 k = 64 k = 128 Figure 12-24 Jump Response ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 12-47 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Technical Data The technical data of the 1 AI RTD electronic module is listed below. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W H D (mm) Weight Interference Suppression, Limits of Error 106451 Interference voltage suppression for f=n x (f1"1%) (f1=interference frequency; n=1,2...) approx. 20 g Module-Specific Data Baud rate of the SC bus 9.6 KBaud Number of inputs 1 Common-mode interference Series-mode interference (peak value of interference < >70 dB rated value of input range) Line length Shielded max. 50 m Crosstalk between inputs Protection of the electronic mod- external protective ule against surge stress device in the power to IEC801-5 supply and signal lines required Number of times the electronic module can be plugged into a TB 16 SC max. 20 Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated supply voltage of the elecDC 24 V tronics L+ Reversed polarity protection yes Galvanic isolation Between channels and SC bus >90 dB no at 50 Hz/60 Hz >50 dB Operational limit (in entire temperature range, relative to rated input range) 0...600W Pt100 (climatic) Pt100 (standard) Ni100 (standard) " 1.0% 4 C 8 C 4 C Basic error limit (operational limit at 25C, relative to rated input range) 0...600W Pt100 (climatic) Pt100 (standard) Ni100 (standard) 0.7 % 1 C 4 C 2 C Temperature error (relative to rated input range) " 0.03%/K Linearity error (relative to rated input range) " 0.05% Between channels and power supply of electronics no Between measurement and current channels no Permissible potential difference Between input and ground (VCM) Constant current for resistance sensor DC 2 V/AC 2 VSS approx. 1.5 mA Power input Statuses, Interrupts, Diagnostics Interrupts From supply voltage L+ max. 30 mA Power loss of the module typ. 0.6 W 12-48 after a restart (see Table in settled state at 25C, (relative to rated " 0.1% input range) none Diagnostic functions Fault display on module no Readable diagnostic function no ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Analog value formation Measurement principle Sensor Selection Data integrative Input ranges (rated values)/input resistance Integration and conversion time/ resolution per channel Pt100 (climatic; -120...+130 C) / >1 MW Parameterized Pt100 (standard; -200...+850 C) / >1 MW yes Integration time in ms 50 60 Conversion time in ms 110 130 Cycle time in ms 110 130 Ni100 (standard; -60...+250 C) / >1 MW Permitted input voltage for resistance measurement input and constant current inputs/outputs (destruction limit) Resolution (incl. overrange/representation in two's complement) S7 format 0...600 W 14 bits Pt100 climatic 0.1C/digit Pt100 standard 0.1C/digit Ni100 standard 0.1C/digit with - 4-conductor connection 13 bits Pt100 climatic 0.05C/digit Pt100 standard 0.5C/digit - For Pt100 to DIN IEC 751 Ni100 standard 0.5C/digit - For Ni100 to DIN 43760 50 60 (pulse duty factor 1:20) For resistance measurement 0...600 W Interference voltage suppres- max.10 V permanent; 25 V for max. 1 s Connection of sensors S5 format sion for interference frequency f1 in Hz 0...600 W / >1 MW yes; with compensation of the line resistances Characteristic curve linearization yes; parameterized Temperature compensation no Smoothing of measured values yes; set by parameters in 4 steps by digital filtering Step None Weak Medium Strong ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Time constant 1x cycle time 8x cycle time 64x cycle time 128x cycle time 12-49 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data 12.9 Analog Electronic Module 1 AO U Order Number 6ES7 124-1FA00-0AB0 Characteristics The 1 AO U analog electronic module is an analog output module with the following characteristics: 1 voltage output Output ranges "10 V and 1...5 V 12/11-bit resolution Isolation from the SC bus Permissible common-mode voltage of AC 2 VSS Front Elevation/ Side Elevation The figure below shows the front elevation and the side elevation of the output module. The block diagram is shown on the front of the output module. In the operating state, the block diagram is covered by the labeling strip. Front elevation Side elevation The used terminals are shaded gray. A1 A2 B1 B2 Slots 1 and 2 are shown. A3 A4 B3 B4 Figure 12-25 Front and Side Elevations of the 1 AO U Analog Electronic Module 12-50 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 12-26 shows the block diagram of the 1 AO U analog electronic module DAC 1 QV + 3 QV - 2 S+ Galvanic isolation SC bus 4 S- Logic and interface circuit L+ Internal supply M Figure 12-26 Block Diagram of the 1 AO U Analog Electronic Module ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 12-51 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Parameters Table 12-10 The 1 AO U electronic module uses the following parameters: Static Parameters of the 1 AO U Electronic Module Parameter Value Range Measurement type Default Parameters Deactivated Output range (voltage) Voltage Voltage " 10 V " 10 V 1 ... 5 V Interference frequency suppression 50 Hz (integration time 60 ms) 50 Hz 60 Hz (integration time 50 ms) Smoothing None None Weak Medium Strong Format SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC S5 Default Parameters 12-52 If you have not set the parameters of the 1 AO U electronic module using the specified software (see Chapter 4), the default settings apply to both input channels after a restart (see Table 12-10). ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Technical Data The technical data of the 1 AO U analog electronic module is listed below. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W H D (mm) Weight 206451 Common-mode interference approx. 25 g VCM < 2 VSS AC (50Hz) >30 dB Operational limit (in entire temperature range, relative to rated output range) " 0.9% Basic error limit (operational limit at 25C, relative to rated output range) " 0.6% Temperature error (relative to rated output range) " 0.01%/K Linearity error (relative to rated output range) " 0.06% Repeatability in settled state at 25C (relative to rated output range) " 0.1% Module-Specific Data Number of outputs 1 Line length Shielded max. 200 m Protection of the electronic mod- external protective ule against surge stress device in the power to IEC801-5 supply and signal lines required Number of times the electronic module can be plugged into a TB 16 SC max. 20 Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated supply voltage of the elecDC 24 V tronics L+ Reversed polarity protection yes Galvanic isolation Diagnostic interrupt "10 V 1...5 V no Load resistance (in rated range of min. 1kW the output) max. DC 2 V/ AC 2 VSS Short circuit protection Short circuit current Capacitive load Power input From supply voltage L+ max. 50 mA Power loss of the module max. 1 W Analog value formation S7 format / S5 format "10 V 12 bits 1...5 V 11 bits max. 5 ms Voltage at outputs against ground; QV- Current 0.1 ms Substitute values applicable no approx. 30 mA max. 1 mF max. 15 V permanent; 75 V for max. 1 s (pulse duty factor 1:20) max. DC 50 mA Connection of the actuators - 2-conductor connection possible - 4-conductor connection (measuring lead) possible Settling time For resistive load For capacitive load yes Destruction limit against externally applied voltages/currents Resolution (incl. overrange) Conversion time none none Output range (rated values) Permissible potential difference Between S- and QV- (VCM) Interrupts no Between output channel and current supply of electronics Statuses, Interrupts, Diagnostics Actuator Selection Data Between output channel and SC bus Interference Suppression, Limits of Error 3.3 ms ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 12-53 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data 12.10 Analog Electronic Module 1 AO I Order Number 6ES7 124-1GA00-0AB0 Characteristics The 1 AO I analog electronic module is an analog output module with the following characteristics: 1 current output Output ranges 0..20 mA and 4...20 mA 12-bit resolution Output range selection Isolation from the SC bus Permissible common-mode voltage of AC 2 VSS Front Elevation/ Side Elevation The figure below shows the front elevation and the side elevation of the output module. The block diagram is shown on the front of the output module. In the operating state, the block diagram is covered by the labeling strip. Front elevation Side elevation The used terminals are shaded gray. A1 A2 B1 B2 A3 A4 B3 B4 Slots 1 and 2 are shown. Figure 12-27 Front and Side Elevations of the 1 AO I Analog Electronic Module 12-54 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Block Diagram Figure 12-28 shows the block diagram of the 1 AO I analog electronic module. DAC 1 QI + Galvanic isolation SC bus 3 QI - Logic and interface circuit L+ Internal supply M Figure 12-28 Block Diagram of the 1 AO I Analog Electronic Module ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 12-55 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Parameters Table 12-11 The 1 AO I electronic module uses the following static parameters, which are stored in data record 0: Static Parameters of the 1 AO I Electronic Module Value Range Parameter Measurement type Output range (current) Default Parameters Deactivated Current Current 0 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA Format SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC S5 Default Parameters 12-56 If you have not set the parameters of the 1 AO I electronic module using the specified software (see Chapter 4), the default settings apply to both input channels after a restart (see Table 12-11). ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data Technical Data The technical data of the 1 AO I analog electronic module is listed below. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W H D (mm) Weight 206451 Common-mode interference approx. 25 g VCM < VSS AC (50Hz) >30 dB Operational limit (in entire temperature range, relative to rated output range) " 1.0% Basic error limit (operational limit at 25C, relative to rated output range) " 0.7% Temperature error (relative to rated output range) " 0.01%/K Linearity error (relative to rated output range) " 0.06% Repeatability in settled state at 25C (relative to rated output range) " 0.1% Module-Specific Data Number of outputs 1 Line length Shielded max. 200 m Protection of the electronic mod- external protective ule against surge stress device in the power to IEC801-5 supply and signal lines required Number of times the electronic module can be plugged into a TB 16 SC Interference Suppression, Limits of Error max. 20 Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated supply voltage of the elecDC 24 V tronics L+ Reversed polarity protection yes Statuses, Interrupts, Diagnostics Interrupts Diagnostic interrupt Galvanic isolation Between channel and SC bus no Between output channel and voltage supply of electronics no Permissible potential difference Between reference point of load and QV- (VCM) max. DC 2 V/ AC 2 VSS Actuator Selection Data Output ranges (rated values) 0...20 mA; 4...20 mA Load resistance (in rated range of the output) at common-mode voltage of max. 500W 2V at common-mode voltage of Power input From supply voltage L+ max. 50 mA Power loss of the module max. 1 W Analog value formation Resolution (incl. overrange) S7 format / S5 format 0...20 mA 12 bits max. 600W 0V Idling-proof Open-circuit voltage Inductive load max. 5 ms Settling time For resistive load For inductive load 0.1 ms Substitute values applicable no 0.5 ms yes approx. 16 V max. 1mH Destruction limit against externally applied voltages/currents Voltage at outputs against ground 4...20 mA 12 bits Conversion time none none Current max. 15 V permanent; 75 V for max. 1 s (pulse duty factor 1:20) max. DC 50 mA Connection of the actuators - ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 2-conductor connection possible 12-57 SC Analog Electronic Modules - Technical Data 12-58 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 13 The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module Contents of the Chapter Section Topic Front and Side Elevations 13-2 13.2 Block Diagram 13-3 13.3 Functions of the Counter Module 13-4 13.4 Wiring the Counter and Putting it into Operation 13-14 13.5 Parameters of the Counter Module 13-17 13.6 Subdivision of the Data Areas 13-19 13.7 Application Examples 13-21 13.8 Technical Data 13-25 Order Numbers Product Name Counter module 1COUNT40kHz Characteristics Page 13.1 Order Number 6ES7 127-1BE00-0AB0 The 1COUNT40kHz counter module is a counter for use in the ET 200L-SC IM-SC. The module incorporates a counter that can work in the following range: Counting Range 16 bits (unipolar) Lower count limit 0 Upper count limit +65535 The maximum input frequency of the count signals is 40 kHz. You can use the 1COUNT40kHz counter module for the following types of counting: Continuous counting Single-pass counting Periodic counting What Signals Can the 1COUNT40kHz Count? The 1COUNT40kHz counter module can count signals generated by the following pulse initiators: 24-V pulse initiator with direction indicator (e.g. light barrier or proximity switch) without a direction indicator (e.g. light barrier or proximity switch) ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 13-1 The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module 13.1 Front and Side Elevations Front/Side Elevation The figure below shows you the front and side elevations of the 1COUNT40kHz counter module. Front elevation Side elevation 1 COUNT 40 kHz SIMATIC SC 6ES7127-1BE00-0AB0 1 2 3 4 A L+ B M LED 1 LED 2 The used terminals are shaded gray. A1 A2 A3 A4 Slot 1 is shown. Figure 13-1 Front and Side Elevations of the 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module Status LEDs The 1COUNT40kHz counter module has two LEDs, which indicate the status of the 1COUNT40kHz counter module. Table 13-1 lists the LED displays, giving their display, colour and function. Table 13-1 Display 13-2 Displays, Colour and Functions of the LEDs Color Function " Green This LED comes on when the counter is counting upward (door open and status of the direction input B = 0 signal) # Green This LED comes on when the counter is counting downward (gate open and status of the direction input B = 1 signal) ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module 13.2 Block Diagram 1 A Galvanic isolation 3 B Logic and interface circuit SC bus 4 M 2 L+ Internal supply L+, M jumpered via terminal block 1L+, 2L+ 1M, 2M Figure 13-2 Block Diagram of the 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module Abbreviations Used 1A = count input 3B = direction input 4M = load voltage brought out (neg. potential) 2L+ = load voltage brought out (pos. potential) ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 13-3 The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module 13.3 Functions of the Counter Module Contents of the Section Continuous Counting Section Topic Page 13.3.1 24V Pulse Initiator With/Without Direction Indicator 13-7 13.3.2 Gate Function 13-8 13.3.3 Digital Output 13-9 The counter begins at the lower count limit. If the counter reaches the upper limit when counting upward and there is then another count pulse, the counter jumps to the lower limit and starts to count the count pulses again, thus counting continuously. If the counter reaches the lower count limit when counting downward and there is then another count pulse, the counter jumps to the upper count limit and starts to count downward from there. Counter status Upper count limit Lower count limit Time Figure 13-3 Continuous Upward Counting Counter status Upper count limit Lower count limit Time Figure 13-4 Continuous Downward Counting 13-4 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module Single-Pass Counting The counter begins at the loaded value. In single-pass counting, the counter starts at the loaded value. If the counter reaches the upper count limit when counting upward and there is then another count pulse, the counter jumps to the lower count limit and stays there even when there are additional count pulses. If the counter reaches the lower count limit when counting downward and there is then another count pulse, it jumps to the upper count limit and stays there even when there are additional count pulses. Counter status Upper count limit Loaded value Lower count limit Time Figure 13-5 Single-Pass Upward Counting Counter status Upper count limit Loaded value Lower count limit Time Figure 13-6 Single-Pass Downward Counting Repeated Single-Pass Counting with Door Function Counter status Upper count limit Loaded value Lower count limit Gate start Gate stop Gate start Time Figure 13-7 Single-Pass Counting with Loaded Value and Gate Function ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 13-5 The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module Periodic Counting The counter begins at the loaded value. In periodic counting, the counter starts at the loaded value. If the counter reaches the upper value when counting upward and there is then another count pulse, the counter jumps to the loaded value and starts to count the count pulses again. If the counter reaches the lower count limit when counting downward and there is then another count pulse, the counter jumps to the loaded value and continues to count downward from there. Counter status Upper count limit Loaded value Lower count limit Time Figure 13-8 Periodic Upward Counting Counter status Upper count limit Loaded value Lower count limit Time Figure 13-9 Periodic Downward Counting 13-6 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module 13.3.1 24V Pulse Initiator With/Without Direction Indicator The pulse initiator - a proximity switch (BERO) or light barrier, for example - supplies only one count signal, which must be connected to terminal A on the terminal block. You can also connect a signal for direction identification to terminal B of the terminal block. If you do not connect a direction signal, the counter counts upward. Note the parameterization of the count direction. Signal A Signal B as direction indicator Downward Upward Count pulses upward Count pulses downward Figure 13-10 Signals of a 24V Pulse Initiator with Direction Indicator ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 13-7 The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module 13.3.2 Gate Functions Counting with Gate Functions Many applications require counting to start or stop as of a defined time, dependent on other events. In the case of the counter module, this starting and stopping of counting is effected by means of a gate function. If the gate is opened, count pulses can get through to the counter. If the gate is closed, count pulses can no longer get through to the counter and counting stops. Gate Function The counter module has a gate function. This is controlled by the user program in the CPU. The transmission times must be taken into account here. Example When the gate signal is set, the gate is opened and the count pulses are counted. When the gate signal is taken away, the gate is closed and the count pulses are no longer registered by the counter. The count remains constant. Figure 13-11 shows the opening and closing of a gate and the counting of the pulses. 1 2 3 4 Count 4 Count pulses Gate signal Opening of the gate Closing of the gate Figure 13-11 Opening and Closing of a Gate Terminating Counting with the Gate Stop Function 13-8 You can terminate counting by setting the "gate" bit to "0". ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module 13.3.3 Digital Output Introduction You can store a comparison value on the 1COUNT40kHz counter module. This is assigned to the digital output. The output is activated depending on the count and the comparison value. This section describes the various ways of setting the responses of the output. The digital output of the counter module is only available as a status bit. To operate a digital output, you must read in this status bit, which is in the input range, and output it to a digital output. Comparison Value You transfer the comparison value to the 1COUNT40kHz counter module. Counting is not affected by this. The comparison value must lie within the count range of the counter module. The comparison value is interpreted in accordance with the selected count mode. If you specify a comparison value of FFFFH, for example, in 16-bit mode the number is interpreted as 65535. Enabling the Output The output cannot be activated unless you first enable it by setting the appropriate bit (see also Section 13.6, Subdivision of the Data Areas). Default Setting By default, the output is switched off. Pulse Duration The pulse duration can be set for the purpose of adaptation to the actuators being used. The pulse duration specifies how long the output is to be set. The pulse duration can be set between 0 and 3 s in steps of 100 ms. Digital Output: Logic If you set the digital output: logic parameter to inverted, in its active state the digital output has a 0 in its status bit. This does not take effect until the parameter values are received. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 13-9 The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module Behavior of the Output You can set one of 6 possible responses for the output when the comparison value is reached. The alternatives are shown in the table below. Behavior of the Output Output disabled Underflow Comparison value Overflow The output remains deactivated and is not affected by the events comparison value, zerocrossing, overflow or underflow. Active from comparison value to overflow * Underflow Comparison value Overflow The output is activated when the counter is in the range between the comparison value n and overflow. When the counter is set to a value between comparison value and overflow, the output is activated. Active from comparison value to underflow * Underflow Comparison value Overflow The output is activated when the counter is in the range between the comparison value n and underflow. When the counter is set to a value between comparison value and underflow, the output is activated. Active at comparison value counting upward * t Underflow Comparison value Overflow The output is activated for the length of the pulse duration when the comparison value is reached counting upward. Active at comparison value counting downward * t Underflow Comparison value Overflow The output is activated for the length of the pulse duration when the comparison value is reached counting downward. Active at comparison value counting upward/downward Upward t t Underflow Comparison value Overflow Downward Underflow Comparison value Overflow The output is activated for the length of the pulse duration when the comparison value is reached regardless of the direction of counting. * Note the conditions overleaf = output active t = pulse duration 13-10 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module Conditions When you parameterize the behavior of the digital outputs, you must comply with the following: If.. Then... ...you want to parameterize the output as active from the comparison value to overflow or underflow ...you must ensure that the time between these events is greater than the transmission time. Otherwise, the control pulses are lost at the p output. If the count reaches the comparison value again while the output is still active, no new pulse is released. Another pulse cannot be released until the output is no longer active. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 13-11 The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module Hysteresis Hysteresis is only significant in upward/downward count mode. Hysteresis, which can be set from 0 to 255 allows you to prevent the switching output from changing with the direction signal around the comparison value or the pulse duration from being restarted. If the counter counter reaches the comparison value for the first time after entry, the output is activated. Here are five examples: Counter value Comparison value + hysteresis Comparison value Comparison value - hysteresis Switching output active Figure 13-12 Example 1: The Output Is Set to Be Active from the Comparison Value to Overflow Counter value Comparison value + hysteresis Comparison value Comparison value - hysteresis Switching output active Figure 13-13 Example 2: The Output Is Set to Be Active from the Comparison Value to Underflow 13-12 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module Counter value Comparison value + hysteresis Comparison value Comparison value - hysteresis Retrigger Switching output t t t t active Figure 13-14 Example 3: The Output Is Set to Be Active for the "Pulse Duration on Reaching the Comparison Value Counting Upward" Counter value Comparison value + hysteresis Comparison value Comparison value - hysteresis Switching output t t t Retrigger t active Figure 13-15 Example 4: The Output Is Set to Be Active for the "Pulse Duration on Reaching the Comparison Value Counting Downward" Counter value Comparison value + hysteresis Comparison value Comparison value - hysteresis Retrigger Switching output t t t t t active Figure 13-16 Example 5: The Output Is Set to Be Active for the "Pulse Duration on Reaching the Comparison Value Counting Upward/Downward" ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 13-13 The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module 13.4 Wiring the Counter and Putting the Counter into Operation Contents of the Chapter 13-14 Section Topic Page 13.4.1 Wiring the Counter 13-15 13.4.2 Putting the Counter into Operation 13-16 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module 13.4.1 Wiring the Counter You wire the 1COUNT40kHz counter module as shown in the following figure: Slot A 1L+ 2L+ A1 A 1M Slot B 2M A2 B1 B2 C1 C2 A4 B3 B4 C3 C4 L+ A3 B Slot C M +24V M 24 V Pulse initiator Count pulse Direction signal 0V Figure 13-17 Connecting a Pulse Initiator with a Direction Signal (Example TB 16SC) Note You can run up to 10 counter modules in the ET 200L-SC IM-SC. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 13-15 The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module 13.4.2 Putting the Counter into Operation Characteristics After the power is switched on and before any data is transmitted, the state of the module is as follows: The count is at zero. The continuous counting mode is set. Status messages are updated. The gate is closed. The module is waiting for parameters. 13-16 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module 13.5 Parameters of the Counter Module Parameter In the table below you will find a list of the parameters, their value ranges and default values: Table 13-2 Parameter List Value Range Parameter Default Values Count limit: lower 0 ... 65535 0 Count limit: upper 0 ... 65535 65535 Mode Continuous Continuous Single-pass Periodic Count mode Upward Upward Upward/downward Enable comparison value Disable Disable Enable Digital output: Disable activated on Comparison value to overflow Disable Comparison value to underflow Reaching the comparison value for the pulse duration counting upward Reaching the comparison value for the pulse duration counting downward Reaching the comparison value for the pulse duration counting upward or downward Digital output: Not inverted logic Inverted Digital output: pulse duration 0 ... 3000 ms in steps of 100 ms 0 Hysteresis 0 ... 255 count pulses 0 Count Mode Not inverted You can choose between the following count directions: Upward Upward/downward In the upward count mode the direction input is ignored. Comparison Values You can store a comparison value in the counter module. An output of the counter module is assigned to this value. If the count reaches the comparison value, the output can be set in order to trigger direct control operations in the process. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 13-17 The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module Comparison Value Enabling If the comparison value is disabled, the count is not compared with the comparison value and the output is thus not activated. Default Parameters If no other values are supplied from data records, the counter module works with the default parameters. Peculiarities If the DP line fails or the CPU goes into STOP mode (see Section 13.6, Subdivision of the Data Areas: Note), the counter module continues to count provided the gate was open. When a connection to the DP station is re-established or the CPU goes into RUN mode, and provided the lower and upper count limit parameters have not been changed, you can read the current count. 13-18 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module 13.6 Subdivision of the Data Areas Control Data Control data is transferred from the CPU to the counter module cyclically. Control data amounting to more than 1 byte is stored as follows: n high byte n+1 low byte You can use the control data to change the functioning of the counter module. The following table indicates which function can be affected by which address/addresses. Output Range Module output address + 0 Loaded value Module output address + 2 Comparison value Module output address + 4 0 0 0 Gate 0: Stop 1: Start Output 0: Disable 1: Enable Loaded value job 0: Do not accept 1: Accept Comparison value 0: Do not accept 1: Accept Valid control commands 0: Not valid 1: Valid Module output address + 5 00H Note You generally have to set bit 7 (valid control commands) to 1 in the user program. As a result, when there are changes to the operating status of the CPU or in the event of the DP strang failing or being switched off, you can recognize this and continue to count, provided the gate was open. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 13-19 The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module Input range Module input address +0 Count Module input address +2 Comparison value Module input address +4 Counter running 0: Disabled 1: Running Count direction 0: Upward 1: Downward Output 0: Inactive 1: Active Gate input 0: Stopped 1: Started Loaded value acknowledgment 0: Not accepted 1: Accepted Comparison value acknowledgment 0: Not accepted 1: Accepted Loaded value error 0: No loaded value error 1: Value outside range Comparison value error 0: No comparison value error 1: Value outside range Module input address +5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Valid data 0: Invalid data 1: Valid data 13-20 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module 13.7 Application Examples Example 1 The following example shows how to count upward in a single pass, with gate function, without output. Conditions: The input and output address of the counter module have been parameterized as 0. Single-pass counting Parameterize single-pass counting with gate function without output AW0 = "loaded value" A 4.0 = 0 A 4.1 = 0 A 4.2 = 1 Set loaded value, stop gate, disable output, accept loaded value Loaded value accepted? No E 4.4 = 1 ? Yes Do not accept loaded value A 4.2 = 0 No Loaded value not accepted? E 4.4 = 0 ? Yes Figure 13-18 Example 1 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 13-21 The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module This is the earliest point at which the loaded value AW 0 can be changed Yes Current count = loaded value Enable gate EW 0 = "loaded value" A 4.0 = 1 20 pulses, for example, arrive at the input of the counter (A) Current count = loaded value + 20 Stop gate EW 0 = "loaded value" + 20 A 4.0 = 0 Another 10 pulses arrive at the input of the counter (A) Current count = loaded value + 20 EW 0 = "loaded value" + 20 Figure 13-19 Example 1, Continued 13-22 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module Example 2 The following example shows how to count upward periodically, with gate function, output at comparison value. Conditions: The input and output address of the counter module have been parameterized as 0. Count periodically Parameterize periodic upward counting with gate function, output at comparison value for 500 ms pulse duration Set loaded value, set comparison value stop gate, disable output, accept loaded value accept comparison value AW 0 = "loaded value" AW 2 = "comparison value" A 4.0 = 0 A 4.1 = 0 A 4.2 = 1 A 4.3 = 1 No Loaded value accepted? E 4.4 = 1 ? Yes A 4.2 = 0 Do not accept loaded value No Loaded value not accepted? E 4.4 = 0.? Yes Comparison value accepted? This is the earliest point at which the loaded value AW 0 can be changed No E 4.5 = 1 ? Yes Figure 13-20 Example 2 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 13-23 The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module Do not accept the comparison value A 4.3 = 0 No Comparison value not accepted? Yes Current count = load value Set comparison value = "comparison value" Enable gate E 4.5 = 0 This is the earliest point at which the comparison value AW 2 can be changed EW 0 = "loaded value" EW 2 = "comparison value" (in this example: "loaded value" + 25) A 4.0 = 1 20 pulses, for example, arrive at the input of the counter (A) Current count = loaded value + 20 EW 0 = "loaded value" + 20 Another 10 pulses arrive at the input of the counter (A). As a result, the comparison value is exceeded in this example. Output is set for 500 ms Stop gate E 4.2 = 1 E 4.2 = 0 After 500 ms A 4.0 = 0 Another 50 pulses arrive at the input of the counter (A) Current count = "loaded value" + 30 Set comparison value = "comparison value" EW 0= "loaded value" + 30 EW 2 = "comparison value" Figure 13-21 Example 2, Continued 13-24 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module 13.8 Technical data Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W H D (mm) Weight 106451 Statuses, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Approx. 15 g Module-Specific Data Number of counters 1 Cable length Shielded Max. 100 m Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ DC 24 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Galvanic isolation Between channels and SC bus Between the inputs No No Permissible potential difference Between different circuits Interrupts Diagnostic functions DC 75 V/ AC 60 V Power input From load voltage L+ Approx. 20 mA Power loss of the module Max. 0.5 W 1 green LED each for - Counting upward - Counting downward None None Data on the Count Signals 24 V input signals Rated value For signal "1"(high level) For signal "0" (low level) DC 24 V 11 ... 30 V -3 ... 5 V Input current At signal "1"(high level) Typ. 6 mA Minimum pulse width (max. input frequency) w 12.5 s (40 kHz) Input characteristic curve to IEC 1131, Type 1 Connection to 2-wire BEROs Possible Permissible closed-circuit Max. 1.5 mA current ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 13-25 The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module 13-26 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c A Order Numbers Introduction Should you require additional components for the ET 200L distributed I/O device or should you wish to upgrade the PROFIBUS, you will find the order numbers here for the corresponding components. We have divided the components into: ET 200L components Smart Connect SC components Accessories for the PROFIBUS with a note on the manuals for the different PROFIBUS-DP masters and system configuration software Contents of the Appendix Section Subject Page A.1 Order Numbers for ET 200L Components A-2 A.2 Order Numbers for Smart Connect SC Components A-6 A.3 Order Numbers for PROFIBUS Accessories A-9 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c A-1 Order Numbers A.1 Order Numbers for ET 200L Components Introduction You will find here the order numbers for ET 200L components. Terminal Blocks Table A-1 Terminal Block Order Numbers Description Electronics Blocks Terminal block TB 16L, screw-type terminal 6ES7 193-1CH00-0XA0 Terminal block TB 16L, spring terminal 6ES7 193-1CH10-0XA0 Terminal block TB 32L, screw-type terminal 6ES7 193-1CL00-0XA0 Terminal block TB 32L, spring terminal 6ES7 193-1CL10-0XA0 Terminal block TB 16L AC, screw-type terminal 6ES7 193-1CH20-0XA0 Terminal block TB 16SC, spring terminal 6ES7 193-1CH10-0XA0 Terminal block TB 16SC, spring terminal 6ES7 193-1CL10-0XA0 Terminal block TB 16IM-SC, screw-type terminal 6ES7 120-0AH50-0AA0 Terminal block TB 16IM-SC, spring terminal 6ES7 120-0BH50-0AA0 Table A-2 Electronics Block Order Numbers Description A-2 Order Number Order Number Interface module IM-SC 6ES7 138-1XL00-0XB0 L 16 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BH00-0XB0 L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BH11-0XB0 L 16 DI AC 120 V 6ES7 131-1EH00-0XB0 L 32 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BL00-0XB0 L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BL11-0XB0 L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 132-1BH00-0XB0 L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 132-1BH11-0XB0 L DO AC 120 V/1.0 A 6ES7 132-1EH00-0XB0 L 16 DO DC 24 V/AC 120V/2.0 A 6ES7 132-1JH00-0XB0 L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 132-1BL00-0XB0 L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 133-1BL00-0XB0 L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 133-1BL10-0XB0 L-8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A 6ES7 133-1EH00-0XB0 L 8DI AC 120V/8 DO DC 24V/AC 120V/2.0 A 6ES7 133-1JH00-0XB0 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Order Numbers Supplementary Terminal Table A-3 Supplementary Terminal Order Numbers Description Labeling Strips Order Number Single-tier, 16 channels, screw-type terminal 6ES7 193-1FH20-0XA0 Two-tier, 16 channels, screw-type terminal 6ES7 193-1FH30-0XA0 Single-tier, 16 channels, spring terminal 6ES7 193-1FH50-0XA0 Two-tier, 16 channels, spring terminal 6ES7 193-1FH60-0XA0 Single-tier, 32 channels, screw-type terminal 6ES7 193-1FL20-0XA0 Two-tier, 32 channels, screw-type terminal 6ES7 193-1FL30-0XA0 Single-tier, 32 channels, spring terminal 6ES7 193-1FL50-0XA0 Two-tier, 32 channels, spring terminal 6ES7 193-1FL60-0XA0 You obtain additional labeling strips by quoting the following order number: DIN A4 with 10 strips, 16 channels: 6ES7 193-1BH00-0XA0 DIN A4 with 10 strips, 32 channels: 6ES7 193-1BL00-0XA0 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c A-3 Order Numbers Labeling strips 16 channels Figure A-1 Labeling Strips 6ES7 193-1BH00-0XA0 A-4 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Order Numbers Labeling strips 32 channels Figure A-2 Labeling Strips 6ES7 193-1BL00-0XA0 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c A-5 Order Numbers A.2 Order Numbers for Smart Connect SC Components Introduction You will find here the order numbers for Smart Connect SC components. Terminal Block and Terminals Table A-4 Terminal Block and Terminal Order Numbers Order Number Description Terminal block TB16 SC (screw-type terminal) 6ES7 120-0AH01-0AA0 Terminal block TB16 SC (spring terminal) 6ES7 120-0BH01-0AA0 Supplementary terminal, single-tier (screw-type termi- 6ES7 120-1AH00-0AA0 nal) Supplementary terminal, single-tier (spring terminal) 6ES7 120-1BH00-0AA0 Supplementary terminal, double-tier (screw-type terminal) 6ES7 120-2AH00-0AA0 Supplementary terminal, double-tier (spring terminal) 6ES7 120-2BH00-0AA0 Shield terminal Digital SC Electronic Modules A-6 Table A-5 6ES7 192-0AA00-0AA0 Digital SC Electronic Module Order Numbers Description Order Number Digital electronic module 2DIDC24V 6ES7 121-1BB00-0AA0 Digital electronic module 2DODC24V0.5A 6ES7 122-1BB00-0AA0 Digital electronic module 2DODC24V2A 6ES7 122-1BB10-0AA0 Digital electronic module 1DIAC120/230V 6ES7 121-1FA00-0AA0 Digital electronic module 1DOAC120/230V1A 6ES7 122-1FA00-0AA0 Digital electronic module 1DORel.AC230V 6ES7 122-1HA01-0AA0 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Order Numbers Analog SC Electronic Modules Table A-6 Analog SC Electronic Module Order Numbers Description Order Number Analog electronic module 2 AI U 6ES7 123-1FB00-0AB0 High-speed analog electronic module 2 AI HS U 6ES7 123-1FB50-0AB0 Analog electronic module 2 AI I 6ES7 123-1GB00-0AB0 Analog electronic module 2 AI I 6ES7 123-1GB10-0AB0 High-speed analog electronic module 2 AI HS I 6ES7 123-1GB60-0AB0 (0/4-20 mA, 4-wire measuring transducer) High-speed analog electronic module 2 AI HS I 6ES7 123-1GB50-0AB0 (4-20 mA, 2-wire measuring transducer) Function Modules Analog electronic module 2 AI TC 6ES7 123-1JB00-0AB0 Analog electronic module 1 AI RTD 6ES7 123-1JA00-0AB0 Analog electronic module 1 AO U 6ES7 124-1FA00-0AB0 Analog electronic module 1 AO I 6ES7 124-1GA00-0AB0 Table A-7 Function Modules Description Counter module 1COUNT40kHz ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Order Number 6ES7 127-1BE00-0AB0 A-7 Order Numbers Labeling strip AKL 4 NET 731 6013 Labeling strip AKL 4 NET 731 6013 Figure A-3 Labeling Strips for Smart Connect A-8 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Order Numbers A.3 Order Numbers for PROFIBUS Accessories Introduction In this section, we have listed the order numbers for PROFIBUS accessories which you require for the ET 200L. Further, you will find notes on the different manuals you will require, depending on the PROFIBUS-DP master being used. Network Components for the ET 200 Table A-8 lists all the network components for the ET 200L distributed I/O device which you may require in conjunction with the ET 200L. Table A-8 Accessories for the ET 200 Distributed I/O Device Accessories RS 485 repeater, PROFIBUS -DP, IP 20 Order Number 6ES7 972-0AA00-0XA0 PROFIBUS bus terminator (12 MBaud) (not for interface module IM-SC) Anthracite (without programming port) 6ES7 972-0BA10-0XA0 Anthracite (with programming port) 6ES7 972-0BB10-0XA0 PROFIBUS bus terminator (1.5 MBaud) 6ES7 972-0CA30-0XA0 Bus cable (not for interface module IM-SC) Normal 6XV1 830-0AH10 Drum cable 6XV1 830-3BH10 Direct-buried cable 6XV1 830-3AH10 Repeater adapter 6GK1 510-1AA00 Optical p link modules for gglass fiber-optic p cables bl 6GK1 502-3AB00 PROFIBUS drop cable 6ES7 901-4BD00-0XA0 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 6GK1 502-4AB00 A-9 Order Numbers Manuals for STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 Table A-9 You require one of the manuals listed in Table A-9 to program and commission the ET 200L with STEP 7. Manuals for STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 Manual Contents S7-300 Programmable Controller Hardware and Installation Includes Description of the PROFIBUS-DP interface of CPU 315-2 DP Installing a PROFIBUS-DP network Bus connector and RS 485 repeater M7-300 Programmable Controller Hardware and Installation Includes Description of the PROFIBUS-DP interface in M7-300 Installing a PROFIBUS-DP network Bus connector and RS 485 repeater S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controllers Hardware and Installation Includes Description of the PROFIBUS-DP interface in S7-400 and M7-400 Installing a PROFIBUS-DP network Bus connector and RS 485 repeater System software for S7-300 and S7-400 Program Design Programming manual Includes Description of addressing and diagnostics on SIMATIC S7 System software for S7-300 and S7-400 System and Standard Functions Reference manual Description of the SFCs in STEP 7 Manual for ET 200 on SIMATIC S5 Table A-10 You require one of the manuals listed in Table A-9 to program and commission the ET 200L with COM ET 200. Manuals for ET 200 on SIMATIC S5 Manual Order Number ET 200 distributed I/O device 6ES5 998-3ES.1 ET 200 distributed I/O device 6ES5 998-3ES.2 A-10 Contents Description of master interface IM 308-B for S5-115U/H, S5-135U, and S5-155U/H Handling COM ET 200 V 4.x Description of master interface IM 308-C for S5-115U/H, S5-135U and S5-155U/H Description of the S5-95U with PROFIBUS-DP master interface Handling COM ET 200 Windows Handling FB IM308C ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Type and Device Master Files Type File B All the properties of a DP slave are stored in a type file. You can integrate the type file of the ET 200L (Table C-1) in COM ET 200 as of Version 4.0, COM ET 200 Windows and STEP 7. The type files for the ET 200L-SC (Table C-4) can be integrated in COM ET 200 Windows as of Version 2.1. The type files for a default start-up of the ET 200L-SC with a standard, nonSiemens DP master are described in Table C-14. You can integrate the type files of the default start-up in COM ET 200 Windows as of Version 1.0. If you need the type file, you can get it using a modem by calling +49 (911) 737972 or from the SINEC library in AUTFORUM in CompuServe (GO AUTFORUM). Device Master File All slave-specific characteristics are stored in a device master file (GSD file). The structure of the device master file is laid down in EN 50 170 Volume 2, PROFIBUS. If you need the device master file, you can get it using a modem by calling +49 (911) 737972 or from the SINEC library in AUTFORUM in CompuServe (GO AUTFORUM). ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c B-1 Type and Device Master Files Configuration Software Table B-1 The following table shows the version of the configuration software as of which the ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC are integrated. Version der Projektier-Software Order Number of the Module (6ES7 ... 0XB0) COM ET 200 Windows as of Version COM PROFIBUS as of Version STEP 7 as of Version 131-1BH00 2.1 3.0 3.0 131-1BL00 2.1 3.0 3.0 132-1BH00 2.1 3.0 3.0 132-1BL00 2.1 3.0 3.0 133-1BL00 2.1 3.0 3.0 131-1EH00 - 3.0 3.1 132-1EH00 - 3.0 3.1 133-1EH00 - 3.0 3.1 131-1BH10 2.1 3.0 3.0 131-1BH11 - 3.0 3.0 131-1BL10 2.1 3.0 3.0 131-1BL11 - 3.0 3.0 132-1BH10 2.1 3.0 3.0 132-1BH11 - 3.0 3.0 133-1BL10 - 3.0 3.0 138-1XL00 - 3.2 4.1 B-2 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Type and Device Master Files Most Important Characteristics Table B-2 If you do not have the device master file in front of you, the most important characteristics of the ET 200L distributed I/O device are listed here in tabular form. Data for PROFIBUS-DP DP Keyword in Accordance with EN 50 170 Volume 2, PROFIBUS ET 200L Manufacturer ID Ident_Number See Table C-1 See Table C-4 Supports FMS FMS_supp No No Supports 9.6 kbps 9.6_supp Yes Yes Supports 19.2 kbps 19.2_supp Yes Yes Supports 93.75 kbps 93.75_supp Yes Yes Supports 187.5 kbps 187.5_supp Yes Yes Supports 500 kbps 500_supp Yes Yes Supports 1.5 Mbps 1.5M_supp Yes Yes Supports 3 Mbps 3M_supp No* No Supports 6 Mbps 6M_supp No* No Supports the FREEZE control command Freeze_Mode_supp Yes Yes Supports SYNC control command Sync_Mode_supp Yes Yes Supports automatic baud rate recognition Auto_Baud_supp Yes Yes PROFIBUS address modifiable using software Set_Slave_Add_supp No No User-specific parameterization data (default) User_Prm_Data Yes Yes Length of the user-specific data User_Prm_Data_Len 5 bytes 500H Variable Modular device Modular_Station 0 1 Maximum number of modules Max_Module 0 8 (ET 200L-SC) 16 (ET 200L-SC IM-SC) Maximum number of inputs Max_Input_Len See Table B-3 and B-4 Maximum number of outputs Max_Output_Len Characteristic ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC Maximum number of inputs and outputs together Max_Data_Len Central display of manufacturer-specific status and error messages Unit_Diag_Bit Not used Not used Assignment of values to texts in device-specific diagnostic field Unit_Diag_Area Not used Used Identification of all modules of a modular DP slave Module, End_Module No No No No Assignment of manufacturer-specific error types Channel_Diag to texts in channel-specific diagnostic field * Exception: AC terminal blocks of the ET 200L ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c B-3 Type and Device Master Files Inputs and Outputs with the ET 200L Table B-3 Table B-3 indicates the maximum number of inputs and outputs of the different ET 200L electronics blocks: Maximum Number of Inputs and Outputs with the ET 200L Electronics Block Maximum Number of Inputs (Bytes) Outputs (Bytes) Inputs and Outputs Together (Bytes) L 16 DI DC 24 V 2 0 2 L 32 DI DC 24 V 4 0 4 L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 0 2 2 L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 0 4 4 L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 2 2 4 Inputs and Outputs with the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC Table B-4 Table B-4 indicates the maximum number of inputs and outputs of the different ET 200L-SC electronics blocks. Maximum Number of Inputs and Outputs with the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC Electronics Block Maximum Number of Digital1 Inputs (Bytes) Outputs (Bytes) Inputs and Outputs Together (Bytes) Type File with SI802XA?.2003,4 Maximum Number of Analog2 Inputs (Bytes) Outputs (Bytes) Inputs and Outputs Together (Bytes) Type File with SI802XB?.2003,4 L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V 10 8 18 34 32 66 L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V 12 8 20 36 32 68 L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0,5 A 8 10 18 32 34 66 L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0,5 A - - - 34 34 68 L-SC IM-SC 64 64 128 - - - 1 2 3 4 Only digital input and output modules are connected to the ET 200L-SC. Analog and digital input and output modules are connected to the ET 200L-SC; you can use digital or analog or digital and analog modules on the Smart Connect. "X" = 7, 8, 9 or C "?" stands for a language abbreviation; D = German B-4 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L C Using STEP 7 as of V 3.2 or COM PROFIBUS as of V 3.0 If you configure and parameterize the ET 200L using STEP 7 or using COM PROFIBUS as of V 3.0 (or COM ET 200 Windows as of Version 2.1), you can call on an on-line help system for assistance with your entries. Using Any Configuration Software If you enter the configuration of the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC using a configuration frame and a parameterization frame, you will find the information you require in Section C.3/C.4. Default Start-Up If you run your ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC without parameterization (e.g. with S5-95U), you will find the default configuration for a default start-up in Section C.5. You need only the information in Section C.5. If you want to run your ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC without parameterization, you will find the default configuration for a default start-up in Section C.5. Note When creating the configuration and parameterization frames, you must use the predefined identifiers. If you use the wrong identifiers, the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC cannot work properly. The ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC does not check all the contents of the configuration and parameterization frames for plausibility. Contents of the Chapter Section Topic Page C.1 Identifiers for the ET 200L C-2 C.2 Types of ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC Start-Up C-3 C.3 Configuration Frame for the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC C-4 C.4 Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC C-14 C.5 Default Start-Up C-31 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c C-1 Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L C.1 Identifiers for the ET 200L DP Identifier Table C-1 The various electronic blocks are distinguished by means of the DP identifier within PROFIBUS-DP. Table C-1 lists the DP identifiers for the ET 200L distributed I/O device. DP Identifiers for the ET 200L Electronics Block ET 200L Order Number 6ES7 ... -0XB0 Name of Type File ... .200 Manufacturer ID L 16 DI DC 24 V 131-1BH00 SI0014AX1 L 32 DI DC 24 V 131-1BL00 SI0015AX1 L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 132-1BH00 L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Slot 0 Slot 1 Consistency 0014H 000 017 Byte 2 Digital 0015H 000 019 Byte 4 Digital SI0016AX1 0016H 033 000 Byte 2 Digital 132-1BL00 SI0011AX1 0011H 035 000 Byte 4 Digital L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 133-1BL00 SI0017AX1 0017H 033 017 Byte 222 Digital L 16 DI AC 120 V 131-1EH00 SI002AAX1 002AH 000 017 Byte 2 Digital L 16 DO AC 120 V/ 1.0A 132-1EH00 SI0028AX1 0028H 033 000 Byte 2 Digital L 8 DI/DO AC 120 V/1.0 A 133-1EH00 SI0029AX1 0029H 032 016 Byte 2 Digital 1 2 DP Identifier Address Length (Bytes) Address Area "X" stands for a language-independent version Two bytes each for the input and output ranges C-2 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L C.2 Types of ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC Start-Up ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC Table C-2 In the case of the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC you can carry out a normal start-up (with configuration) or a default start-up (with a default configuration). The table below indicates how the different electronics blocks are displayed in the configuration software and which type/device master files are valid. Types of ET 200L-SC of ET 200L-SC IM-SC Start-Up Display in the Configura- Type File Name tion Software Order Number in the Configuration Software 6ES7...0XB0 Device Master File Name3 Start-Up Type L-SC 16DI DP SI8027A?.200 1 131-1BH10 - Normal (SC digital only) L-SC 16DI /a DP SI8027B?.200 1 131-1BH11 SIEM8027.GSG Normal (SC analog and digital) L-SC 16DI/def. DP SI8027ZX.200 2 131-1BH10 - Default (SC digital only) L-SC 32DI DP SI8029A?.200 1 131-1BL10 - Normal (SC digital only) L-SC 32DI /a DP SI8029B?.200 1 131-1BL11 SIEM8029.GSG Normal (SC analog and digital) L-SC 32DI/def. DP SI8029ZX.200 2 131-1BL10 - Default (SC digital only) L-SC 16DO DP SI8028A?.200 1 132-1BH10 - Normal (SC digital only) L-SC 16DO /a DP SI8028B?.200 1 132-1BH11 SIEM8028.GSG Normal (SC analog and digital) L-SC 16DO/def. DP SI8028ZX.200 2 132-1BH10 - Default (SC digital only) L-SC 16DI/DO /a DP SI802CB?.2001 133-1BL10 SIEM802C.GSG Normal (SC analog and digital) L-SC 16DI/DO/d. DP SI802CZX.2002 133-1BL10 - Default (SC digital only) L-SC IM-SC DP SI802BA?.200 1 SIEM802B.GSG Normal (SC analog and digital) L-SC IM-SC/def. DP SI802BZX.2002 138-1XL00 - Default (SC digital only) 1 2 3 138-1XL00 "?" stands for a language-dependent abbreviation; D = German "X" stands for a language-independent version The extension ".GSG" stands for German, ".GSE" for English, ".GSF" for French, and so on. Note You can also use the SI80__B?.200 type files to configure the existing (only digitally upgradable) ET 200L-SC (131-1BH10, 131-1BL10 and 132-1BH10). You can of course then only use digital SC modules. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c C-3 Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L C.3 Configuration Frame for the ET 200L-SC Introduction If a configuration frame is sent to the ET 200L-SC (or ET 200L-SC IM-SC) that deviates from the default configuration, a parameterization frame must be sent to the ET 200L-SC (or ET 200L-SC IM-SC) as well. In this case, the ET 200L-SC (or ET 200L-SC IM-SC) always expects a complete parameterization frame for all the slots in use. If you have not connected any SC electronic modules in the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC, the module only starts up when there is no configuration available for the Smart Connect part (see Section C.3.3 for an example). Structure of the Configuration Frame The structure of the configuration frame depends on the address distribution of the Smart Connect electronic modules used. The ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC can work with various configuration frames. The configuration frame that can be read from the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC is described below. Possible changes to the frame are also described. Note SC function modules, such as the counter module, behave in the same way as analog SC modules. Table C-3 Structure of the Configuration Frame Configuration g Slot Virtual slot ET 200L-SC (electronics block) Smart Connect SC digital modules (SC) SC analog modules, if only analog modules are used SC analog modules, if analog and digital modules are used C-4 Identifiers (Hexadecimal) in Bytes 0 1 2 3 4 1 04 00 00 AD C4 2 04 00 00 9B 40 3 04 00 00 8F C0 4 to 5 or 7* See Table C-4 6 or 8* See Table C-5 and Table C-6 6 or 8* 7 or 9* ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L Table C-3 Structure of the Configuration Frame, continued Configuration Slot SC digital modules 4 Identifiers (Hexadecimal) in Bytes 0 ET 200L-SC IM SC IM-SC SC analog modules, if only analog Smart Connect modules are used (SC) SC analog modules, if analog and digital modules are used * 1 2 3 4 See Table C-7 and Table C-8 4 5 The slot depends on the type of the ET 200L-SC electronics block; 8 bits of an electronic block occupy one slot Slot Assignment The slot assignment depends on the Smart Connect Modules used: Slot 6 or 8: - For digital modules - For analog modules when only analog modules are connected to the Smart Connect Slot 7 or 9: - For analog modules when analog and digital modules are connected to the Smart Connect Contents of the Section In the following section you will find all the information you need on the structure of the parameterization frame. Section Topic Page C.3.1 Identifiers for the ET 200L-SC C-6 C.3.2 Identifiers for the ET 200L-SC IM-SC C-9 C.3.3 Configuration Frame Example C-11 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c C-5 Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L C.3.1 Identifiers for the ET 200L-SC Identifiers for the ET 200L-SC Table C-4 The identifiers for configuration depend on the electronics block used. Table C-4 contains all the DP identifiers for the ET 200L-SC. Identifiers for the ET 200L-SC Electronics Block ET 200L-SC Order Num- Manuber facturer 6ES7 ... ID -0XB0 L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V 131-0BH11 L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V 131-1BL11 L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 V/0 5 A 132-1BH11 L-SC 16 DI/ 133-1BL10 16 DO DC 24 V 1 2 8027H 8029H 8028H 802CH Slot 0 1 2 3 4 Consistency 4 43 00 00 9F 41 Byte y 66 Digital g 5 43 00 00 9F 41 4 43 00 00 9F 41 Byte y 68 Digital g 5 43 00 00 9F 41 6 43 00 00 9F 41 7 43 00 00 9F 41 4 83 00 00 AF 48 Byte y 66 Digital g 5 83 00 00 AF 48 4 83 00 00 AF 48 Byte y 68 Digital g 5 83 00 00 AF 48 6 43 00 00 9F 41 7 43 00 00 9F 41 DP Identifiers (Hexadecimal) in Bytes Address Length (Bytes)1 Address Area2 Total address length of the ET 200L-SC The address area "Digital" and consistency "Byte" apply only to the electronic blocks. If you use analog modules on the Smart Connect, the address area is "Analog" and the consistency "Word". C-6 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L Identifiers for the Smart Connect with Digital Modules Table C-5 Smart Connect DI SC Input p Byte Output p Byte Identifiers (Hexadecimal) 0 1 2 3 4 1 --- 43 00 00 42 45 2 --- 43 01 00 42 45 3 to 8* --- 43 02 to 07 00 42 45 --- 1 83 00 00 42 45 --- 2 83 01 00 42 45 --- 3 to 8* 83 02 to 07 00 42 45 DI/DO SC 1 1 C2 00 00 42 45 (SC configuration with SC input and output p modules) 1 2 C2 00 01 42 45 2 1 C2 01 00 42 45 2 2 C2 01 01 42 45 3 to 8* 3 to 8* C2 02 to 07 02 to 07 42 45 (SC configuration with SC input modules) DO SC (SC configuration with SC output modules) Identifiers for the Smart Connect with Analog Modules Identifiers for the Smart Connect with Digital ET 200L-SC Modules Table C-6 Smart Connect DI SC Identifiers for the Smart Connect with Analog ET 200L-SC Modules Input p Word Output p Word Identifiers (Hexadecimal) 0 1 2 3 4 1 --- 43 40 00 42 45 2 --- 43 41 00 42 45 3 to 16 --- 43 42 to 4F 00 42 45 --- 1 83 40 00 42 45 --- 2 83 41 00 42 45 --- 3 to 16 83 42 to 4F 00 42 45 DI/DO SC 1 1 C2 40 40 42 45 (SC configuration with SC input and output p modules) 1 2 C2 40 41 42 45 2 1 C2 41 40 42 45 2 2 C2 41 41 42 45 3 to 16 3 to 16 C2 42 to 4F 42 to 4F 42 45 (SC configuration with SC input modules) DO SC (SC configuration with SC output modules) ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c C-7 Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L Note The byte size in the DP identifiers "1" and "2" becomes the word size when the Smart Connect is analog. The word size begins with the value 40H (for 1 word) and ends at 4FH (16 words). If only input modules or only output modules are connected to the Smart Connect, the byte and word size is in the DP identifier "1". If input and output modules are connected to the Smart Connect, the byte and word size of the outputs is in the DP identifier "1" and the byte and word size of the inputs is in the DP identifier "2". For the Smart Connect with digital and analog modules, the total length of the input and output range is a maximum of 32 bytes in each case. C-8 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L C.3.2 Identifiers for the ET 200L-SC IM-SC Identifiers for the Smart Connect with Digital Modules Table C-7 Smart Connect DI SC Identifiers for the Smart Connect with Digital ET 200L-SC IM-SC Modules Input p Byte 1 (SC structure with SC 2 input modmod 3 to 16 ules) DO SC --- (SC structure with SC --output modmod --ules) DI/DO SC 1 (SC struc1 ture with SC 2 input and output mod- 2 ules) 3 to 16 Identifiers for the Smart Connect with Analog Modules Table C-8 Smart Connect AI SC Input p Word 1 --- (SC structure with SC --output modmod --ules) AI/AO SC Identifiers (Hexadecimal) 0 1 2 3 4 --- 43 00 00 42 4A --- 43 01 00 42 4A --- 43 02 to 0F 00 42 4A 1 83 00 00 42 4A 2 83 01 00 42 4A 3 to 16 83 02 to 0F 00 42 4A 1 C2 00 00 42 4A 2 C2 00 01 42 4A 1 C2 01 00 42 4A 2 C2 01 01 42 4A 3 to 16 C2 02 to 0F 02 to 0F 42 4A Identifiers for the Smart Connect with ET 200L-SC IM-SC Analog Modules (SC structure with SC 2 input modmod 3 to 32 ules) AO SC Output p Byte 1 (SC struc1 ture with SC 2 input and output mod- 2 ules) 3 to 32 Output p Word Identifiers (Hexadecimal) 0 1 2 3 4 --- 43 40 00 42 4A --- 43 41 00 42 4A --- 43 42 to 5F 00 42 4A 1 83 40 00 42 4A 2 83 41 00 42 4A 3 to 32 83 42 to 5F 00 42 4A 1 C2 40 40 42 4A 2 C2 40 41 42 4A 1 C2 41 40 42 4A 2 C2 41 41 42 4A 3 to 32 C2 42 to 5F 42 to 5F 42 4A ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c C-9 Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L Note The byte size in the DP identifiers "1" and "2" becomes the word size when the Smart Connect is analog. The word size begins with the value 40H (for 1 word) and ends at 5FH (32 words). If only input modules or only output modules are connected to the Smart Connect, the byte and word size is in the DP identifier "1". If input and output modules are connected to the Smart Connect, the byte and word size of the outputs is in the DP identifier "1" and the byte and word size of the inputs is in the DP identifier "2". For the Smart Connect with digital and analog modules, the total length of the input and output range is a maximum of 64 bytes in each case. C-10 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L C.3.3 Configuration Frame Example 1st Example The following example describes the structure of a configuration frame of an ET 200L-SC 16 DO DC 24V/0.5A with: 2 bytes DO A Smart Connect with 2 electronic modules (SC): 2DI and 2DO The configuration frame thus consists of the 25 bytes described below: Configuration Frame for Example 1 2nd Example Configuration Frame Slot Meaning Virtual slots 04-00-00-AD-C4 1 04-00-00-9B-40 2 04-00-00-8F-C0 3 83-01-00-AF-48 4 2 bytes DO C2-00-00-42-45 5 Smart Connect with electronic modules (SC): 2DI, 2DO. The inputs and outputs of the 2DI/2DO are distributed over 1 input and 1 output byte. The following example describes the structure of a configuration frame of an ET 200L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24V/0.5A with: 2 bytes DI, 2 bytes DO A Smart Connect with 4 digital electronic modules: 22DI and 22DO and with 3 analog electronic modules: 12AI, 11AI and 11AO The configuration frame thus consists of the following 30 bytes: Configuration Frame for Example 2 Configuration Frame Slot 04-00-00-AD-C4 1 Meaning Virtual slots 04-00-00-9B-40 2 04-00-00-8F-C0 3 C2-01-01-AF-48 4 2 bytes DO / 2 bytes DI C2-01-01-42-45 5 SC with digital electronic modules: 22DI and 22DO. The inputs and outputs of the 22DI/22DO are distributed over 2 input and 2 output bytes. C2-40-42-42-45 6 SC with analog electronic modules: 12AI, 11AI and 11AO. The inputs and outputs are distributed over 3 input words and 1 output word. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c C-11 Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L 3rd Example The following example describes the structure of a configuration frame of an ET 200L-SC 32 DI DC 24V with: 4 bytes DI No Smart Connect The configuration frame thus consists of the 20 bytes described below: Configuration Frame for Example 3 Configuration Frame Slot Virtual slots 04-00-00-AD-C4 1 04-00-00-9B-40 2 04-00-00-AF-C0 3 43-03-00-9F-41 4 Meaning 4 bytes DI Note You must always transfer the complete configuration frame to the ET 200L-SC. If you have not inserted a Smart Connect module, a configuration frame is not sent for the SC section (slots 5 and 6). 4th Example The following example describes the structure of a configuration frame of an ET 200L-SC IM-SC with: A Smart Connect with 7 digital electronic modules: 42DI and 32DO and with 6 analog electronic modules: 12AI, 21AI and 31AO The configuration frame thus consists of the 25 bytes described below: Configuration Frame for Example 4 C-12 Configuration Frame Slot 04-00-00-AD-C4 1 Meaning Virtual slots 04-00-00-9B-40 2 04-00-00-8F-C0 3 C2-04-03-42-4A 4 SC with digital electronic modules: 42DI and 32DO. The inputs and outputs are distributed over 4 input and 5 output bytes. C2-48-44-42-4A 5 SC with analog electronic modules: 12AI, 21AI and 31AO. The inputs and outputs are distributed over 5 input and 9 output words. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L 5th Example The following example describes the structure of a configuration frame of an ET 200L-SC IM-SC with: A Smart Connect with 3 digital electronic modules: 22DI and 12DO and with 2 analog electronic modules: 12AI and 11AI and with one counter module (3 words I and O) The configuration frame thus consists of the following 25 bytes: Configuration Frame for Example 5 Configuration Frame Slot 04-00-00-AD-C4 1 Meaning Virtual slots 04-00-00-9B-40 2 04-00-00-AF-C0 3 C2-00-01-42-4A 4 SC with digital electronic modules: 22DI and 12DO. The inputs and outputs are distributed over 2 input and 1 output byte. C2-42-45-42-4A 5 SC with analog electronic modules: 12AI, 11AI and 11COUNT40kHz. The inputs and outputs are distributed over 6 input nad 3 output words. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c C-13 Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L C.4 Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC ET 200L-SC Parameterization Frame All the parameterizable values of the ET 200-SC are stored in the parameterization frame. The maximum length of the parameterization frame is 185 bytes. The maximum length is required for the following Smart Connect module combination: 82AI ET 200L-SC IM-SC Parameterization Frame The structure of the ET 200L-SC IM-SC parameterization frame is identical to that of the ET 200L-SC. In the case of the ET 200L-SC IM-SC you can parameterize up to 16 SC modules. You must not exceed the maximum length of the parameterization frame, which is 244 bytes (see Section 2.4). Structure of the Parameterization Frame The following figure shows the basic structure of the parameterization frame of the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC: Standard section (7 bytes) See Figure C-2 Parameters for the status (3 bytes) See Figure C-3 Parameters for the ET 200L-SC (21 to 185 bytes) Parameters for the ET 200L-SC IM-SC (21 to 244 bytes) See Section C.4.2 Figure C-1 Structure of the Parameterization Frame of the ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC C-14 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L Contents of the Section This section contains all the information you require on the structure of the parameterization frame. Section Topic Page C.4.1 Standard Section and Parameters for the Status C-16 C.4.2 Parameters for the Smart Connect Section C-17 C.4.3 Data Record 0 C-19 C.4.4 Data Record 128 C-20 C.4.5 Data Record 130 C-22 C.4.6 Parameterization Frame Example C-27 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c C-15 Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L C.4.1 Standard Section and Parameters for the Status Overview The standard section is identical for all ET 200L modules. The parameters for the status have an identical structure for all ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC modules. Standard Section The first 7 bytes of the parameterization frame are standardized in accordance with EN 50170 Volume 2, PROFIBUS and contain the following, for example: Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 88H 01H 06H 0BH 80H 27H 00H Station status Watchdog factor 1 Watchdog factor 2 Response delay TRDY Manufacturer ID, high-byte Manufacturer ID, low-byte Group ID Figure C-2 Standard Section of the Parameterization Frame ET 200L: Parameters for Status The next 5 bytes contain the status bytes for the ET 200L. The default assignment for these 5 bytes is: 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H. ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC: Parameters for Status The next 3 bytes are the status bytes. The default assignment for these 3 bytes is: 40H 20H 00H. The meaning of the parameters is given in Figure C-3: Byte 7 7 2 1 0 Bit no. 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Start bit monitoring on Stop bit monitoring on Watchdog basis 0: 10 ms 1: 1 ms Failsafe mode 0: Other DP master 1: DP master on SIMATIC S7/M7 Byte 8 Bit no. 6 5 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Diagnostic interrupt enable Byte 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure C-3 Parameters for the Status C-16 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L C.4.2 Parameters for the Smart Connect Section Overview The parameters for the Smart Connect section are stored in various data records. Table 5-4 shows the composition of the records. Configuration ET 200L-SC The data records for the ET 200L-SC are arranged in the following order: Table C-9 Parameter Record Data Records for the ET 200L-SC Length g Slot Digital SC Modules Only Analog SC Modules Only Meaningg Digital and Analog SC Modules DS0 SC digital 5 5 7 bytes Diagnostic interrupt for the digital Smart Connect modules DS128 SC digital 5 5 7 bytes + 7 bytes per SC module Configuration data for the digital Smart Connect modules DS0 SC analog 5 6 7 bytes Diagnostic interrupt for the analog Smart Connect modules DS128 SC analog 5 6 7 bytes + 7 bytes per SC module Configuration data for the analog Smart Connect modules DS130 SC analog 5 6 7 bytes + 2 bytes per SC module + 5 bytes per channel Parameters for the analog Smart Connect modules ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c C-17 Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L Configuration ET 200L-SC IM-SC Table C-10 Parameter Record The data records for the ET 200L-SC IM-SC are arranged in the following order: Data Records for the ET 200L-SC IM-SC Length g Slot Digital SC Modules Only Analog SC Modules Only Meaningg Digital and Analog SC Modules DS0 SC digital 4 4 7 bytes Diagnostic interrupt for the digital Smart Connect modules DS128 SC digital 4 4 7 bytes + 7 bytes per SC module Configuration data for the digital Smart Connect modules DS0 SC analog 4 5 7 bytes Diagnostic interrupt for the analog Smart Connect modules DS128 SC analog 4 5 7 bytes + 7 bytes per SC module Configuration data for the analog Smart Connect modules DS130 SC analog 4 5 7 bytes + 2 bytes per analog SC module + 5 bytes per channel + 11 bytes per counter module Parameters for the analog Smart Connect modules Parameters for the counter module Note You must always transfer the complete parameterization frame for the configuration of the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC. The information in records DS128 and DS130 for the analog Smart Connect modules must correspond. C-18 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L C.4.3 Data Record 0 Data Record 0 Record 0 consists of 7 bytes (byte 0 to byte 6) and is generated separately for digital and analog Smart Connect modules. Record 0 has the same content for both modules. The following figure describes the structure of DS0 for the ET 200L-SC: Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 07H 5FH 04H/05H/06H Block length S7 constant Slot ET 200L-SC: For analog modules when analog and digital modules are connected to the SC ET 200L-SC IM-SC: For analog modules when analog modules and digital modules are connected to the SC ET 200L-SC IM-SC: For digital modules and for analog modules when only analog modules are connected to the SC ET 200L-SC: For digital modules and analog modules when only analog modules are connected to the SC Byte 3 Byte 4 Record number Record length 00H 02H Byte 5 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0: Diagnostics enabling blocked 1: Diagnostics enabling Byte 6 00H Not applicable Figure C-4 Structure of Data Record 0 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c C-19 Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L C.4.4 Data Record 128 Overview Data record 128 consists of a header with a length of 7 bytes and an additional 7 bytes per Smart Connect module. These are described below. Data Record 128, Header Figure C-5 describes the header of data record 128. Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Variable 5FH 04H/05H/06H Block length: 7 bytes + 7 bytes / SC mod. S7 constant Slot ET 200L-SC: For analog modules when analog and digital modules are connected to the SC ET 200L-SC IM-SC: For analog modules when analog and digital modules are connected to the SC ET 200L-SC IM-SC: For digital modules and for analog modules when only analog modules are connected to the SC ET 200L-SC: For digital modules and analog modules when only analog modules are connected to the SC Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 80H Variable 00H 50H Data record number Data record length: 7 bytes / SC mod. +2 Version identifier Additional identifier/device type assignment Figure C-5 Structure of the Header of Data Record 128 C-20 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L Data Record 128, Contents Figure C-6 describes the contents of data record 128. These bytes are repeated for each Smart Connect electronic module that is connected. Byte 7, 14 to 56 Channel module address of the Smart Connect electronic module Channel module-specific identifier of the Smart Connect electronic module 01H to 08H Byte 8, 15 to 57 01H: 2DIDC24V or 1DIAC120/230V 02H: 2DODC24V0.5A; 2DODC24V2A; 1DOAC120/230V1A or 1DORel.AC230V C5H: AI RTD; 2AI U; 2AI I or 2AI TC D5H: Fast 2AI U or 2AI I E6H: 1AO U or 1AO I (double module width) D9H: 1COUNT40kHz Byte 9, 16 to 58 00H to 1FH or 3FH/ FFH Byte offset, input range of the SC section (see Table C-5) No input Byte offset 31 (ET 200L-SC) or 63 (ET 200L-SC IM-SC) Byte offset 0 7 Byte 10, 17 to 59 6 5 4 3 0 0 2 1 0 Bit offsets 0 to 7: Determine the position within the byte in the input range (not applicable if the byte offset is FFH) Number of channels of the Smart Connect electronic module: 0 - single-channel; 1 - two-channel; 2 - three-channel Length requirements of channels 00 - 1 bit; 10 - 2 bytes Byte 11, 18 to 60 00H to 1FH or 3FH/ FFH Byte offset, input range of the SC section (see Table C-5) No input Byte offset 31 (ET 200L-SC) bzw. 63 (ET 200L-SC IM-SC) Byte offset 0 7 Byte 12, 19 to 61 6 5 4 3 0 0 2 1 0 Bit offsets 0 to 7: Determine the position within the bytes in the input range (not applicable if the byte offset is FFH) Number of channels of the Smart Connect electronic module: 0 - single-channel; 1 - two-channel; 2 - three-channel Length requirements of channels 00 - 1 bit; 10 - 2 bytes Byte 13, 20 to 62 00H Channel-module specific parameters Figure C-6 Structure of Data Record 128, Bytes 7 to 62 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c C-21 Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L C.4.5 Data Record 130 Overview Data record 130 consists of a header with a length of 7 bytes, an additional 2 bytes per SC module and 5 bytes per channel. They are described below. Data Record 130, Header Figure C-7 describes the header of data record 130. Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Variable 5FH 04H/05H/06H Block length: 7 bytes + 2 bytes per SC module + 5 bytes per channel S7 constant Slot ET 200L-SC: For analog modules when analog and digital modules are connected to the SC ET 200L-SC IM-SC: For analog modules when analog and digital modules are connected to the SC ET 200L-SC IM-SC: For digital modules and for analog modules when only analog modules are connected to the SC ET 200L-SC: For digital modules and analog modules when only analog modules are connected to the SC Byte 3 Byte 4 82H Variable Byte 5 Byte 6 00H 50H Data record number Data record length: 2 bytes + 2 bytes per SC module + 5 bytes per channel Version identifier Additional identifier/device type assignment Figure C-7 Structure of the Header of Data Record 128 Data Record 130, Contents C-22 Figures C-8 and C-9 describe the contents of data record 130. A distinction is drawn between single- and two-channel modules. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L Data Record 130, Single-Channel You will find the contents of data record 130 for single-channel modules in the following figure. Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11 Byte 12 Byte 13 07H 01H to 08H 05H 00H Total block length for a module Module address Block length for a channel Channel address Channel-specific parameters 00H Figure C-8 Structure of Data Record 130 for Single-Channel Modules Data Record 130, Two-Channel You will find the contents of data record 130 for two-channel modules in the following figure. Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11 Byte 12 Byte 13 Byte 14 Byte 15 Byte 16 Byte 17 Byte 18 0CH 01H to 08H 05H 00H Total block length for a channel module Channel module address Block length for a channel Channel address Channel-specific parameters 00H 05H 01H Block length for a channel Channel address Channel-specific parameters 00H Figure C-9 Structure of Data Record 130 for Two-Channel Modules Channel-Specific Parameters The channel-specific parameters comprise 3 bytes. The third byte (byte 13 or byte 18) is reserved and preset with the value 00H. The remaining two bytes of the channel-specific parameters are assigned differently depending on the Smart Connect module. The assignment depends on whether the module is an input or output module. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c C-23 Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L Data Record 130, 1COUNT40kHz The contents of the data record for the 1COUNT40kHz counter module are shown in the following figure: Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11 Byte 12 Byte 13 Byte 14 Byte 15 Byte 16 Byte 17 0BH 01H to 08H 09H 00H Total block length for a module Channel module address Block length for a channel Channel address Channel-specific parameters Figure C-10 Structure of Data Record 130 for the 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module AI Module - Byte 11 or Byte 16 Table C-11 The purpose of bytes 11 and 16 of data record 130 for analog input modules is indicated in Table C-11. AI Parameters in Byte 11 and 16 of DS130 Smart Connect Module Measurement Type yp - Deactivated 2AI U Voltage g measurement Bit1 Measurement Range g 1 ... 5 V 7 ... 4 3 ... 0 0000 0000 0001 0111 +/- 10 V 2AI I 1AI RTD 2AI TC 1 Current measurement, 4-wire connection 0 ... 20 mA 1001 0010 0010 4 ... 20 mA 0011 +/- 20 mA 0100 Current measurement, 2-wire connection 4 ... 20 mA 0011 0011 Resistance measurement, 4-wire connection 0 ... 600 0100 0110 Thermal resistance measurement with linearization and 4-wire 4 wire connection Pt100 Kl (climatic range) 1000 0000 Pt100 0010 NI100 1011 Voltage measurement +/- 80 mV 0001 0001 Temperature p measurement with thermocouple p Type R 1011 0011 Type J 0101 Type K 1000 No other values or combinations are permissible C-24 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L AI Module - Byte 12 or Byte 17 The purpose of bytes 12 and 17 of data record 130 for analog input modules is indicated in Figure C-11. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Interference suppression 00 - 50 Hz; 01 - 60 Hz Smoothing 00 - none; 01 - weak 10 - medium; 11 - strong Temperature reference junction 000 - none; 011 - dynamic reference temperature; Number format 0 - S7 format; 1 - S5 format Figure C-11 AI Parameters in Byte 12 or 17 of DS130 AI Module - Byte 13 or Byte 18 The third byte (byte 13 or byte 18) of the channel-specific parameters is always assigned the value 00H for input modules. AO Module - Byte 11 or Byte 16 The purpose of bits 0 to 5 in bytes 11 and 16 of data record 130 for analog output modules is indicated in Table C-12. Bit 6 is always assigned the value "0". Bit 7 specifies the number format: Bit 7 = "0": S7 format Bit 7 = "1": S5 format Table C-12 AO Parameters in Byte 11 or 16 of DS130 Smart Connect Module Output p - Deactivated 1AO U Voltage g output p 1AO I Current output p Bit1 Measurement Range g 1 ... 5 V 5, 4 3 ... 0 00 0000 01 0111 +/- 10 V 0 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 1 1001 10 0010 0011 No other values or combinations are permissible AO Module - Bytes 12 and 13 or Bytes 17 and 18 The second and third bytes (bytes 12 and 13 or bytes 17 and 18) of the channel-specific parameters are always assigned the value 00H for output modules. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c C-25 Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L Counter Module - Bytes 11 to 17 Byte 11 Byte 12 Byte 13 Byte 14 The purpose of bytes 11 to 17 of data record 130 for the 1COUNT40kHz counter module indicated in Figure C-12. Lower count limit (high byte) Lower count limit (low byte) Upper count limit (high byte) Upper count limit(low byte) Lower count limit Upper count limit Byte 15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no. Mode 00: Continuous 01: Single-pass 10: Periodic Count mode 0: Upward 1: Upward/downward Comparison value enabling 0: Disable 1: Enable Digital output: activate at 000: Dispable 001: Comparison value to overflow 010: Comparison value to underflow 011: Comparison value reached as pulse counting upward 100: Comparison value reached as pulse counting downward 101: Comparison value reached as pulse counting upward or downward Digital output: logic 0: Not inverted 1: Inverted Byte 16 Byte 17 Pulse duration [0 to 30] Hysteresis [0 to 255] Pulse duration in steps of 100 ms Activate hysteresis of count pulses at output Figure C-12 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module - Purpose of Bytes 11 to 17 of Data Record 130 C-26 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L C.4.6 Parameterization Frame Example Example The example below describes the parameterization of an ET 200L-SC IM-SC. The Smart Connect contains the following electronic modules: 2DIDC24V (slot A) 2DODC24V0.5A (slot B) 2AI U (slot C) 1AO I (slot D) 1COUNT40kHz (slot F) Table C-13 below shows the contents of the associated parameterization frame: Table C-13 ET 200L-SC IM-SC Example Byte Value Meaning 0 to 6 See Figure C-2 Standard section 7 40H Status byte 0 8 20H Status byte 1; diagnostic interrupt enable: 21H 9 00H Status byte 2 10 07H Block length 11 5FH S7 constant 12 04H Slot 13 00H Data record number 14 02H Data record length 15 00H Diagnostics enable: 0 16 00H Not applicable 17 15H Block length 18 5FH S7 constant 19 04H Slot 20 80H Data record number 21 10H Data record length 22 00H Version identifier 23 50H Additional identifier/device type assignment ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Status bytes y Data record 0 (digital) Data record 128 (digital) C-27 Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L Table C-13 ET 200L-SC IM-SC Example, continued Byte Value Meaning 24 01H Channel module address: slot A 25 01H Channel module-specific identifier: 01H 26 00H Byte offset, input range: 0 27 0AH 28 FFH Byte offset, output range: no output 29 FFH Bit offset: 0; number of channels: 0; output range 30 00H Channel module-specific parameters 31 02H Channel module address: slot B 32 02H Channel module-specific identifier: 02H 33 FFH Byte offset, input range: no input 34 FFH Bit offset: 0; number of channels: 0 ; input range 35 00H Byte offset, output range: 0 36 0CH Bit offset: 4; number of channels 1 (two- channel); output range 37 00H Channel module-specific parameters 38 07H Block length 39 5FH S7 constant 40 05H Slot 41 00H Data record number 42 02H Data record length 43 00H Diagnostics enable: 0 (as DS0 digital) 44 00H Not applicable 45 1CH Block length 46 17H S7 constant 47 05H Slot 48 80H Data record number 49 17H Data record length 50 00H Version identifier 51 50H Additional identifier/device type assignment 52 03H Channel module address: slot C 53 C5H Channel module-specific identifier: C5H 54 00H Byte offset input range 0 55 88H Bit offset: 0; channel number: 1 (two-channel); channel length: 2 bytes 56 FFH Byte offset output range: no output 57 FFH Bit offset: 0; channel number: 0; output range 58 00H Channel module-specific parameters C-28 Data record 128 (digital) Smart C S Connect 2DIDC24V on Bit offset: 2; number of channels: 1 (two-chan- slot A nel); input range Smart C S Connect 2DODC24V0.5A on slot B Data record 0 (analog) Data record 128 (analog) Smart Connect 2AI U +/- +/ 10 V in slot C ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L Table C-13 ET 200L-SC IM-SC Example, continued Byte Value Meaning 59 04H Channel module address: slot D 60 E6H Channel module-specific identifier: E6H 61 FFH Byte offset input range: no input 62 FFH Bit offset: 0; channel number: 0; input range 63 00H Byte offset output range: 0 64 80H Bit offset: 0; channel number: 0 (single-channel); length of the output channel: 2 bytes 65 00H Channel module-specific parameter 66 06H Channel module address: slot F 67 D9H Channel module-specific identifier: D9H 68 04H Byte offset input range: 4 69 98H Bit offset: 0; channel number: 2 (three-channel); input channel length: 2 bytes 70 02H Byte offset output range: 2 71 98H Bit offset: 0; channel number: 2 (three-channel); length of the output channels: 2 bytes 72 00H Channel module-specific parameters 73 25H Block length 74 5FH S7 constant 75 05H Slot 76 82H Data record number 77 1FH Data record length 78 00H Version identifier 79 50H Additional identifier/device type assignment ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Smart Connect Data record 128 1AO I 0 ... 20 mA (analog) in slot D Smart Connect Data record 128 1COUNT40kHz (analog) counter module in slot F Data record 130 (analog) C-29 Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L Table C-13 ET 200L-SC IM-SC Example, continued Byte Value Meaning 80 0CH Block length for channel module 81 03H Channel module address: slot C 82 05H Block length for channel 83 00H Channel address: 0 (one) 84 19H Voltage input: +/- 10 V 85 80H S5 format; interference frequency suppression: 50 Hz; no smoothing 86 00H Not relevant 87 05H Block length for channel 88 01H Channel address: 1 (two) 89 19H Voltage input: +/- 10 V 90 80H S5 format; interference frequency suppression: 50 Hz; no smoothing 91 00H Not relevant 92 07H Block length for channel module 93 04H Channel module address: slot D 94 05H Block length for channel 95 00H Channel address: 0 (one) 96 A3H Power output: 0 ... 20 mA, S5 format 97 00H Not relevant 98 00H Not relvant 99 0BH Block length for channel module 100 06H Channel module address: slot F 101 09H Block length for channel 102 00H Channel address: 0 (one) 103 00H Lower count limit: 11 104 0BH 105 08H 106 AEH 107 38H Mode: continuous; count mode: upward; comparison value enabling: enable; activate digital output at: comparison value counting upward as pulse; digital output logic: 0; 108 07H Digital output pulse duration: 700 ms 109 14H Hysteresis: 20 pulses C-30 Smart Connect +/ 10 V 2AI U +/- in slot C Data record 130 (analog) Smart Connect 1AO I 0 ... 20 mA in slot D Smart Connect 1COUNT40kHz in slot F Upper pp count limit: 2222 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L C.5 Default Start-up Introduction The ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC can carry out a default start-up. When it does this, the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC works with a default configuration. The ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC also runs with the digital default configuration when there are no SC modules connected. The default configuration frame corresponds to the message of the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC when you read the configuration. ! Warning If an SC module fails, in a default start-up the addresses are read in such a way that the failed SC is not included. A device master file provides security here. You can create this with COM PROFIBUS. Contents of the Section This section contains all the information you require on the default start-up. Section Topic Page C.5.1 Default Start-up with Digital Smart Connect Modules C-32 C.5.2 Default Start-up with Analog Smart Connect Modules C-36 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c C-31 Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L C.5.1 Default Start-up with Digital Smart Connect Modules Type Files A number of type files are available for the default start-up. You can obtain these via modem (dial +49 (911) 737972) or in CompuServe in AUTFORUM (GO AUTFORUM) in the SINEC library. Table C-14 Type Files for the ET 200L-SC Default Start-up with Digital SC Modules Name of the Type File Electronics Block ET 200L-SC Configuration Frame L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V SI8027ZX.200 L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V SI8029ZX.200 L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A SI8028ZX.200 L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A SI802CZX.200 L-SC IM-SC SI802BZX.200 The following configuration frames are required for the default start-up of the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC with digital Smart Connect modules: Note When an ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC receives a default configuration frame with 2/4 bytes DI and DO, the module still starts up when there are no SC modules connected. L-SC 16 DI Configuration frame for the ET 200L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V: Configuration Frame C-32 Slots Meaning Virtual slots 04-00-00-AD-C4 1 04-00-00-9B-40 2 04-00-00-8F-C0 3 43-01-00-9F-42 4 2 bytes DI C2-01-01-42-45 5 Smart Connect with electronic modules (SC): 2 input and 2 output bytes ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L L-SC 32 DI Configuration frame for the ET 200L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V: Configuration Frame L-SC 16 DO Slots Virtual slots 04-00-00-AD-C4 1 04-00-00-9B-40 2 04-00-00-8F-C0 3 43-03-00-9F-43 4 4 bytes DI C2-01-01-42-45 5 Smart Connect with electronic modules (SC): 2 input and 2 output bytes Configuration frame for the ET 200L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Configuration Frame L-SC 16 DI/16 DO Meaning Slots Meaning Virtual slots 04-00-00-AD-C4 1 04-00-00-9B-40 2 04-00-00-8F-C0 3 83-01-00-AF-50 4 2 bytes DO C2-01-01-42-45 5 Smart Connect with electronic modules (SC): 2 input and 2 output bytes Configuration frame for the ET 200L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/ 0.5 A: Configuration Frame Slots Meaning Virtual slots 04-00-00-AD-C4 1 04-00-00-9B-40 2 04-00-00-8F-C0 3 C2-01-01-BF-D2 4 2 bytes DO/2 bytes DI C2-01-01-42-45 5 Smart Connect with electronic modules (SC): 2 input and 2 output bytes ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c C-33 Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L L-SC IM-SC Configuration frame for the ET 200L-SC IM-SC: Configuration Frame Parameterization Frame Slots 04-00-00-AD-C4 1 04-00-00-9B-40 2 04-00-00-8F-C0 3 C2-01-01-42-4A 4 Meaning Virtual slots 4 input and 4 output bytes The ET 200L-SC requires the following parameterization frame for the default start-up: Standard section (7 bytes) See Figure C-2 Parameters for the status (3 bytes) Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 00H 00H 00H Figure C-13 Structure of the Parameterization Frame Note A diagnostic interrupt enable is not possible in byte 1 (BIT 5). If you use a DP master for the default start-up that sends only the standard section of the parameterization frame, the start-up is carried out without status bytes (bytes 7 to 9). Default Setting for Digital Smart Connect Modules For the default setting of the ET 200L-SC, 2 bytes each are set in the process image for the digital Smart Connect modules for the input and output of the Smart Connect electronic modules. SC modules Input bytes Output bytes Slot B C D E F G H 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A Byte 0 Byte 1 Figure C-14 Default Setting for Digital SC Modules with the ET 200L-SC C-34 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L Default Setting for the ET 200L-SC IM-SC For the default setting of the ET 200L-SC IM-SC, 4 bytes each are set in the process image for the digital Smart Connect modules for the input and output of the Smart Connect electronics modules. TB 16IM-SC TB 16SC Slots A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H 0 1 2 3 4 5 67 0 1 2 3 4 5 67 0 1 2 3 4 5 67 0 1 2 3 4 5 67 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SC modules Input bytes Output bytes Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Figure C-15 Default Setting for Digital SC Modules with the ET 200L-SC IM-SC Example A default start-up is carried out with the following configuration: ET 200L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5A and Smart Connect: Smart Connect ET 200L-SC A 16 DO DC 24 V/0,5A 2DI B D E F G H 1DO 1DO 2DI 2DO 2DO 1DI 1DI Rel Rel Input word 70 Output word 80 Output word 64 Solution of the Example C Address assignment for the ET 200L-SC and Smart Connect ET 200L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A - On-board I/O device outputs 1 to 8: output byte 64.0 to 64.7 - On-board I/O device outputs 9 to 16: output byte 65.0 to 65.7 Smart Connect: Slot SC Module Address A 2DIDC24V Input 70.0 and 70.1 B 2DIDC24V Input 70.2 and 70.3 C 2DODC24V0.5A Output 80.4 and 80.5 D 2DODC24V0.5A Output 80.6 and 80.7 E 1DIAC120/230V Input 71.0 F 1DIAC120/230V Input 71.2 G 1DORel.AC230V Output 81.4 H 1DORel.AC230V Output 81.6 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c C-35 Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L C.5.2 Default Start-Up with Analog Smart Connect Modules Type Files There are no type files for the default start-up of the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC with analog Smart Connect modules. This is because there is such a wide range of configuration options. Note In the default start-up, the analog Smart Connect modules use the default parameters stored in each module (see Chapter 12). Configuration Frame For the default start-up of the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC with analog Smart Connect modules, an addition must be made to the configuration frame of the ET 200L-SC with digital Smart Connect modules. Use the configuration frame extension shown in Tables C-15 and C-16, and append it to the configuration frame of the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC with digital Smart Connect modules. In addition to analog Smart Connect modules, at least one digital Smart Connect module must be plugged in. Table C-15 ET 200L-SC: Configuration Frame Extension for Analog Smart Connect Modules Configuration Frame Extension for the ET 200L-SC Slot Meaning 43-(40 to 4E)-00-42-45 6 Smart Connect with analog input modules; 1 to 8 modules with 1 to 16 channels, depending on the configuration 83-(40 to 43)-00-42-45 6 Smart Connect with analog output modules; 1 to 4 modules with 1 to 4 channels, depending on the configuration C2-(40 to 43)-(40 to 4E)-42-45 6 Smart Connect with analog output and input modules; 1 to 4 output modules with 1 to 4 channels and 1 to 8 modules with 1 to 16 channels, depending on the configuration Table C-16 ET 200L-SC IM-SC: Configuration Frame Extension for Analog Smart Connect Modules Configuration Frame Extension for the ET 200L-SC IM-SC Slot Meaning 43-(40 to 5D)-00-42-4A 5 Smart Connect with analog input modules; 1 to 16 modules with 1 to 32 channels, depending on the configuration 83-(40 to 48)-00-42-4A 5 Smart Connect with analog output modules; 1 to 8 modules with 1 to 8 channels, depending on the configuration C2-(40 to 48)-(40 to 5D)-42-4A 5 Smart Connect with analog output and input modules; 1 to 8 output modules with 1 to 8 channels and 1 to 16 input modules with 1 to 32 channels C-36 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L Parameterization Frame For the default start-up, the ET 200L-SC requires the following parameterization frame. The analog Smart Connect modules work with their default parameters: Standard section (7 Byte) See Figure C-2 Parameters for the status (3 bytes) Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 00H 00H 00H Figure C-16 Structure of the Parameterization Frame Note A diagnostic interrupt enable is not possible in byte 1 (BIT 5). If you use a DP master for the default start-up that sends only the standard section of the parameterization frame, the start-up is carried out without status bytes (bytes 7 to 9). ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c C-37 Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L Default Setting for Analog Smart Connect Modules For the default setting of the ET 200L-SC, 2 bytes each are set in the process image for the digital Smart Connect modules for the input and output channel of the Smart Connect electronic modules. The identified analog channels are incorporated seamlessly in the slot sequence in the process image. Figure C-17 shows the assignment of the bytes in the process image to the individual channels. Note Unidentified analog channels are not inserted in the process image(because, for example, the SC analog module has been removed or is defective). As a result, the 3rd analog channel occupies bytes 2 and 3, for example. The device master file gives you security about correct addressing. You can create this file with COM PROFIBUS. ET 200L-SC, ET 200L-SC IM-SC: Inputs 1st AI chan. 2nd AI chan. 3rd AI chan. Outputs 1st AO chan. 2nd AO chan. 3rd AO chan 0 Byte 1 3 2 4 5 Figure C-17 Default Setting for Analog Smart Connect Modules Example A default start-up is carried out with the following configuration: ET 200L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V and Smart Connect: Smart Connect ET 200L-SC A B C D E F G H 16 DI DC 24 V 2DI 2DO 2AI 1AI Input word 64 C-38 Input word Output word 1AO Digital: 70 Digital: 80 1AI 2DO Analog: 130 Analog: 140 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L Configuration Frame of the Example Solution of the Example Configuration frame for the ET 200L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V: Configuration Frame Slot Meaning Virtual slots 04-00-00-AD-C4 1 04-00-00-9B-40 2 04-00-00-8F-C0 3 43-01-00-9F-42 4 2 bytes DI C2-01-01-42-45 5 Smart Connect with digital electronic modules (SC): 2 input and 2 output bytes C2-40-44-42-45 6 Smart Connect with analog electronic modules (SC): 1 input and 5 output words Address assignment for the ET 200L-SC and Smart Connect ET 200L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V - On-board I/O device outputs 1 to 8: input byte 64.0 to 64.7 - On-board I/O device outputs 9 to 16: input byte 65.0 to 65.7 Smart Connect: Slot SC Module Address A 2DIDC24V Input 70.0 and 70.1 B 2DODC24V/0.5A Output 80.2 and 80.3 C 2AI U +/- 10V Input word 130 and 132 D 2AI RTD Input word 134 E 1AO I4 ... 20 mA (double module width) Output p word 140 G 2AI I4 ... 20 mA Input word 136 and 138 H 2DODC24V/2A Output word 81.6 and 81.7 F ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c C-39 Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L C-40 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Guidelines for Handling Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESD) D Summary of Sections On Page In Section You will find D.1 What is ESD? D-2 D.2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons D-3 D.3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge Damage D-4 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c D-1 Guidelines for Handling Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESD) D.1 What is ESD? Definition All electronic modules are equipped with large-scale integrated ICs or components. Due to their design, these electronic elements are very sensitive to overvoltages and thus to any electrostatic discharge. These Electrostatically Sensitive Devices are commonly referred to by the abbreviation ESD. Electrostatically sensitive devices are labeled with the following symbol: ! D-2 Caution Electrostatically sensitive devices are subject to voltages that are far below the voltage values that can still be perceived by human beings. These voltages are present if you touch a component or the electrical connections of a module without previously being electrostatically discharged. In most cases, the damage caused by an overvoltage is not immediately noticeable and results in total damage only after a prolonged period of operation. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Guidelines for Handling Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESD) D.2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons Charging Every person with a non-conductive connection to the electrical potential of its surroundings can be electrostatically charged. Figure D-1 shows you the maximum values for electrostatic voltages which can build up on a person coming into contact with the materials indicated in the figure. These values are in conformity with the specifications of IEC 801-2. Voltage in kV (kV) 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 Synthetic material 2 Wool 3 Antistatic material, such as wood or concrete 1 2 3 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Relative atmospheric humidity in % Figure D-1 Electrostatic Voltages which can Build up on a Person ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c D-3 Guidelines for Handling Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESD) D.3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge Damage Ensure Sufficient Grounding Make sure the personnel, working surfaces and packaging are sufficiently grounded when handling electrostatically sensitive devices.You can thus avoid electrostatic charging. Avoid Direct Contact You should touch electrostatically sensitive devices only if it is unavoidable (for example, during maintenance work). Hold modules without touching the pins of components or printed conductors. In this way, the discharged energy cannot affect the sensitive devices. If you have to carry out measurements on a module, you must discharge your body before you start the measurement by touching grounded metallic parts. Use grounded measuring devices only. D-4 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Glossary A Aggregate current The aggregate of the currents of all the output channels of a digital output module. B Baud rate The baud rate is the speed at which data is transmitted. It specifies the number of bits transmitted per second (baud rate = bit rate). Baud rates of 9.6 kbps to 1.5 Mbps are possible with the ET 200L. Bus The common transmission path to which all nodes are connected. It has two defined ends. In the case of the ET 200, the bus is a two-wire cable or a fiber-optic cable. Bus connector The physical link between the bus nodes and the bus cable. In the case of the ET 200, there is a bus connector with and without connections for the programming unit and with IP 20 and IP 65 degrees of protection. C Chassis ground The chassis ground is the totality of all the interconnected inactive parts of a piece of equipment that cannot carry hazardous contact voltage even in the event of a fault. Configuration This refers to the configuration of individual modules in a distributed I/O system. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Glossary-1 Glossary Consistent data Data that belongs together by content is referred to as consistent data. The data must not be corrupted by being read at different times. D Default setting The default setting is a basic setting that applies unless another value is set (i.e. parameterized). Device master file All the properties of a DP slave are stored in a device master file. The format of the device master file is stored in the EN 50170 Volume 2, PROFIBUS standard. Distributed I/O devices These are input/output units that are installed in a distributed configuration at some distance from the CPU rather than in the central rack. For example: ET 200L ET 200B ET 200M Other DP slaves manufactured by Siemens or another company The distributed I/O devices are connected to the DP master via the PROFIBUS-DP bus. Diagnostics Diagnostics is the detection, localization, categorization, indication and analysis of errors, faults, malfunctions and messages. Diagnostics provides monitoring functions that run automatically while a plant is operating. This enhances the availability of a plant by reducing setup and stoppage times. DP master A master whose behavior complies with EN 50170 Volume 2, PROFIBUS is referred to as a DP master. DP slave A slave that runs on the PROFIBUS using the PROFIBUS-DP protocol and whose behavior complies with EN 50170 Volume 2, PROFIBUS is referred to as a DP slave. DP standard The DP standard is the bus protocol of the ET 200 distributed I/O system. It complies with EN 50170 Volume 2, PROFIBUS. Glossary-2 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Glossary E Electromagnetic compatibility Electromagnetic compatibility is the capacity of electrical equipment to work correctly in a specified environment without negatively affecting the functioning of other equipment in the vicinity. Equipotential bonding An electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor) that brings the bodies of electrical apparatus and extraneous conductive bodies to the same or approximately the same potential to prevent interfering or hazardous voltages between these bodies. ET 200 The ET 200 distributed I/O system with the PROFIBUS-DP protocol is a bus for connecting distributed I/O devices to a CPU or an adequate DP master. A feature of ET 200 are its short response times, since only a small volume of data (bytes) is transmitted. ET 200 complies with the PROFIBUS standard, EN 50170 Volume 2, PROFIBUS. ET 200 operates on the master/slave principle. The IM 308-C master interface module or the CPU 315-2 DP can be DP masters, for example. The distributed I/O devices ET 200B, ET 200C, ET 200M, ET 200L or ET 200U can be DP slaves, as can other DP slaves made by Siemens or other manufacturers. F Floating In the case of input/output modules, the reference potentials of control and load circuits are isolated (e.g. by means of an optocoupler, a relay contact or a transformer). Input/output circuits can be connected to common potential. FREEZE This is a control command of the DP master to a group of DP slaves. When a DP slave receives the FREEZE control command, it freezes the current status of the inputs and transfers them at intervals to the DP master. The DP slave freezes the status of the inputs again after each subsequent FREEZE control command. The input data is not transmitted from the DP slave to the DP master at intervals again until the DP master sends the UNFREEZE control command. Function grounding Grounding with the sole purpose of ensuring that the electrical equipment functions properly. By means of function grounding, interference voltages that would otherwise result in inadmissible interference to the equipment are short-circuited. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Glossary-3 Glossary G Ground The conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set to zero at any point. Around grounding electrodes, the earth may have a potential other than zero. The term "reference ground" is frequently used in this connection. Grounding Grounding means to connect an electrically conductive part to the grounding electrode by means of a grounding system. I IP 20 DIN 40050 degree of protection: Protection against finger contact and against solid foreign matter more than 12 mm in diameter. L Load power supply unit A power supply unit for the ET 200L distributed I/O device and the process devices connected to it. M Master When it is in possession of the token, a master can send data to other nodes and request data from other nodes (synonymous with active node). The CPU 315-2 DP and the IM 308-C can be DP masters, for example. N Node A device that can send, receive or amplify data via the bus (e.g. a DP master, DP slave, RS 485 repeater or active star coupler). Non-isolated In the case of non-isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of control and load circuits are electrically connected. Glossary-4 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Glossary P Parameterization Parameterization is the passing of slave parameters from the DP master to the DP slave. Parameters, dynamic In contrast to static parameters, the dynamic parameters of modules can be changed during operation by calling an SFC in the application program (e.g. limit values of an analog signal input module). Parameters, static In contrast to dynamic parameters, the static parameters of modules cannot be changed by means of the application program; they can only by changed by means of STEP 7 (not in RUN mode). An example is the input delay of a digital signal input module. Programmable logic controller A programmable logic controller consists of at least one CPU, a number of input and output modules, and operating and monitoring equipment. PROFIBUS PROcess FIeld BUS, the German process and field bus standard defined in the PROFIBUS standard (EN 50170 Volume 2, PROFIBUS). It specifies functional, electrical and mechanical characteristics for a bit-serial field bus system. PROFIBUS is available with the following protocols: DP (= distributed I/O), FMS (= Fieldbus Message Specification), PA (= Process Automation) or TF (= Technological Functions). PROFIBUS address Each bus node must have a PROFIBUS address (station number) so that it can be identified uniquely on the PROFIBUS. PC/PG or the ET 200-Handheld have the PROFIBUS address "0". The PROFIBUS addresses 1 to 99 are permissible for the ET 200L distributed I/O device. PROFIBUS-DP A draft standard (EN 50170 Volume 2, PROFIBUS) on which the ET 200 distributed I/O system is based. R Reference potential The potential on the basis of which the voltages of the circuits involved can be observed and/or measured. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Glossary-5 Glossary S Slave A slave cannot exchange data with a master unless requested by the latter to do so. Examples of slaves are all DP slaves, such as ET 200B, ET 200L and ET 200M. Smart Connect SC The Smart Connect SC enables the fine adjustment of input and output channels to the process. The ET 200L-SC can be upgraded by means of a Smart Connect. SYNC SYNC is a control command of the DP master to a group of DP slaves. By means of the SYNC control command, the DP master causes the DP slave to freeze the statuses of the outputs at their current value. In the subsequent frames, the DP slave saves the output data, but the statuses of the outputs remain unchanged. After each SYNC control command, the DP slave sets the outputs it has saved as output data. The outputs are not periodically updated again until the DP master sends the UNSYNC control command. T Type file A file required by the configuration software (e.g. COM ET 200 Windows) for configuring a DP slave. The type file contains definitions of the slavespecific properties, such as the number of inputs and outputs, the number of diagnostic bytes, and SYNC capability. U Ungrounded Glossary-6 Not having a conductive connection to ground. ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Index Numbers 24 VDC supply, 3-4 A Actuators on the SC, connecting, 11-26 Address for queries, v for training, v Aggregate current, Glossary-1 Analog value representation of the SC, 11-29 for input modules, 11-1-11-3, 11-32-11-54 for resistance thermometers, 11-35, 11-48 for thermocouples, 11-36-11-37, 11-49-11-50 Analog/digital conversion, 11-8 Applicability of the manual, iii Applications, 1-3 Assignment, slot module, 2-9 Assignment of EB to TB, 8-1, 9-1 B Baud rate, B-3, Glossary-1 BF, 5-2, 5-3 Block diagram, 1COUNT40kHz, 13-3 Block diagram of the analog modules 1 AI RTD, 12-45 1 AO I, 12-55 1 AO U, 12-51 2 AI HS U, 12-9 2 AI U, 12-3 2AI HS I, 12-27, 12-33 2AI I, 12-15, 12-21 Block diagram, electronic module, SC 1DIAC120/230V, 10-12 1DOAC120/230V1A, 10-15 1DORel.AC230V, 10-18 2DIDC24V, 10-3 2DODC24V0.5A, 10-6 2DODC24V2A, 10-9 Block I/O device, ET 200L, 1-3 Bridging voltage drops, 6-9 Bus, Glossary-1 Bus connector, Glossary-1 clipping on, 3-12 C Cable cross-sections, 3-9 Cables insulation stripping length, 3-9 number, 3-9 CE marking, 6-2 Certification, 6-2 Changes, since the previous versions of the manual, iii Characteristics electronics block, 1-7 terminal block, 1-7 Chassis ground, Glossary-1 Circuit schematic, 2-13 Climatic environmental conditions, 6-7 COM ET 200 Windows, 4-2 COM PROFIBUS, 4-2 Compensating box, 11-12 Components of an ET 200L, 1-9 Components, SC, 1-10 Configuration, Glossary-1 Configuration frame, C-4 Configuration frame for the ET 200L-SC, structure, C-4 Configuration software, 4-2 Connect, terminal block, 3-11 Connecting cables, tightening torque, 3-9 Connecting to the SC, loads/actuators, 11-26 Connection rules, SC, 2-13, 2-15 Consistent data, Glossary-2 Conversion time analog input channel, 11-8 analog output channel, 11-24 Counter module, 13-1 functions, 13-4 parameters, 13-17 technical data, 13-25 wiring, 13-14 CSA certification, 6-3 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Index-1 Index Current sensor, 11-15 Customer Support, vi Cycle time in a module, 11-8, 11-24 of the system, 11-24 to the system, 11-8 D Data exchange, 4-4 Default parameters, SC, 11-6 of the analog output module, 11-22 Default setting for the Smart Connect, C-34, C-35, C-38 Default start-up, C-31 Definition electromagnetic compatibility, 6-4 grounded supply, 3-5 manufacturer ID, 5-9 master PROFIBUS address, 5-9 ET 200L, 1-3 station status, 5-8 Degree of protection, 6-8 Device master file, B-1, Glossary-2 Diagnostics, 5-1, Glossary-2 default start-up for ET 200L-SC, 5-15 definition, 5-5 DP slave, 5-7 general remarks, 5-6 station for ET 200L-SC, 5-13 module for ET 200L-SC, 5-10 using LEDs, 5-2 Disassemble electronics block, 2-6 supplementary terminal, 2-4 terminal block, 2-5 Display LED, 5-2, 5-3 status, 5-2 Disposal, iv Distributed I/O device, Glossary-2 DP master, Glossary-2 DP slave, Glossary-2 DP standard, Glossary-2 DP identifier, C-2 Index-2 E EB L 16 DI AC 120 V, 8-18 block diagram, 8-19 characteristics, 8-18 technical data, 8-20 EB L 16 DI DC 24 V, 8-3, 9-4 block diagram, 8-4 technical data, 8-5, 9-6 view, 8-3 EB L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A, 8-15 block diagram, 8-16 technical data, 8-16 view, 8-15 EB L 16 DO AC 120V/1.0A, 8-21 block diagram, 8-22 characteristics, 8-21 technical data, 8-23 EB L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A, 8-6 block diagram, 8-7 technical data, 8-7 view, 8-6 EB L 16 DO DC 24 V/AC 120V/2.0 A, 8-24 EB L 32 DI DC 24 V, 8-9 block diagram, 8-10 technical data, 8-11 view, 8-9 EB L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A, 8-12 block diagram, 8-13 technical data, 8-13 view, 8-12 EB L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A, 8-28 block diagram, 8-29 characteristics, 8-28 technical data, 8-29 EB L 8DI AC 120V/8 DO DC 24V/AC 120V/2.0A, 8-31 EB L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A, 9-13 block diagram, 9-14 technical data, 9-14 view, 9-13 EB L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V block diagram, 9-5 view, 9-4 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Index EB L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A, 9-7 block diagram, 9-8 technical data, 9-8 view, 9-7 EB L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V, 9-10 block diagram, 9-11 technical data, 9-12 view, 9-10 Electrical installation, configuring, 3-5 Electrical phenomena, protection against, 3-4 Electromagnetic compatibility, 6-4 Electronic module, SC, 1-11, 1-14 1 AI RTD, 12-44 1 AO I, 12-54 1 AO U, 12-50 1COUNT40kHz, 13-1 1DIAC120/230V, 10-11 1DOAC120/230V1A, 10-14 1DORel.AC230V, 10-17 2 AI HS I, 12-26, 12-32 2 AI HS U, 12-8 2 AI I, 12-14, 12-20 2 AI TC, 12-38 2 AI U, 12-2 2DIDC24V, 10-2 2DODC24V0.5A, 10-5 2DODC24V2A, 10-8 connecting additional, 4-5 installing, 2-13 Electronics block characteristics, 1-7 disassembling, 2-6 L 16 DI AC 120 V, 8-18 L 16 DI DC 24 V, 8-3 L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A, 8-15 L 16 DO AC 120V/1.0A, 8-21 L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A, 8-6 L 16 DO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0 A, 8-24 L 32 DI DC 24 V, 8-9 L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A, 8-12 L 8 DI AC 120V/8 DO DC 24 V/AC 120V/2.0A, 8-31 L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A, 8-28 L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V, 9-4 L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A, 9-13 L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V, 9-10 L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A, 9-7 EMC, 3-6 EMERGENCY STOP devices, 3-3 Emission of radio interference, 6-5 Equalizing circuit, 11-12 Equipotential bonding, Glossary-3 ET 200, Glossary-3 components, 1-2 incorporated modules, 1-8 what is the ET 200, 1-2 ET 200 distributed I/O system, 1-2 ET 200L block I/O device, 1-3 characteristics electronics block, 1-7 terminal block, 1-7 components, 1-9 definition, 1-3 view, 1-8 wiring, 3-11 ET 200L and Smart Connect, what is the ET 200L and Smart Connect, 1-3 ET 200L terminal block, wiring, 3-16 ET 200L-SC modular I/O device, 1-4 modules, 1-10 ET 200L-SC IM-SC components, 1-14 features, 1-13 fine-step modular I/O device, 1-5 IM-SC interface module, 1-13 Expansion, 4-5 F Fine-step modular I/O device, ET 200L-SC IMSC, 1-5 Floating, Glossary-3 FM approval, 6-3 FREEZE, Glossary-3 Function grounding, Glossary-3 Functioning, of thermocouples, 11-9 G General technical data, ET 200L, 6-1 Ground, Glossary-4 Grounded supply, 3-5 Grounding, Glossary-4 H Hotline, vi ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Index-3 Index I M Identifier, C-6 Identifiers for the ET 200L, C-2 Identifiers for the ET 200L-SC, C-6 IEC 1131, 6-2 IM-SC, 9-2 block diagram, 9-3 characteristics, 9-2 technical data, 9-3 view, 9-2 IM-SC interface module, 1-13 installing on the terminal block, 2-17 wiring, 3-18 Input ranges, SC bipolar, 11-30, 11-43 life-zero, 11-31, 11-44 unipolar, 11-30, 11-43 Installation, 2-1 electronics block, 2-6 requirements, 2-3 supplementary terminal, 2-4 terminal block, 2-4 Installation dimensions, SC, 2-7 Installation, ET 200L, sequence, 2-1 Installing terminal block for the Smart Connect, 2-8 the IM-SC interface module, 2-17 Insulation stripping length, ET 200L, 3-9 Insulation test, 6-8 Interface module IM-SC, 9-2 Interference frequency suppression, SC, 11-5 Internet, vi IP 20, Glossary-4 Mailbox, vi Maintenance, 4-5 Manual aids to using, v electronic, iv other, iv purpose of, iii Manufacturer ID, C-2 definition, 5-9 structure, 5-9 Master, Glossary-4 Master PROFIBUS address definition, 5-9 structure, 5-9 Measurement type/measurement range, 11-4 Measuring sensor, floating, 11-18 Mechanical environmental conditions, 6-7 Modular I/O device, ET 200L-SC, 1-4 Modules of the ET 200L-SC, 1-10 L Label, 3-12 Labeling sheet, SC, 1-12, 1-15 Labeling strips, SC, 2-9, 2-15 LED, 5-2, 5-3 BF, 5-2, 5-3 ON, 5-2, 5-3 LEDs on the ET 200L-SC, 5-3 Load circuit, 3-6 Load current power supply, characteristics, 3-6 Load power supply unit, Glossary-4 Loads on the SC, connecting, 11-26 Local ground, 3-14 Index-4 N Node, Glossary-4 Non-isolated, Glossary-4 O ON, 5-2, 5-3 Operating regulations, 3-3 Output ranges, SC bipolar, 11-37, 11-50 life-zero, 11-38, 11-51 unipolar, 11-37, 11-50 Output type/output range, 11-21 Overall installation in TN system, 3-7 P Parameterization, Glossary-5 tool for, 11-2, 11-20 Parameterization frame, C-14 Parameters for the Smart Connect, C-17 Plug-in rules, SC, 2-14 Power supply, 1-6 connecting, 3-17 Preface, iii ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Index Previous version, of the manual, iii Product overview, 1-1 PROFIBUS, Glossary-5 address, Glossary-5 location of rotary switch, 2-18 address modifying, 2-18 address validity, 2-18 PROFIBUS address, setting, 2-18 PROFIBUS-DP terminal connection, 3-13 PROFIBUS-DP, 1-2, Glossary-5 Programmable logic controller, Glossary-5 Protection against electrical phenomena, 3-4 Protective measures, 3-5 PS. See Power supply Pulse-shaped interference, 6-4 Q Queries, v R Rail, 1-6 Rated voltage, 6-9 Recycling, iv Reference junction, 11-5, 11-12 Reference potential, Glossary-5 Reference temperature, 11-5 Resistance thermometer, 11-17 Resistors, 11-17 Resolution, 11-29 Response time of the SC, analog output, 11-25 Rotary switch, 2-18 Rules for electronic modules, 2-13 general, 3-3 Smart Connect connecting, 3-24 connecting cable, 1-11 wiring, 3-14 Smart Connect SC, 1-10 Smoothing, SC, 11-5 Standards, 6-2 Standards and certification, 6-2 Start-up, 4-4 of plant, 3-3 Start-up types, C-3 Static parameters, of the analog output modules, 11-20 Station diagnosis, 5-13 Station status definition, 5-8 structure Part 1, 5-8 Part 2, 5-9 Part 3, 5-9 STEP 7, 4-2 Storage conditions, 6-6 Structure, of thermocouples, 11-9 Structure of the slave diagnosis, 5-7 Supplementary terminal, 7-18 dimension drawing, 7-19, 7-20 disassembling, 2-4 for TB 16SC and TB 16IM-SC, 7-20 installing, 2-4 versions supplied, 7-18, 7-20 Supplementary terminal ET 200L, SC, 1-15 Supplementary terminal, ET 200L, SC securing, 2-19 using, 3-22 Supplementary terminal, SC, 1-11 Supply isolating switch, 3-3 Supply voltage, 3-3 SYNC, Glossary-6 System designation, note on labeling strip, 2-12 S Safety class, 6-8 Safety regulations, 3-3 Settling time, SC, analog output, 11-25 Shield terminal, SC, 1-12, 1-15 Shipping conditions, 6-6 SIMATIC Customer Support, vi Sine-shaped interference, 6-5 Slave, 5-5, Glossary-6 diagnosis, structure, 5-7 requesting, 5-7 Slot, SC, 2-13 T TB 16IM-SC, 7-14 block diagram, 7-17 characteristics, 7-14 dimension drawing, 7-16 terminal designation, 3-17 wiring, 3-16 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Index-5 Index TB 16L, 7-2 dimension drawing, 7-2 pinout, 7-3 technical data, 7-3, 7-13, 7-17 TB 16L AC, 7-7 dimension drawing, 7-8 pinout, 7-9 technical data, 7-9 TB 16SC, 7-10 dimension drawing, 7-12 wiring, 3-14 TB 32L, 7-4 dimension drawing, 7-5 pinout, 7-6 technical data, 7-6 Technical data 1AI RTD, 12-48 1AO I, 12-57 1AO U, 12-53 1COUNT40kHz, 13-25 1DIAC120/230V, 10-13 1DOAC120/230V1A, 10-16 1DORel.AC230V, 10-19 2AI I , 12-18, 12-24 2AI HS I, 12-30, 12-36 2AI TC, 12-42 2AI HS U, 12-12 2AI U , 12-6 2DIDC24V , 10-4 2DODC24V0.5A, 10-7 2DODC24V2A, 10-10 climatic environmental conditions, 6-7 data of the individual components, 8-1, 9-1 electromagnetic compatibility, 6-4 general, ET 200L, 6-1 mechanical environmental conditions, 6-7 transport and storage conditions, 6-6 Temperature measurement, 11-9 Terminal block (spring terminal) wiring, 3-10 characteristics, 1-7 connecting, 3-11 disassembling, 2-5 installing, 2-4 snapping onto, SC, 2-8 TB 16IM-SC, 1-14, 7-14 TB 16L, 7-2 TB 16L AC, 7-7 TB 16SC, 7-10 TB 32L, 7-4 TB16-SC, 1-11 Index-6 Terminal connection model, 3-12 Terminal designation, TB 16SC, TB 16IM-SC, 3-17 Test voltage, 6-8 Thermocouple types, 11-9 Thermocouple, SC, 11-9 how it works, 11-9 structure, 11-9 with compensating box, 11-13 Tightening torque, connecting cables, 3-9 TN system, 3-7 Training, v Type file, B-1, Glossary-6 Type files for the default start-up, C-32 Type files, device master files, B-1 U UL recognition, 6-3 Ungrounded, Glossary-6 V View of ET 200L, 1-8 Voltage drop, 6-9 Voltage sensor, non-isolated, 11-14 W Wiring ET 200L and Smart Connect, 3-1 ET 200L terminal block, 3-16 IM-SC interface module, 3-18 Smart Connect, 3-14 TB 16IM-SC, 3-16 TB 16SC, 3-14 terminal block (spring terminal), 3-10 Wiring rules, SC, 3-9 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Siemens AG A&D AS E 148 Postfach 1963 D-92209 Amberg Federal Republic of Germany From: Your Name: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Your Title: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Company Name: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Street: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ City, Zip Code:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Country: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Phone: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Please check any industry that applies to you: Automotive Pharmaceutical Chemical Plastic Electrical Machinery Pulp and Paper Food Textiles Instrument and Control Transportation Nonelectrical Machinery Other _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Petrochemical ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 1 Remarks Form Your comments and recommendations will help us to improve the quality and usefulness of our publications. Please take the first available opportunity to fill out this questionnaire and return it to Siemens. Please give each of the following questions your own personal mark within the range from 1 (very good) to 5 (poor). 1. Do the contents meet your requirements? 2. Is the information you need easy to find? 3. Is the text easy to understand? 4. Does the level of technical detail meet your requirements? 5. Please rate the quality of the graphics/tables: 6. 7. 8. Additional comments: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 2 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c Siemens AG A&D AS E 148 Postfach 1963 D-92209 Amberg Federal Republic of Germany From: Your Name: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Your Title: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Company Name: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Street: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ City, Zip Code:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Country: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Phone: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Please check any industry that applies to you: Automotive Pharmaceutical Chemical Plastic Electrical Machinery Pulp and Paper Food Textiles Instrument and Control Transportation Nonelectrical Machinery Other _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Petrochemical ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c 1 Remarks Form Your comments and recommendations will help us to improve the quality and usefulness of our publications. Please take the first available opportunity to fill out this questionnaire and return it to Siemens. Please give each of the following questions your own personal mark within the range from 1 (very good) to 5 (poor). 1. Do the contents meet your requirements? 2. Is the information you need easy to find? 3. Is the text easy to understand? 4. Does the level of technical detail meet your requirements? 5. Please rate the quality of the graphics/tables: 6. 7. 8. Additional comments: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 2 ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c